JP2019080961A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of sustaining a player's eagerness for participation in a game.SOLUTION: According to the present embodiment, when "a jackpot" is established, the game machine executes any of "without Janken (a rock-paper-scissors game) performance and Janken performances A-E" in a variable display in a third symbol display device 81, and notifies about what brings the current jackpot by a type of a Janken performance to be executed then. A player can thus acquire the particulars of the current "jackpot". Therefore, even when this makes the player doubt why the "jackpot" is produced, the game machine can clear the doubt. This configuration can eliminate such a situation that the player continuously has a feeling of discomfort due to the doubt that is not cleared, so as to inhibit the lowering of the player's eagerness for participation in the game. Accordingly, this configuration can continuously sustain the player's eagerness for the participation in the game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 40

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a big hit lottery is performed along with the game ball winning to the starting opening, and a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the display screen, or the lottery result is notified by a sound or a lamp. Pachinko machines are known. The pachinko machine is provided with a low probability state in which the probability of becoming a big hit in a big hit lottery is low and a high probability state in which the probability of becoming a big win is higher than the low probability state as gaming states. One of the game states is set. In addition, as a lottery result of the jackpot lottery, for example, a probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot, and a deviation are provided, and when it becomes a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, the gaming state is set to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot effect, and if the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the gaming state is set to a low probability state after the jackpot effect is ended. Be done. In the pachinko machine, the gaming state changes according to the lottery result, but the lottery result is indicated by effects such as a fluctuation effect or a jackpot effect, so the player pays attention to effects such as a fluctuation effect or a specific effect. , You can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine.

  In this type of pachinko machine, in addition to the above-described lottery results, for example, a hit such as a sudden hit and a small hit, and a fluctuation presentation and a hit presentation according to the hit (hereinafter referred to as "specific production") In addition, the interest of the game is improved by increasing the chance of winning and the pattern of the effect. In such a pachinko machine, when a big hit lottery is performed, if the lottery result is similar to the conventional one (that is, a probability change big hit, a normal big hit, or a departure), the fluctuation according to the lottery result as before An effect or a jackpot effect is performed, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player according to the lottery result. However, if the lottery result is a hit or a small hit, regardless of the lottery result, the predetermined gaming value is not given to the player, and similar fluctuation effects and specific effects are obtained. To be done. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a hit, the gaming state is set to the high probability state after the end of the specific effect, and if the lottery result is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained.

  As described above, in such a pachinko machine, similar fluctuation effects and specific effects are performed when the lottery result is a hit or a small hit, so the player pays attention to effects such as the change effects and the specific effects. Even if it is, it becomes difficult to distinguish the lottery results, and it becomes unclear whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine has changed. Then, once the gaming state becomes unknown, the player continues to play pachinko until the lottery result is indicated by a random change jackpot or a jackpot effect or the like when the lottery result becomes a jackpot or a regular jackpot after this. I can not grasp the game state of.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-333089

  However, even if the player is able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine because the lottery result has become a big hit or a big hit normally, the gaming state is about the gaming state during which the gaming state is unknown, the player is I can not grasp. Therefore, even if the lottery result is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot and a predetermined gaming value is given, the player may feel uncomfortable because the process of winning is unknown. If the player is asked to question the player, the player will continue playing the game without solving the question, and thereafter, the player will continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to continue to have a willingness to participate in a game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is based on a display means for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means. It comprises: mode selection means for selecting a mode of production including the mode of dynamic display of the identification information, and production control means for performing control so that production of the mode selected by the mode selection means is performed, the lottery At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, The first opening control means for opening an entry difficult to enter game media for a first period, and the entrance when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results. The above When the second opening control means, which opens for a second period shorter than one period, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, the gaming medium has difficulty entering the entrance. An entrance maintaining means for maintaining, a game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to a player when a game medium enters the entrance, a lottery result of a lottery by the lottery means is the first and the second. If any of the third lottery result, the first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine And the probability that the first to third lottery results will be selected in the lottery by the lottery means when the first gaming state setting means and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result But The second gaming state setting means for setting the second gaming state lower than the first gaming state as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth lottery results In any case, when the gaming state maintaining means for maintaining the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, the lottery for storing at least that effect. When the result storing means and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means become either of the first and second lottery results, the mode selecting means is selected according to the contents of the lottery result storing means And a mode switching means for switching the mode.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein among lotterys made in the lottery means, a lottery made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result. The lottery result storage unit stores the number counted by the counting unit, and the mode switching unit is configured to count the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit. Or, if any of the second lottery results, whether the number counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and whether the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state The mode is selected when the determination means determines that the number of times is one or more and a predetermined number of times or less and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state The embodiment is selected in section, embodiments are selected in accordance with a lottery result of the lottery by the selecting means, and a mode is switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means is to switch to a different aspect.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the aspect of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means is the lottery Depending on the result, it is selected by the mode selecting means, and control is performed by the effect control means so that the effect of the selected mode is executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result In the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is not the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes any of the first and second lottery results. The mode selected in the mode selecting means can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game, and therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, among the lottery performed in the lottery means, the number of lotterys made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the counted number of the lottery is the lottery result It is stored in the storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the number of times counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine When it is determined by the determination means whether the game is in the second gaming state, the aspect selected in the mode selection means by the mode switching means is selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, A mode different from the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means is switched. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, it is not easy to select the first or second lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means. Therefore, after the fourth lottery result is reached, the first or second lottery result is selected within the predetermined number of times without changing to the third lottery result and in the second gaming state. The probability of failure is quite low. According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the first or second lottery result is selected in a state where the probability of selection of the first or second lottery result is considerably low. The player can be made to know what has been done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to have a sense of surprise that the first or second lottery result has been selected in a situation with a very low probability and satisfaction that he is lucky. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more continuously motivated to participate in the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the model which showed typically the structure of various counters and various holding ball storage areas. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot classification table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special symbol small hitting random number table. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number table per symbol normally. It is a schematic diagram showing composition of a game state flag typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of a special symbol lottery result storage area. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the presentation pattern table typically. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the Janken effect. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect end determination table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect restart decision table. (C) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous notice determination table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the presentation performed when the random selection | lottery result of a special symbol is hit or is a small hit. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the presentation performed when the random selection | lottery result of a special symbol turns into a probability variation big hit or a regular big hit after specific presentation is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the specific presentation control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous notice determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special production setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop classification command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows fanfare command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows round number command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back surface image change command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transmission setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in case the fluctuation display is performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special performance setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed the structure of the lottery result log | history storage area typically. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen of the fluctuation display performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81. FIG.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage" → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In addition, in FIG. 2, in order to make the reference numerals easy to understand, parts such as nails and metal fittings are removed and illustrated.

  The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A variable display unit 80, which will be described later, is disposed in the central portion of the game area, and below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed. . When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is made by the main controller 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first ball entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  On the left and right of the variable display unit 80, one second entrance port 67 through which a ball can pass is provided. When the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is made by the control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the second symbol display device 83. In addition, since the second ball entrance 67 is not a winning opening, even if the ball passes, the payout of the winning balls is not performed.

  In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, when it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit The determination of the type is also performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is not determined, it is determined whether the special symbol is a small hit or not.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit or not. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, once for 0.2 seconds or twice for 1 second), The ball enters the ball entry port 64 easily. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as a big hit classification of the special symbol, 3 types of “15 R definite variation big hit of special symbol”, “15 R usually big hit of special symbol” and “crash hit of special symbol” are provided, and each big hit A game value (game value) is given to the player according to the type.

  "The special pattern of 15R probability variation big hit" is when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the 15 round jackpot (first special gaming state) and the first special gaming state is over, the gaming of the pachinko machine 10 It is a jackpot that the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state”. "The special symbol 15R normal jackpot" is when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the 15 round jackpot (first special gaming state) and the first special gaming state ends, the gaming of the pachinko machine 10 As the state shifts to the "special symbol low probability state", the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) is a jackpot that becomes the "normal symbol time reduction state" described later. The details of the first special gaming state will be described later.

  In addition, when "the special symbol hit" is transferred to a hit (second special game state) different from the 15 round big hit (first special game state) described above, and the second special game state is ended. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the transition to "high probability state of special symbol". The details of the second special gaming state will also be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is very short compared to the period in which the first special gaming state is in effect. For this reason, the "special symbol hit" has a smaller game value (game value) to be given to the player than "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" and "the special symbol 15R regular jackpot".

  In addition, "the small hit of the special symbol" is not the big hit of the special symbol, but is the hit provided separately with it, and when it becomes the "small hit of the special symbol", the second special game mentioned above Although the state is shifted, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change (is maintained) even when the second special gaming state is ended. In addition, "the removal of the special symbol" indicates that any of the jackpots, did not hit any, "if the special symbol is out", the first special gaming state or the above-mentioned The second special gaming state is not established, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changed (maintained). In the present embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is performed, effects according to the lottery result are displayed in the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device (speaker etc. not shown) 226, etc. And the lamp display device 227 or the like. Details of this effect will be described later.

  Here, "the high probability state of special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, so-called "a definite variation state of the special symbol (in the definite variation of the special symbol)", in other words, the jackpot of 15 rounds It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to (the first special game state). In the present embodiment, in the case of "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" and "crash hit of special symbol", transition is made to "high probability state of special symbol", but in the case of "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" Further, the probability of hitting the symbol normally increases, and the game becomes easy to enter the ball into the first entrance 64 into the game state ("time symbol state of the normal symbol" described later). On the other hand, in the case of "a special symbol hit", it only shifts to "a special symbol high probability state".

  Hereinafter, the "special symbol high probability state" transitioning to the "special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" is referred to as "special symbol high probability state A", and becomes the "special symbol prominence hit". The "special symbol high probability state" to be transferred is referred to as "special symbol high probability state B". And when showing both "the high probability state A of a special symbol" and "the high probability state B of a special symbol", it simply describes as "the high probability state of a special symbol".

  On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal It is a state (normal state of special symbol). In addition, while the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot of the special symbol, although the drawing of the special symbol is not performed, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  Also, "time symbol of normal symbol" (during the short hours of symbol) is a gaming condition in which the ball is likely to enter the first ball entry port 64 with an increased probability of hitting the symbol normally. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of the normal pattern" is called "normal state of the normal pattern", this is the probability that the hitting probability of the normal pattern is normal, that is, the hitting probability of the normal pattern Is a low condition. In addition, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed regardless of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 described later, and mainly displays the lottery result of the special symbol. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and can display the lottery result of a special symbol with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color. In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (a special symbol of 15R probability variation big hit, special symbol The special symbol (the first symbol) according to the 15R normal jackpot of the, the hit of the special symbol) is shown. Also, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit of the special symbol, it is shown that it is a small hit of the special symbol. In addition, the special symbol indicating the collision of the special symbol and the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol are similar to each other, and are configured so that the player can not easily recognize. The reason why the player configures the special symbol to be difficult to recognize easily will be described later.

  As described above, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 83 is changed by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) which is performed along with the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state As a stop symbol after the end of the change or the display, the normal symbol according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The normal symbol indicating is displayed stopped.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 has a predetermined opening period. (In this embodiment, it is activated (opened) only for 0.2 seconds once or twice for 1 second, and as a result, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 easily. Is configured. The details of the open period of the motorized role will be described later.

  If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 And the second symbol hold lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. In addition, four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 in left-right symmetry. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting an ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased in "during a special symbol oddity" or in "time symbol of an ordinary symbol", but the hitting of an ordinary symbol is Instead of changing the probability, according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state of special symbol" or "low probability state of special symbol", accompanying to the first entrance 64 It may be configured to change the opening time of the motorized part (not shown) or the number of times of opening of the motorized part associated with one hit of the ordinary symbol.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later. Although details will be described later, for example, a predetermined back image is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the left, middle, and right 3 are displayed on the front of the back image One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed in the main control device 110, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol or 15R normal jackpot of special symbol", the predetermined time (variation time) ) Turns on the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 to become a stop symbol indicating the big hit type of the special symbol, and the third symbol stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type of the special symbol is the third symbol It is displayed on the display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot (first special game state) of which the maximum number of rounds is 15 is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot (first special gaming state) in which a large amount of award balls are paid out from the normal time. In the first special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, has a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "10 balls are won to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a" and " It is released until one of the conditions of “30 seconds after opening is satisfied”.

  Then, the specified winning opening 65a has a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, one of the conditions "10 balls are won for the ball to the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a" and "30 seconds after opening") When it passes, it is closed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined opening period. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a small symbol of a special symbol or a small symbol of a special symbol”, a predetermined symbol (variation time) has passed and then a special symbol of a certain hit or a small hit The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a stop symbol indicating the stop symbol of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state described above. In the second special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds have elapsed from opening").

  Then, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, until "0.2 seconds from opening" elapses), and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is again determined. Opening period is open. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated 15 times. However, in this case, since the opening time of the specific winning hole 65a is short, it is difficult for the ball to get to the specific winning hole 65a as in the normal time.

  Hereinafter, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol or 15R normal big hit of special symbol" (ie, specific winning opening 65a in the first special gaming state Is referred to as "the first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a". In addition, the opening and closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a collision of a special symbol or a small hitting of the special symbol" (ie opening and closing of the specified winning opening 65a in the second special gaming state The operation) is referred to as "the second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a".

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the second entry hole 67, the main controller 110 draws the normal symbol (the second symbol) and when the normal symbol is hit, the predetermined time (variation is made After the elapse of time), a stop symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “o”) indicating the normal symbol hit is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Then, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined open period, and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball entrance 64. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time of the electric character is different depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "time saving state of the normal symbol" or "normal state of the normal symbol". There is. Specifically, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the time saving state of the normal symbol", when the normal symbol comes into contact, the electric role item attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened twice in a row, It is opened for 1 second each time. On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "normal state of the ordinary symbol", when the symbol comes in contact with the ordinary symbol, the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball entrance 64 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds. . Therefore, in the case of the “normal symbol time reduction state”, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 more easily than the “normal symbol normal state”. Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and it becomes easy to carry out the lottery of the special symbol.

  Further, as described above, below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed the first entry port 64 where the ball can enter the ball, and when the first entry port 64, the ball enters the ball. Five balls are also one of the winning openings that are paid out as winning balls. Therefore, when the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is increased by becoming a time saving state of a normal symbol, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases accordingly, and as a result, even if playing a game, the balls are reduced It will be in a difficult state or in a state where balls are not reduced. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the player can obtain an expectation that a jackpot can be obtained in a state in which the balls are difficult to reduce or in a state in which the balls are not reduced. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  However, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "time saving state of the normal symbol", even if the period of the above-mentioned 15 rounds of jackpots (first special gaming state) becomes hitting of the normal symbol, the first entering ball The motorized accessory associated with the mouth 64 is opened for 0.2 seconds only once. This is because during the 15 rounds of jackpots (during the first special game state), the player hits a ball in an attempt to make a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first ball entrance 64 is released. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  Hereinafter, except for the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state, the opening and closing operation of the electric character when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "time symbol of the normal symbol" and hits the normal symbol , "The first opening and closing operation of the motorized role". In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state, or when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the normal state of the ordinary symbol", the opening / closing operation of the electrically operated combination when the ordinary symbol is hit, It is referred to as "the second opening / closing operation of the motorized role".

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. In the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is It can be viewed through the small windows 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same main symbol is used when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is “15R probability variation jackpot, 15 normal jackpot”. A variation display in which the symbols are aligned is performed, and after the variation display is finished, a jackpot (first special game state) of 15 rounds is generated. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the variable display in which the main symbol to which the odd number "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" is added is aligned and stopped is displayed To be done. Further, in the case of "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are displayed in a uniform stop.

  In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", a continuous notice that indicates that the possibility of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is high (notice) An effect may be performed, and in that case, when the variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, a combination of main symbols on the effective line L1 sequentially from the left symbol row Z1 “3” “ The so-called "chance", which is 4 "or" 1 ", is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", the stop display is given by a combination of predetermined main symbols (e.g. Variable display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, a rear image is displayed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the lottery result of the special symbol. In this embodiment, as a back image type, “a back image for a high probability of a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as“ a back image for a high probability ”)” and “a back image for a short time of a normal symbol ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “rear image for short time”, “rear image for special effect”, and “rear image for low probability of special symbol (hereinafter“ rear image for low probability ”) And at least one of the three types of back images is set as the back image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The “Rear image for high probability” is a rear image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “special symbol high probability state A”, and the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot” Thereafter, when the above-described 15 rounds of jackpot (first special game state) is ended, the main display area Dm is displayed. In addition, “the rear view image for the time saving” is a rear view image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “the time saving state of the normal symbol” and “the low probability state of the special symbol”. When the lottery result of the symbol becomes “15R normal jackpot” and thereafter, the above-mentioned 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is ended, it is displayed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, "the back image for special effect" is a back image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state B of the special symbol", the special symbol If the lottery result of "is a special symbol or a special symbol small hit" and then the second special game state described above is ended (when the specific effect described later is ended), the main display It is displayed in the area Dm.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" in the state that the "rear image for special effect" is displayed in the main display area Dm. When the variable display corresponding to the "deletion of the special symbol" is finished, the "rear image for special effect" displayed in the main display area Dm is "low probability of the special symbol" with a predetermined probability. It is switched (changed) to "Rear Image for Hour". However, for the case where the back image displayed in the main display area Dm is switched from "back image for special effect" to "back image for special symbol low probability time", thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol When the variable display corresponding to the "deletion of the special symbol" is finished by changing the "special symbol out", it is returned to the "rear image for special effect" with a predetermined probability.

  The “rear image for low probability” is a rear image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not the “normal symbol short time state” but the “special symbol low probability state”. A pachinko machine is used for the case where the back image is switched to the "back image for special symbol low probability" while the "back image for special effect" is displayed in the main display area Dm. It becomes a back image which shows that 10 game states are "the low probability state of a special symbol, or the high probability state B of a special symbol".

  Further, the main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the main display area Dm is superimposed on the front of a predetermined rear image ), Three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Further, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-described variable display and stop display of the third symbol, decorative display is performed along with the display of the first symbol display device 37. Although details will be described later, for example, a display (big hit effect) indicating that a jackpot of 15 rounds (first special game state) is in progress, and a second special game state different from the first special game state Is displayed (specific effect). Incidentally, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “a sudden hit of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol”.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol or a small symbol of a special symbol", a display different from normal (special effect) is made, and then, in the main display area Dm, " "Back image for special effects" is displayed. In the special effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be "the high probability state B of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be advantageous to the player. It is an effect for notifying a player that there is a

  Also, for example, when variable display and stop display, or various effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, etc. operate according to the display or various effects. The lamp lights and flashes, and audio output is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the voice lamp control device is used for complex processing such as determination of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 so that the main control device 110 can concentrate on main control regarding the game such as lottery of special symbols. A sub control device such as the display control device 114 or the display control device 114 is configured to perform. When instructing the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, the main control device 110 transmits various commands from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device. The various commands are transmitted by the data transmission / reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit only in one direction.

  In the main control unit 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of normal symbols, setting of display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of display of the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display of the third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, setting of display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of display of the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display of the third symbol display device 81 Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 32) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas). Stores the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the first entrance 64, respectively. Ru. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail below. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and then reached 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number to be the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a If it matches with the set value of the random number that will be the jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. Also, this special symbol big hit random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state time period) of special symbol and high probability of high probability of becoming special symbol big win from that low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random value "7, 307, 582" is the special symbol for low probability The jackpot random number table 202a is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of jackpots is 3, so the probability of being a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of special symbol, there are 30 random value which becomes a jackpot of special symbol, and the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are special symbol jackpot random number tables for high probability times It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/30".

  In the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time and the winning value stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability time are overlapped. Each winning value is set so as not to be a value. Here, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is always a random value used as a winning value, the random value will be easily predicted from the outside, so an illegal input will be made from the outside, and a large hit will be made illegally. It may be easier to On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the gaming situation of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol) By changing the random number value, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol, so it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type (stop type at the time of jackpot) when it becomes a jackpot of the special symbol. Specifically, the determination of the jackpot type is the determination of the type of stop at the time of jackpot. First hit type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 119), and after reaching a maximum value (for example, 119 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 119), 0 It is configured to return to. That is, the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Thereafter, when the drawing of the special symbol is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the value of the first random number counter C1 is the big hit of the special symbol If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the same timing as the value of the first random number counter C1 is the specific display mode at the time of the big hit It becomes an aspect.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number for the big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number for which the special symbol goes out, the special one based on the value of the first random number counter C1 A drawing of the small hit of the symbol is performed. And, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number which is a small hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a small hit of the special symbol It becomes a thing. In addition, about the small hit of a special symbol, since there is no hit classification, the display mode becomes always the same. In addition, since there is no hit type, there is only one stop type at the time of small hit, which is uniquely determined.

  Then, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is neither a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol nor a random number to be a small hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol of out-of-order, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  As described above, the value of the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 119. The random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table 202b, and this table is the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 It is provided inside.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 39” in the first counter type counter C2 is “the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” It becomes. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "40-59" will be "hump of special symbol", the jackpot type when the value is "60-119", "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol It becomes ". Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, according to the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2, three types of jackpot types (special pattern 15R probability variation big hit, special symbol exact hit, special symbol 15R normal The jackpot is configured to be determined. Specifically, the determination of the jackpot type is the determination of the type of stop at the time of jackpot.

  And while the total number of random numbers is 120, since the total number of random numbers that will be "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" is 40, it will be "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" when it becomes the special symbol jackpot The probability is "1/3". Similarly, since the total number of random numbers that will be "a special symbol's sudden hit" is 20, when it becomes a big hit of a special symbol, the probability of "a special symbol's sudden hit" becomes "1/6", " Since the total number of random numbers for the special symbol 15R usually hits is 60, the probability of becoming the special symbol 15R usually hit is 1/2.

  As described above, at the low probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming the jackpot of the special symbol is "1/300". Therefore, at the low probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming a "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" becomes "2/1800", and the probability of becoming a "special symbol of sudden hit" becomes "1/1800", of the "special symbol of The probability of becoming “15R normal jackpot” is “3/1800”. On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/30". Therefore, at the high probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" becomes "2/180", the probability of becoming "the sudden symbol of special symbol" becomes "1/180", of "special symbol of The probability of becoming “15R normal jackpot” is “3/180”.

  Moreover, the random number value for determining the small hitting of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is set by the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c, and this table is the main control device It is provided in the ROM 202 of 110. In the present embodiment, the probability of becoming "a small hit of a special symbol" does not change (is constant) regardless of whether it is a low probability of a special symbol or a high probability of a special symbol.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the first random number counter C1, four random number values “0 to 3” are provided to be “a small hit of a special symbol”. Since the total number of random numbers for the first random number counter C1 is 900, the total number of random numbers for the "special symbol small hit" is 4, so the probability for the special symbol to be a small hit is "8/1800" Become.

  As mentioned above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the probability of becoming a "special symbol's hit" is "1/1800" and the probability of being a "special symbol's small hit" is always "8/1800." . Therefore, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the probability that it will be "a hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol" is "9/1800". On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, the probability of being "a sudden hit of a special symbol" is "1/180", and the probability of being a small hit of the special symbol is always "8/1800". Therefore, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the probability of becoming a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol small hit" is "18/1800".

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64.

  In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop symbol is 1 before and after the reach symbol. "Outside back and forth out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) which stops by shifting by one, and "reach out of back and forth out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected:) and "completely out of reach" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, the range of the random number value for each stop classification of the special symbol out Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 32). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entry ball slot 64.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 uses so-called short separation (5 seconds), long separation (11 seconds), normal reach (20 seconds), and super reach (90 seconds) by the variation type counter CS1 and the special symbol variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. Determine variation patterns such as sec) and special reach (120 sec). Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the reach type or the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Determine the variation mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the special symbol variation pattern table 202d, a special symbol variation pattern table 202d used when a special symbol is hit and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d used when the special symbol is detached are prepared. In addition, depending on whether it is the time shortening state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol excluding the time shortening state of the normal symbol as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d for the removal of the special symbol. A special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (certain variation) of the special symbol and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (usually) of the special symbol are prepared.

  When the jackpot lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1, if the lottery result is "jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)", the special for the jackpot Based on the pattern variation pattern table 202d and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the same timing as the first random number counter C1, the variation pattern at the time of big hit of the special symbol is determined Be done. On the other hand, if the lottery result is "a special symbol's collision or a small symbol or a special symbol's detachment", a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of a special symbol and its first random number counter Based on the same timing as C1 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the variation pattern at the time of removal of the special symbol is determined.

  For example, as a variation pattern at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol, there are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d for the jackpot, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is various normal reach 0 to 10, super reach various 11 to 99, special reach various 100 to 198 It has become. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various special reach variations are longer than super reach. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the time reach (for example, a reach that develops further after a super reach or a special reach where a destination from a normal reach differs from a super reach).

  Since the variation pattern for the jackpot is selected in the case of “the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)”, various special reach are selected to give the player a sense of expectation It is easier. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach are selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition to that, there are multiple reach with different effects, such as the one to which a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and the one to which a jackpot effect by re-change is added.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit of the special symbol is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another fluctuation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect for giving notice of the start of a jackpot or reach effect before the start of a change or during a change effect, or when reach is established, The number of first symbols (or third symbols) to be stopped may be determined by shifting the number of symbols and stopping (for example, one symbol offset or the like).

  Also, for example, as a variation pattern at the time of removal of the special symbol, there are various types such as short, long, various normal reach, and various super reach. In addition, for example, there are various types of normal reach and various types of super reach as a variation pattern at the time of striking of a special symbol and a variation pattern at the time of small hitting of a special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of the special symbol (normal) is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol except for the time shortening state of the normal symbol. Ru. In addition, regardless of the time saving state of the normal symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol, etc., it is referred that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a special symbol hitting a special hit" or "a small symbol hitting a special symbol".

  Special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) is a complete removal only that is referred to when the complete removal is determined as the type of stop at the special symbol removal, and a reach other than the front and back out of reach and back and forth out of reach Is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type of the special symbol at the time of reach common referred to when the is determined, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each of the divided groups Are associated.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “a special symbol of collision” or “a small symbol of a special symbol”, ie, when a collision is determined as a stop type at the time of big hit, or For the case where the stop type at the time of small hit is determined, a reach common group (group) is selected from the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for removal (ordinary) of the special symbol.

  For complete dedication only, there are short deviances in which the fluctuation ends in a short time and reach does not hold, and long deductions that cause a longer fluctuation time than the short declination, but with a value of fluctuation type counter CS1. As for the correspondence, the short gap is 0 to 148, and the long gap is 149 to 198. In addition, common reach includes various out-of-reach normal reach types in which the reach is established but the variation time is short, and out-of-range super reach types in which the variation time is longer than the various normal reach types. The various types of normal reach are 0 to 148, and the various types of super reach are 149 to 198.

  Also, when the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probable variation) is a normal symbol time reduction state or a special symbol high probability state, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" Referenced. For the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probable variation), complete removal is determined as the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol, similarly to the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) If there is a special symbol deviating stop type at the time of deviating from special symbol, it is divided into groups (groups) with complete deviating only when referred to and with reach common which is referenced when reaching before and after out of reach and before or after out of reach The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  The correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the complete deviation exclusive use is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, as for the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in common reach, various out-of-normal reach types are 0 to 148, and out-of-range super reach types are 149 to 198.

  The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of this special symbol (probability variation) is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation. Is easy to enter the ball. Therefore, when a long run is frequently performed when the time saving state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is performed, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving the player a waiting state, and the game May cause discomfort to people. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, when it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol, it is configured to be easy to select the short gap than in other cases, and by performing the start of the next variable display early, the game Can reduce the possibility of giving discomfort to people. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  In addition, although the variation pattern at the time of the special symbol's deviation is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc.) good. In addition, the selection of the special symbol outclassification type is configured to be divided into the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol detachment (usually) and the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol detachment (probable variation) However, even if the special symbol is in a low probability state, if there are a plurality of holding balls (for example, three or more in the case of the maximum of four), the variation display may be ended early, so the special symbol may be removed. It may be selected by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for (certain variation), or it may be configured to prepare the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of holding balls. good.

  Furthermore, in the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of each special symbol mentioned above, the short deviation and the long deviation are simply regarded as the deviation, and when the deviation is selected, the short deviation and the length are referred to other tables. It may be configured to select out-of-space with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  Although the details will be described later, in the main controller 110, when the fluctuation pattern is determined based on each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern type is controlled from the main controller 110 by the audio lamp It is sent to the device 113. Also, when the lottery result is determined based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, the stop type command indicating the lottery result is the main control device The signal is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113 from 110. As described above, the fluctuation pattern type indicates the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation. In the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are received, the third symbol display is synchronized with the fluctuation display and the stop display of the first symbol display device 37. Third symbol display device 81 is controlled such that variable display and stop display of the third symbol are performed by device 81.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol random number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary random number table 202e. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the hit which is set by, it is judged as the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table 202e is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol), and high probability (normal symbol) with high probability of becoming a hit of normal symbol from the time of low probability Are divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the one for the high probability state of the special symbol, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers corresponding to the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table 202e for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 24, so the probability that the symbol is normally hit is “1/10”.

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table 202e for high probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200. Therefore, the probability that the symbol is normally hit is "1 / 1.2".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “○” is displayed as lit), and the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × two times”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, attached to the first ball entrance 64 Since the release period of the motorized role is very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is only "one second x 2 times". Although it is open, the open time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, the motorized prize attached to the first ball entrance 64 may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 32), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further has at least a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a gaming state flag 203e. ing.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entry slot 64, and the acquired data includes four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is an execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as drawing of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball is stored while the order in which the balls pass is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. Also, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the data corresponding to the passage of the ball is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. The values are added (see S204 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S404 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S205 of FIG. 24). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol storage ball number counter 203 c is incremented by one. You can get the value of the ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 29).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S603 in FIG. 28: No).

  The gaming state flag 203 e is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the gaming state flag 203e will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the gaming state flag. The gaming state flag 203e is configured by one byte (8 bits), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by the lower 3 bits (bit 0 to bit 2). The other bits (bits 3 to 7) are not used.

  And as shown in FIG. 8, when lower 3 bits are "000", it shows that it is "low probability state of special symbol", and when lower 3 bits are "010", "high probability state of special symbol" It shows that it is "A", and when lower 3 bits are "100", it shows that it is "high probability state B of a special symbol". That is, when the lower 3 bits are "010", as a result of becoming "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol", it becomes "high probability state A of special symbol", and further, time saving state of regular symbol (hit probability is up Indicates that it is). In addition, when the lower 3 bits are “100”, as a result of becoming “the special symbol's collision probability”, it becomes “the special symbol high probability state B”, and the normal symbol's collision probability is in the normal state Show.

  This gaming state flag 203e refers to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability time or the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time when performing the lottery of special symbols Used by the MPU 201 to make decisions.

  Specifically, when the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "000", if the lottery of the special symbol is performed, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time is referred to, and the big hit lottery is made. To be done. On the other hand, when the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "010" or "100", if a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is referred to, and the big hit lottery Is done. Although details will be described later, reference is also made to the case of prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

  In this gaming state flag 203e, all bits are set to "0" by the initial setting process (see S914 of FIG. 31) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. When the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to "000" (see S414 in FIG. 26). Then, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed and the lottery result is "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol", when the jackpot is finished, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to "010" ((0) See S1113 in FIG. Also, when a special symbol lottery is performed, and the lottery result is “15R normal jackpot of a special symbol”, when the jackpot is over, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “000”. (See S1114 in FIG. 33).

  Further, when a special symbol lottery is performed, and the lottery result is “a special symbol hit”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “100” when the specific effect is finished. (See S1208 in FIG. 34). In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol is done, when the lottery result is “the special symbol is out”, the lower 3 bits of the game state flag 203e are not changed.

  In the present embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is "15R of the special symbol usually hit", the state of the gaming state flag 203e is "000" when the big hit is over. Is set to (see S1114 in FIG. 33), but since the lower 3 bits are set to "000" at the start of the jackpot, the game state flag 203e is not set when the jackpot ends. It may be configured to (do nothing).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed in main controller 110 and the prefetching command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. . In the present embodiment, as the ball wins (start winning) to the first entrance 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the big hit of the original special symbol Apart from the lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 and CS1. As described above, before the drawing of the original special symbol is performed, various kinds of information obtained when the original drawing is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning combination. The prediction of the information will be described later, when the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  If the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted, first, one of the two types of special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 5), one table to be used for prediction is determined, and thereafter, the special symbol is selected. As in the case of the lottery, when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the one table 202a used for the prediction (hit value), and any of the values match. It is predicted (judged) that the lottery result is a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when predicting the lottery result of the special symbol, if the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "000", the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability is used to predict success or failure. Be done. On the other hand, if the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "010" or "100", the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is used to predict the success or failure.

  And the success or failure of the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted, and as a result, if the jackpot is predicted, the jackpot type is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, as in the case of the special symbol lottery, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 and the random number stored in the special symbol jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 5) The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first collision type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, if it is predicted that the lottery result of the special symbol is a drop of the special symbol, then it is predicted whether it is a small hit of the special symbol.

  When it is predicted whether or not the special symbol is small, it is stored in the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol small hit random number table 202c, as in the case of the special symbol lottery. The value is compared with the value of the random number (hit value). And if it is predicted that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a small hit of the special symbol, then the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol is predicted. Even when the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol is predicted, the value of the acquired stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop type selection table (not shown) are stored as in the case of the big hit lottery of the special symbol. The value of the selected random number is compared and the type of stop corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, even when the variation pattern type is predicted, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the special symbol variation pattern table 202d, as in the case of the jackpot lottery The fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, when the read ahead is executed in main controller 110 and the yes / no and its type and the variation pattern type are predicted, the read ahead command including the prediction result etc. is sent from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113. Be notified. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect with respect to the series of fluctuation effects pending at that time. Then, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed, setting of an aspect of the continuous advance notice effect is also performed.

  Here, the continuous advance notice effect will be described. The continuous advance notice effect is a type of advance notice effect that suggests (notices) that the lottery result of the special symbol to be performed along with the winning (opening start winning) to the first entrance 64 is high probability of being a big hit, Over all (or a part) of the fluctuation effects held at the time of winning, an opportunity is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect. If this continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the pending variable effects, the player is expected to feel a big hit after all the pending changed effects are finished. It can be held against.

  In the present embodiment, when performing continuous advance presentation effects over all (or a part) of the change effects held at the time of winning, the chances are displayed in each of the change effects, but in each change effect The same character or characters related to the same character may be displayed. In addition, the number of the same character or the number of characters related to the same character may be displayed so as to be increased each time the variation effects are performed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a change effect different from the normal one has been performed, and therefore can recognize that a continuous advance notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation to be a big hit after all the suspended change effects are finished.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of continuous advance notice effects is set for the pending change effects, the chance symbol (for example, a figure as a stop symbol when the change effects are finished in the third symbol display device 81) On the effective line L1 shown in 4, “3”, “4” and “1”) are displayed in order of the combination of main symbols from the left symbol row Z1. Then, among the series of fluctuation effects for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, for the last fluctuation effect, the display of the chance eye is not performed as the stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  In general, the player pays attention to the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to play a game, so by displaying the chance eyes continuously as a stop symbol appearing after stopping the fluctuation effect. The player can easily recognize that the continuous advance presentation effect has been performed. In addition, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, thereby providing the player with an expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can have it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins the start winning combination, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection obtained according to the start winning combination are selected. From each value of the counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern type) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated). Then, various information predicted is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a pre-read command.

  Although the details will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the pre-reading command, the various information notified by the pre-reading command (estimated result of special symbol, predicted result of stop type, fluctuation pattern type Based on the prediction result), the information stored in the RAM 223a, and the like, the determination of the start of the continuous advance notice effect and the setting of the mode of the continuous advance notice effect are performed. As described above, in main controller 110, various information obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning from the respective counter values acquired according to the start winning is selected (appropriate of special symbol, stop type, variation pattern type Do you start processing to predict (estimate) mainly, and start continuous notice effect based on the various information (the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure, the prediction result of the stop type, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type)? The voice lamp control device 113 performs complex processing such as processing for determining whether or not it is not. Thereby, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10 On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing capability is used as the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to set the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect in various modes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The payout control device 111 is equipped with an MPU 211 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 211 has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), (Variation display) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a specific effect, a special effect, and a continuous notice effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the voice lamp control device is used for complex processing such as determination of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 so that the main control device 110 can concentrate on main control regarding the game such as lottery of special symbols. The control is made at 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to instruct the display control device 114.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is equipped with an MPU 221 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 221 has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a special effect end determination table 222a, a special effect resumption determination table 222b, an effect pattern table 222c, and a continuous notice determination table 222d. Also, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a game state flag 223c, a change start flag 223d, a special effect in progress flag 223e, Continuous count counter 223f, Small hit after flag 223g, Small hit after count change counter 223h, Special effect lottery counter 223i, Preread information storage area 223j, Continuous notice lottery counter 223k, Continuous notice number counter 223l, A jackpot flag 223 m is at least provided after the advance notice.

  For convenience of explanation, the description of the special effect end determination table 222a of the ROM 222 and the special effect resumption determination table 222b will be made after the special effect lottery counter 223i of the RAM 223 is described. Also, the description of the effect pattern table 222c of the ROM 222 will be made after the explanation of the probability continuous number counter 223f of the RAM 223. The description of the continuous notice determination table 222d of the ROM 222 will be made after the continuous notice lottery counter 223k of the RAM 223 is described.

  The special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is an area in which the stop type of the special symbol notified from the main control device 110 and the variation pattern type are stored. As described above, in the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination), a lottery of a special symbol is performed using it as a trigger, and a stop type command indicating the lottery result of the special symbol And the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the stop type command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command. In addition, as a stop type which shows a lottery result, "15R probability variation big hit", "15R normal big hit", "very accurate hit", "small hit", "completely out of place", "back and forth out of reach", Any one of "reach other than back and forth" is extracted. Also, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern type is extracted. As variation pattern types, "special reach (120 seconds)", "super reach (90 seconds)", "normal reach (20 seconds)", "long out (11 seconds)", "short out (5 seconds) "" Is extracted. The special symbol lottery result storage area 223a stores the stop type extracted from the stop type command and the variation pattern type extracted from the variation pattern command.

  The stop type and fluctuation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a are the display control in the third symbol display device 81, the output control of sound in the sound output device 226, the lighting in the lamp display device 227 It is used to control the turn-off and turn-off (see FIGS. 36, 40 and 41).

  Although details will be described later, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the stop type and the change pattern type are stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, the change effect according to the stop type and the change pattern type is the third Control is performed to be executed in the symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

  In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation effect under execution ends, the big hit of 15 rounds in the third symbol display device 81 according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a (first A display (big hit effect) showing that it is in the special gaming state) and a display (specific effect) showing that it is in the second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state in the third symbol display device 81 Control is done as it is.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the jackpot effect under execution ends or the specific effect under execution ends, the third symbol display according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. Control is performed such that the rear view image displayed on the device 81 is changed. As described above, in the present embodiment, “rear image for high probability”, “rear image for short time”, “rear image for special effect”, and “low probability” as the type of rear image Four types of “rear image for time” are provided, and any one type of rear image is set as the rear image of the third symbol display device 81. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is also performed according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a even when the variable effect under execution is finished. There is a case where control is performed so that the back image being displayed is changed.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the change production of the special symbol held in the main control unit 110 up to four times. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display of the special symbol is incremented by 1 by entering the first entrance 64 of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition A pending ball number command indicating a value is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1609 in FIG. 38).

  Further, in the main control unit 110, when the variation display of the special symbol is newly started in the first symbol display device 37, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and further, in the third symbol display device 81. A fluctuation pattern command indicating an aspect of fluctuation display to be started is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception, the special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 233 The value of 223b is decremented by 1 (see S1823 in FIG. 40).

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 or the variation pattern command. The value can be updated while being synchronized with the symbol holding ball number counter 203c.

  In addition, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls for which the variable display of the special symbol is suspended.

  The gaming state flag 223c is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured in the same manner as the gaming state flag 203e of the main control device 110. That is, the gaming state flag 223c is configured by 1 byte (8 bits), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by the lower 3 bits (bit 0 to bit 2). The other bits (bits 3 to 7) are not used.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the lower 3 bits are "000", it indicates that the "special symbol low probability state" is present, and when the lower 3 bits are "010", "special symbol" The lower 3 bits are "100" to indicate that it is the "special symbol high probability state B". That is, when the lower 3 bits are "010", as a result of becoming "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol", it becomes "high probability state of special symbol", and further, time saving state of regular symbol (hit probability is up) Indicates that it is In addition, when the lower 3 bits are "100", as a result of becoming "a hit of a special symbol", it becomes "a high probability state of a special symbol" and indicates that the hit probability of a regular symbol is a normal state. .

  In this gaming state flag 223c, all bits are set to "0" by the initial setting process (see S1310 of FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If the "15R probability variation big hit", the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 223c is set to "010" (see S1912 in FIG. 41), if "15R normal big hit", the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 223c Is set to "000" (see S1913 in FIG. 41).

  Further, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is finished, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If is "immediately hit", the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 223c is set to "100" (see S1904 in FIG. 41). In the case where the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is "small hit" or "displacement (completely disjoined, completely out, back and forth outreach, reach other than back and forth out) reach", the gaming state flag 223c is not changed .

  Although the details will be described later, the gaming state flag 223c is used to perform display control in the third symbol display device 81, voice output control in the voice output device 226, and control of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device 227. (See FIGS. 36, 40 and 41).

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation effect should be started in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and is fluctuated when the fluctuation start flag 223d is on. It shows that it is in the state which should start production. On the other hand, in the case of the off state, it indicates that it is not in a state to start the fluctuation production.

  The change start flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command corresponding to the change type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 38), and the setting of the change display in the third symbol display device 81 is When it is turned off (see S1802 in FIG. 40). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. When the fluctuation pattern type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the fluctuation start flag 223d may be set to ON.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The special effect in progress flag 223 e is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. If special effect in progress flag 223e is on, it indicates that the special effect is being executed in third symbol display device 81, voice output device 226, and lamp display device 227, and if special effect in progress flag 223e is off Indicates that the special effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

  The special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to off by the initial setting process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is ended, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to ON (FIG. 41) See S1908). Furthermore, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to off (FIG. 41) See S1918). In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to OFF, but it may be set to OFF at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 (that is, the special effect flag 223e). Is on, and further, when the variable effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the special effect being executed is ended (see S1920, S1925, S1926 in FIG. 41). ). Here, when it is determined that the special effect being executed is ended, the special effect in progress flag 223e is set to OFF (see S1918 in FIG. 41), and the special effect is ended.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special effect in progress is ended, if the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the change is Every time the effect ends, it is determined whether or not the special effect that has once ended is resumed (see S1920 to S1924 in FIG. 41). Here, when it is determined that the special effect that has once ended is resumed, the special effect in progress flag 223e is set to ON (see S1908 in FIG. 41), and the special effect is resumed.

  Although the details will be described later, this special effect flag 223e is for performing display control in the third symbol display device 81, audio output control in the audio output device 226, and control of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device 227. (See FIGS. 36, 40 and 41).

  In order to count the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "special symbol hit" in the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" Is a counter. The probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared by the initialization process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is “a sudden hit”, 1 is added to the probability continuous number counter 223f (see S1812 in FIG. 40). ). Further, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared (S1914 in FIG. 41). reference). That is, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "crash of special symbol" is counted by the probability continuous number counter 223f in the period from the previous "big symbol of special symbol" to the current "big character of special symbol". Be done.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  The probability continuous number counter 223 f is used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the big hit of the special symbol among the fluctuation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, the probability continuous number counter 223f is used in combination with the variation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a described above and the effect pattern table 222c described next.

  Here, the effect pattern table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a), 10 (b) and 11. FIG. 10 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect pattern table 222c used when the special symbol is hit, and FIG. 10 (b) shows the contents of the effect pattern table 222c used when the special symbol is removed. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. Moreover, FIG. 11 is the table | surface which showed an example of the content of "Janken production AE".

  The effect pattern table 222c is a table for determining the display mode of the variable effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and is a table for the jackpot of the special symbol, There are two tables with a special symbol table.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the game state flag 223c is "special symbol when performing variation effect corresponding to the big hit of the special symbol If “high probability state A or B” is indicated, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the effect pattern table 222 c for the jackpot of the special symbol. Also, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state", if the value of the after-small variation counter 223h described later exceeds 100, or, during the special effect flag 223e is off Also in the case of, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c for the jackpot of the special symbol (see S1808 and S1809 in FIG. 40).

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 execute the fluctuation effect corresponding to the removal of the special symbol, the counter for the number of continuous notices described later If the value of 223l is less than 2, the display mode of the variable effect is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c for removal of the special symbol (see S1818 and S1819 in FIG. 40). In addition, about the case where the change production corresponding to the sudden hit of the special symbol and the change production corresponding to the small hit of the special symbol are executed, the presentation pattern table 222c is not referred to, and the display mode of the change production is a specific effect The corresponding one is determined (see S1816 in FIG. 40).

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), in the effect pattern table 222c for the jackpot of the special symbol and the effect pattern table 222c for the removal of the special symbol, both are notified from the main control device 110 The display mode of the change effect to be executed is defined in association with the change pattern type to be performed and the value of the above-mentioned probability continuous number counter 223f. In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c, the display mode is “no Janken effect”, “Janken effect A”, “Janken effect B”, “Junken effect A” It is determined to be any one of "Janken production C" and "Janken production D". Note that whether or not to execute the "Junken effect E" is determined based on another condition described later.

  “Janken effects A to E” are characters on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 representing the player (your side) (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) and the opponent who is the opponent. The character and the character are displayed, and the Janken game between the characters is started, and the final determination is made. In "Junken Effects A to C", whether or not the character representing the player (own side) wins or loses to Janken is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)", the character representing the player (your side) wins Janken and the lottery of the special symbol If the result is "deletion of a special symbol", "a small hit of a special symbol", or "a sudden hit of a special symbol", the character representing the player (self side) loses to Janken. On the other hand, "Junken Effects D to E" is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", and the character representing the player (self side) always wins over the character on the other side.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in "Junken Effects A to E", after the fluctuation effects corresponding to "Normal reach (20 seconds)" are executed, they develop into "Super reach" or "Special reach", After that, an effect is performed that the character representing the player (the player's side) issues Janken. Then, in "Janken production A", the character representing the player (own side) produces "goo", and similarly, "Janken production B" produces "Joki" and "Janken production C" with "par" put out.

  Also, in "Junken Production D", "Almighty (Gucho Kipa)" is released. The almighty means a hand that always wins against the opponent character regardless of the hand of the opponent character. Further, in "Junken effect E", the character representing the player (own side) issues "goo", while the character on the other side produces "par". Then, although the player loses to Janken, the character representing the player (self side) punches the character on the other side while remaining "GOO" and wins.

  In addition, when "Junken effects A to E" is executed, it is decided according to the variation pattern type notified from main controller 110 whether to develop into "super reach" or "special reach". Be done. This is common to each Janken rendition A to E, and if "Super reach (90 seconds)" is notified as the variation pattern type, it will develop into "Super reach" after "Normal reach (20 seconds)" Do. On the other hand, if "special reach (120 seconds)" is notified as the fluctuation pattern type, it will develop into "special reach" after "normal reach (20 seconds)".

  Moreover, in "no Janken effect", the above-mentioned "Janken effects A to E" are not performed, and normal fluctuation effects (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) are performed. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is "normal reach (20 seconds)", the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is determined as "no Janken effect". Because the fluctuation time is only 20 seconds, it is because a sufficient effect can not be performed. However, even when the variation pattern type is “normal reach”, “Junken effect” having a short effect time may be separately provided and executed.

  Here, the description returns to the effect pattern table 222c. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the effect pattern table 222c for the big hit of the special symbol, for example, when the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is "normal reach (20 seconds)", the probability continuous number counter Regardless of the value of 223f, the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is defined as "no Janken effect".

  In addition, when the variation pattern type is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", if the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is It is defined as "Janken production A". Likewise, if the variation pattern type is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display of the variation effect to be performed if the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 1. If the mode is defined as "Janken effect B" and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is defined as "Janken effect C", and the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f is In the case of 3, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is defined as "Junken effect D".

  In addition, in the production pattern table 222c for the jackpot of the special symbol, only the three variation pattern types of “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “super reach (90 seconds)”, and “special reach (120 seconds)” are defined. No other variation pattern type is specified. This is because, in the case of the jackpot of the special symbol, any one of “normal reach”, “super reach” and “special reach” is always selected as the variation pattern type in the main control unit 110 and notified. is there. On the other hand, in the case of special symbol disconnection, the main controller 110 "short out (5 seconds)", "long out (11 seconds)", "normal reach (20 seconds)", and "super reach (90 seconds) "] Is always selected as the variation pattern type and notified.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the effect pattern table 222c for removal of the special symbol, for example, the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is "short out (5 seconds)", "long out In the case of (11 seconds) or “normal reach (20 seconds)”, the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is defined as “no Janken effect” regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Further, even when the variation pattern type is "Super reach (90 seconds)", the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is defined as "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The small hit after flag 223g, after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of a special symbol becomes "a 15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or a "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" It is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the period up to.

  The after small hit flag 223g is set to OFF by the initialization setting process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is ended, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If is the "small hit", the small hit after flag 223g is set to ON (S1905 in FIG. 41). Furthermore, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the small hit after flag 223g is set to off (FIG. 41) See S1915). The small hitting after flag 223g is used by the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h, which will be described next, to count the number of fluctuation effects to be executed within a predetermined period.

  After the small hit variation number counter 223h does not include the case where the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", from then on, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R definite variation jackpot of a special symbol" or " It is a counter for counting the number of fluctuation effects (special symbol lottery) executed within the period until the special symbol 15R usually wins.

  The small hitting post fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared by the initialization processing (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the after small hitting flag 223g is on, 1 is added to the small hitting after change number counter 223h (see S1815 in FIG. 40). ). Also, when the big hit effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the big hit effect is finished, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared (FIG. 41) See S1914).

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect is ended, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  This small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is used in order to decide the indicatory feature of the fluctuation production which corresponds to the big hit of the special design among the fluctuation production which is executed in the 3rd symbol display 81. More specifically, in the state where the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol low probability state", the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and during special effects When the flag 223e is on, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined to be "Junken effect E" (see S1805 to S1810 in FIG. 40).

  In the present embodiment, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state", the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and the special effect When the middle flag 223e is on, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined to be "Junken effect E". On the other hand, even if the special effect flag 223e is off, the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 1 to 100, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state". If it is within the range, the display mode of the change effect to be executed may be determined as "Junken effect E".

  Further, although the details will be described later, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is referred to before it is judged whether or not to resume the special effect once ended. More specifically, when it is determined that the special effect in progress is ended, and the change effect corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is performed after the special effect is temporarily ended, the change after small hit is performed first. The value of the number counter 223h is referred to. Here, if the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is within the range of 1 to 100, it is determined whether or not to resume the special effect once it has ended, and if it is outside the range, the special effect is restarted The determination as to whether or not is skipped. In addition, although the details will be described later, even if the value of the small hitting after fluctuation counter 223h exceeds 100, in the case where the gaming state flag 223c described above indicates the "special symbol high probability state B", It is determined whether to resume the special effect once it has ended.

  The special effect lottery counter 223i is a counter used for the determination of the end of the special effect being executed or the determination of the resumption of the special effect that has once ended. The special effect lottery counter 223i is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. The special effect lottery counter 223i is updated, for example, sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 149, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 149).

  In this embodiment, in the state where the special effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, when the variable effect is executed, the variable effect is ended. , It is controlled so that the special effect under execution ends with a predetermined probability. However, within the period from when the special effect is controlled to the end of the special symbol, when the variable effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is ended, It is controlled such that the special effect once ended is resumed with a predetermined probability.

  The value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is compared with the special effect end determination table 222a described below when determining whether or not the special effect in progress is to be ended, and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is It is determined whether it is within a predetermined range in the special effect end determination table 222a. Then, if the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is within a predetermined range, control is performed to end the special effect being executed, otherwise the special effect is continued.

  Here, the details of the special effect end determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect end determination table 222a. The special effect end determination table 222a is a table for determining whether or not the special effect is to be ended when the special effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the special effect end determination table 222a, three random number values for determining the end of the special effect are defined, and the range is “0 to 2”. In addition, the range of the random number value does not change regardless of the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  As described above, the total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which the end of the special effect is determined is three. The probability that the special effect being executed ends is “1/50”.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is compared with the special effect resumption determination table 222b described next, when it is determined whether to resume the special effect that has once ended, and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i Is determined in the special effect resumption determination table 222b. Then, if the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is within a predetermined range, control is performed so that the special effect once ended is resumed, otherwise the special effect is ended.

  Here, the details of the special effect resumption determination table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect resumption determination table 222b. The special effect resumption determination table 222b is a table for determining whether or not to resume the special effect once it has ended. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the special effect resumption determination table 222b, five random number values for determining restart of the special effect are defined, and the range is “50 to 54”. The range of the random number does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol.

  As described above, the total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which restart of special effects is determined is five. The probability of resuming a special effect once terminated is "1/30".

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The pre-reading information storage area 223 j is for storing various information (prediction result of special symbol's success or failure, prediction result of stop type, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) notified from the main control device 110 by the above-mentioned pre-reading command It is an area.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223 j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the pre-reading information storage area 223 j. The prefetch information storage area 223 j has five areas: one execution area and four reserve areas (preserve first area to reserve fourth area). In each of these areas, at least a special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 and a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 are provided.

  The special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the special symbol and the prediction result of the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 is a fluctuation pattern It is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the type. Each area of the pre-read information storage area 223 j is initialized in the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (refer to S 1310 in FIG. 35) executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223 j is cleared to 0.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command transmitted from the main control device 110, various information from the pre-reading command (prediction result of the special symbol, prediction result of stop type, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) Are extracted as prefetching information, and the extracted prefetching information is stored in the prefetching information storage area 223 j.

  When the extracted prefetch information is stored in the hold area, the area numbers (first to fourth) of the vacant areas of the four hold areas (first to fourth hold areas) are stored. Data is stored in order from the small area. That is, as the area number decreases, data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data that corresponds to the oldest starting winning combination in time is stored.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223j to the execution area. . Specifically, the data stored in the special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 of the execution area. Similarly, the data stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 of the reserved first area is shifted to the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 of the execution area.

  Then, when the shift of data to the execution area is completed, the hold first area becomes empty, so the data stored in the other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is the area number of the area number. 1 Shift processing is performed to pack in a small reserved area (pending first area to pending third area). In the present embodiment, in the prefetch information storage area 223j, data shift is performed only for the reserve areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the holding area (hold third area to hold fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burdens can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) may be configured to be shifted to a hold area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, since the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (the holding second area to the holding fourth area) is unnecessary, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous advance presentation effect, and is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. The update of the consecutive notice lottery counter 223k is performed, for example, by sequentially adding one by one within the range of 0 to 127, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a pre-reading command from the main control device 110, it is based on the prediction result of the current pre-reading, the jackpot type of the special symbol held, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k, etc. The start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined (see FIG. 39).

  The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is compared with the continuous notice determination table 222d (see FIGS. 13A and 13B) described next, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is the continuous notice determination table 222d. It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined range. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1715 and S1716 in FIG. 39).

  When the advance notice command is received from main controller 110, continuous notice determination table 222d satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 39)). If it is, it is a table for setting "the continuous notice determination probability". Here, the continuous advance notice determination probability is a probability to determine to cause the third symbol display device 81 to start the continuous advance notice effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the details of the continuous notice determination table 222d will be described. FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222 d. As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the continuous notice determination table 222d includes two of a continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol and a continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol. Have one table. The voice lamp control device 113 is a special symbol of the special symbol when the prediction result of the special symbol extracted from the pre-reading command received from the main control unit 110 is "big hit of the special symbol (15 R probability variation big hit, 15 normal big hit)". When the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "reach out of back and forth", the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol is selected. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is “a collision or a small hit”, the continuous notice determination table 222 d is not selected.

  The special symbol jackpot determination table 222d for the special symbol and the continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of the special symbol are both the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in the voice lamp control device 113 N) Define the range (hereinafter referred to as the “continuous notice determination range”) of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k that determines the start of the continuous notice effect in association with each value “1” to “4” that can be taken. doing.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol is associated with the value “1” of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range The special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is associated with the value "2" to define "0 to 15" as the continuous advance notice determination range, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is associated with the value "3" to continuously notice "0 to 39" is defined as the determination range, and "0 to 63" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "4" of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b.

  Further, the continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of the special symbol is associated with the value “1” of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b to define “0” as the continuous notice determination range, and the special symbol holding ball number counter "0 to 9" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "2" of 223b, and "0 to 0" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. "25" is defined, and "0 to 39" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "4" of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 satisfies the predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see continuous notice determination process in FIG. 39)). If so, as a table for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability, any one of the continuous advance notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol and the continuous advance notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol is selected. Then, from the selected continuous notice determination table, the continuous notice determination range corresponding to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b at that time is specified, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k at that time is continuous notice When included in the range, determine the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

  By the way, as the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b becomes larger, the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol and the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol in the example of FIG. It is specified that the continuous notice determination range is wide, but if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it becomes easy to be determined to perform the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice determination probability becomes high, so the jackpot for the special symbol In both the continuous notice determination table 222d and the continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of the special symbol, the larger the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b (the number N of holdings of variable display), the continuous notice determination probability is It means that it is defined to be high. Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over all the fluctuation effects that are being held when the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it is possible to set the continuous advance notice determination probability higher as the number of holding times is larger. There is a high possibility that the number of fluctuation effects included in the continuous advance notice effects of will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect is performed as the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous fluctuation effects, so that the player is made special. It can give you a sense of expectation. In addition, since the number of holding times of the variable display generally has a small value in many cases, when the number of holding times is small, it can be suppressed so that continuous advance presentation effects are not performed frequently, while the number of holding times is small. When it becomes large, it can be made easy to perform continuous notice production.

  In addition, when the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol in the example of FIG. 13 is compared with the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the same special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. The attached continuous notice determination range is defined so that the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d for the special symbol is equal to or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)" is that the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect is "off the special symbol , It is set to be equal to or higher than the probability of continuous advance notice determination in the case of "special symbol small hit, special symbol hit". Thereby, when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the gaming state will become "big hit of special symbol (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)" after the continuous advance notice effect is over is high. Can be suggested to the player, so that the player can have a high sense of expectation. Also, normally, the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect end (ie, the result of the lottery performed at the time of the ball winning to the first entrance 64), "big hit of special symbol (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)" The probability of becoming is set smaller than the probability of becoming “off of special symbol, small hit of special symbol, exact hit of special symbol”, so the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect is “off of special symbol, In the case of small hit of special symbol, the hit of special symbol, it can be controlled so that continuous notice effect is not performed frequently, while "big hit of special symbol (15R positive variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)" In the case of, it is possible to make it easy to perform continuous advance notice effects.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the special symbol extracted from the pre-read command received from the main control device 110 is not only the case of "special symbol big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)", Also in the case where the prediction result of the stop type is "reach out of back and forth (out)", the permission judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect is performed. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the stop type is "immediately hit or small hit", the permission judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect is not performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even when the prediction result of the stop type is “reach out of back and forth”, etc. Can be performed under various conditions. Therefore, when continuous advance notice effects are performed, it is possible to give the player various expectations. Also, as a result of the lottery, even when the special symbol is continuously removed, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player can have a high expectation and the player becomes bored. Can be prevented.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is a counter that counts the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed. The initial value of the continuous notice number counter 2231 is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the number of special symbol holding balls at that time is determined. The value of the counter 223b is stored (see S1717 in FIG. 39).

  The value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation type command transmitted from the main control device 110 and a stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation type command. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. Then, if the extracted stop type is “off (complete out, reach back, reach back except out), if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is a value of 2 or more, the extracted stop type Instead of the above, the chance is set as the stop type (see S1820 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Further, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is decremented by 1 when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation type command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 (see S1826 in FIG. 40).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. In this way, the stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. In addition, when the chance eye is set as the stop type, for example, on the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the main symbols stops in sequence from the left symbol row Z1 to “3” “4” “1” The symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is "even if the stop type is" displacement (complete out, front out, back out, reach back other than back out) ". If it is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1822 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Even when the variation type command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 are received, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 0, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is maintained at 0. (See S1825: No in FIG. 40). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Also, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 1, it is the last fluctuation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so as a stop type As in the case where the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (no reference to S1817 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is not set. The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. However, in this case, the value of the consecutive notice number counter 2231 is decremented by 1 (see S1826 in FIG. 40).

  As described above, while the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 2 or more, the variation type command transmitted from the main control device 110 and the stop type command corresponding to the variation type command are received and the suspension is performed. When the stop type is extracted from the type command, if the stop type is "displacement (complete out, out-front reach, out-front outreach reach)", a chance eye is set as the stop type and the exit type is set. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol as a chance is displayed.

  Here, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b at that time is stored, and thereafter, the variation type command and Whenever the stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation type command is received, if the value is 1 or more, the value is decremented by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the stop symbol serving as the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the fluctuation effects reserved in the main control device 110. That is, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye is displayed continuously.

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the change effect which is most closely watched during the game. In addition, even if the stop symbol according to the big hit is not shown as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, and the player has a feeling of expectation that the big hit will be obtained after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the value of the continuous notice number counter 2231 is referred to in order to determine whether the execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (FIG. 39). See S1705). Then, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 0 (see S1706: Yes in FIG. 39), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in all the fluctuation effects reserved in the main control unit 110, Of the predetermined conditions, it is determined that the condition (condition 1 described later) is satisfied, and the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing relating to the continuous advance presentation effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether to start the continuous advance presentation effect or not, and the winning of the first ball entrance 64 Based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired according to (start winning), the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead, and various information (presence or absence of the special symbol) obtained by the prefetching is predicted As a result, the prediction result of the stop type and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type are included in the prefetch command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the pre-reading command, stores them as pre-reading information in the pre-reading information storage area 223j, and decides the start of continuous notice effect start according to the contents of the pre-reading information storage area 223j. to decide. Then, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the setting of the stop type is also performed for each of the fluctuation effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the sound lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  After the notice, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored in the continuous notice frequency counter 223l for the big hit flag 223m, so that all continuous notice effects set for a plurality of fluctuation effects are executed. It is a flag which shows the game state after the next fluctuation production. If the value of the jackpot flag 223m after this notice is on, then the gaming state after the fluctuation effect after the execution of all the successive notice effects is “the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) If the value of jackpot flag 223m after OFF notice is OFF, then the gaming state after the change effect after execution of all continuous advance notice effects is “off special symbol, special symbol Indicates that it will be in the "small hit, or a special symbol of the hit" state. Incidentally, the fluctuation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is the fluctuation effect performed when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is one.

  When the start of continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the pre-reading command received from the main control unit 110 in the voice lamp control device 113, the after-notification jackpot flag 223 m predicts the success or failure of the special symbol extracted from the pre-reading command If the result is "big hit of special symbol", ON is set (see S1719 in Fig. 39), and the prediction result of the special symbol extracted from the pre-reading command is "out of special symbol, small hit of special symbol or If the special symbol of the special symbol "is hit" is set off (see S1720 in FIG. 39). Then, the value is held until the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 refers to the after-notification jackpot flag 223 m when it is determined that the continuous advance presentation effect is being executed when the prefetch command is received (see S1707 in FIG. 39). Then, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is on (see S1707 in FIG. 39: Yes), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set Since the state is "the jackpot of a special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)", further, the variable staging (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the execution of the continuous advance staging are set. Whether or not two or more fluctuation effects (holding balls) exist between the last fluctuation effect (holding balls) (ie, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l It is determined whether the difference is 3 or more), and it is determined whether (condition 2 described later) of the predetermined conditions is satisfied (see S1709 in FIG. 39).

  On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off (see S1707 in FIG. 39: No), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is "off special symbol, small hit for special symbol, or exact hit for special symbol", the prediction result of the special symbol newly notified by the look-ahead command is "big hit for special symbol". It is determined whether or not (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) is satisfied, and it is determined whether or not (condition 3 described later) of the predetermined conditions is satisfied (see S1711 in FIG. 39). .

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 38) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to start at the timing of the new starting winning. Each value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the reservation area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110. After that, when the data stored in the reserved area is shifted to the execution area in the main control device 110, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the shifted data.

  In main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in first symbol display device 37, and the lottery is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 120 seconds, etc.) has elapsed. The special symbol according to the result is displayed stopped. In addition, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the main control device is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern type of variation effect executed according to the special symbol lottery, and a stop type command indicating a special symbol lottery result. The signal is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113 from 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, it extracts the variation pattern type from the variation pattern command, and when the stop type command is received, it extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command. .

  When the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the variation pattern type and the stop type corresponding to the variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the extracted variation pattern type and the stop type in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. . Also, a command is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation display and stop display of the third symbol according to the extracted change pattern type and stop type. Send. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display and the stop display of the third symbol are executed in synchronization with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37.

  In addition, as above-mentioned, as a stop classification which shows a lottery result of a special symbol, "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "rapid hit", "small hit", "completely out of place", " Front and back out of reach (out), "front and back out of reach (out)" is provided. In addition, as fluctuation pattern classification, “special reach (120 seconds)”, “super reach (90 seconds)”, “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “long out (11 seconds)”, “short out (5 seconds) "Is provided.

  More specifically, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" or "the special symbol 15R regular jackpot". The variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol", "15R of the special symbol It is possible to recognize which is usually a "big hit". In addition, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the first special gaming state ends, according to the lottery result.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot of the 15th round (the first special gaming state). In this case, the sound lamp control device 113 is a display control device such that a display (big hit effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Send various commands to 114. In the first special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 so that the above-mentioned "first opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  The "first opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" is a predetermined opening period after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (in the present embodiment, "the ball is 10 balls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a It is an opening and closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a when one of the conditions of “winning” and “30 seconds from opening” has elapsed, and this opening and closing operation is repeated 15 times continuously It is.

  And when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot", when the first special gaming state is over, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state A". Here, the sound lamp control device 113 is a back image showing the back image to be displayed to the display control device 114 so that the “rear image for high probability” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Send change command. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  When the display control device 114 receives the rear surface image change command, the display control device 114 extracts the type of the rear surface image from the rear surface image change command. When the type of the back image is extracted, the display control device 114 displays the back image corresponding to the extracted type as the back image of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the first special gaming state ends when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol" and "ordinary symbol" Transition to "time saving state". Here, the audio lamp control device transmits a rear surface image change command to the display control device 114 so that the “rear surface image for time saving” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R of the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R of the special symbol usually wins", according to the lottery result of the special symbol The third symbol display device 81 displays the rear image for high probability and the rear image for short time. Therefore, the player can recognize the lottery result of the special symbol by paying attention to the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the player can recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol with a big hit" or "a small symbol with a special symbol". A variable display is made at 81, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display showing the lottery result of the special symbol is made. However, among the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol indicating the abutment of the special symbol and the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol are similar. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol of the big hit" or "the small symbol of the special symbol", in the third symbol display device 81, a similar third symbol (that is, reach) The generated "off special symbol" is stopped and displayed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit" or "a small special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize if it is a hit. The reason why the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result of the special symbol will be described later.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 is a display control device such that a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Send various commands to 114. In the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  Note that "the second opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" means that a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds has elapsed from opening") has elapsed after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the opening and closing operation is to close the specific winning opening 65a, and this operation is repeated 15 times.

  Then, when the second special game state is ended when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state B". Here, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a rear surface image change command to the display control device 114 so that the “rear surface image for special effect” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at the current state even if the second special gaming state being executed is ended. . However, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a back image change command to the sound lamp display control device 114 so that “the back image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  Hereinafter, in the state where the “rear image for special effect” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, lighting and blinking of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 according to the “rear image for special effect” The fact that voice (music) output of the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) is being executed is described as "special effect" being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display and the stop display are made in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol The rear image of the display device 81 may be changed.

  Although the details will be described later, for example, in a state where the special effect is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the out of special symbol”, and the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 When the stop display is made, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether to end the special effect under execution. Here, when it is determined that the special rendering in progress is to be ended, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display “the back image at the time of low probability” in the third symbol display device 81. The rear image change command is sent.

  After that, when the special effect under execution is once ended, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "off of the special symbol", and the variable display and the stop display are performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. If done, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to resume the special effect once it has ended. Here, when it is determined that the special effect is to be resumed, the third lamp display device 81 causes the sound lamp control device 113 to display the rear surface with respect to the display control device 114. An image change command is sent.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, an example of the flow of the specific effect performed in the pachinko machine 10 and the special effect will be described. In addition, as described above, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “certain hit of the special symbol” or the “small hit of the special symbol”. In addition, the special effect may be that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state B", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be in an advantageous state for the player. It is an effect for notifying a player that there is a

  FIG. 14 is a drawing (specific presentation effect) executed in the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery of the special symbol is made, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a sudden hit of the special symbol” or “a small hit of the special symbol”. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a), and FIG. 15 is a drawing of a special symbol after a specific effect is given, and the drawing result of the special symbol It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the flow of the presentation performed in the pachinko machine 10, when it becomes "or 15 R usual big hit of a special symbol".

  As described above, in the main control device 110, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination), a lottery of a special symbol is performed using it as a trigger. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14, the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  And, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a collision of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol”, the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 (variation effect When the) is completed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is subsequently shifted to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. Then, a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, during the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed. Note that "the second opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" means that a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds has elapsed from opening") has elapsed after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the opening and closing operation is to close the specific winning opening 65a, and this operation is repeated 15 times.

  Then, when the second special game state is ended when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state B". On the other hand, when the second special game state ends when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Further, the “rear image for special effect” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, and the special effect is started.

  Here, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, in the state where the special effect is being executed, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started Be done. In the present embodiment, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to another one during special effects and other than special effects. In addition, during special effects and other than during special effects, the lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the sound (music) output from the sound output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (see FIG. 5) Also change to something else.

  Therefore, the player may be in special effects by paying attention to the back image of the third symbol display device 81, the lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and the sound of the sound output device 226, or special effects It can recognize if it is not inside. However, as described above, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", regardless of the lottery result, the special effect is similarly executed in the pachinko machine 10 Ru. Therefore, even if the player can recognize whether the special effect is being performed or not, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a sudden hit of the special symbol” and the special effect is executed, or the special symbol It can not be grasped whether the lottery result is "a small hit of a special symbol" and the special effect has been executed.

  As a result, as to the player, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "a high probability state B of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol However, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed, and it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of a special symbol”, the player can recognize the lottery result. Also, the player can grasp the gaming state after the end of the jackpot according to the lottery result. Therefore, even when the special effect is executed and the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, then, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R of the special symbol, big hit" or "15R of the special symbol" Then, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a case will be described where the special symbol lottery is performed during the special effect, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit). As shown in FIG. 15, the first symbol display device 37, or the first symbol display device 37, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “special symbol 15R regular jackpot” during special rendition. When the fluctuation display (variation effect) in the three symbol display device 81 is ended, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is subsequently shifted to the first special gaming state. The special effect being executed is ended here. Then, a display (big hit effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the first special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The fanfare production is a production for notifying the player that the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit from now on, and enhances the player's sense of expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on while blessing the jackpot. Further, the ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the jackpot ends.

  During the jackpot effect, according to each effect period, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lighting and blinking patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33, and an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (FIG. 5) The voice (music) output from the reference is updated, and it is notified that the jackpot is in progress.

  Further, in the first special game state (during execution of the jackpot effect), control is performed in the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "first opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is performed. The "first opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" is a predetermined opening period after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (in the present embodiment, "the ball is 10 balls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a It is an opening and closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a when one of the conditions of “winning” and “30 seconds from opening” has elapsed, and this opening and closing operation is repeated 15 times continuously It is.

  And when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot", when the first special gaming state is over, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state A". On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", when the first special gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol low probability state".

  Here, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started. This is the end of the description of an example of the flow of the specific effect and the special effect performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, the same specific effects are similarly obtained when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. It is configured to be run. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific effect or the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". Become.

  Here, the reason why the player has difficulty in recognizing whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “a sudden hit of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol” will be described.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, as a lottery result of the special symbol, only three of the above-mentioned "certain jackpot of special symbol", the above-mentioned "normal jackpot of special symbol" and the above-mentioned "off of special symbol" are provided. It was not. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", it was easy for the game to be monotonous.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the gaming state of the pachinko machine does not change only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol jackpot" or "the special symbol big hit". Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player can easily grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine has not changed. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "out of the special symbol", it is easy for the player to continue the low probability of winning To understand.

  In a pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the jackpot of the special symbol is made with a probability of 1/300, for example The winning probability is set such that the jackpot, the normal jackpot of special symbols). On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the high probability state of special symbol", if the lottery of the special symbol is done, for example the probability of 1/30 "the big hit of the special symbol (special variation oddity big hit, special symbol The winning probability is set to be "usually a big hit of Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", when the drawing of the special symbol is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is often "off of the special symbol".

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the player is the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol , I could not have a strong sense of expectation that it would be a special jackpot). Therefore, the game was easy to become monotonous.

  So, in this pachinko machine 10, as a lottery result of a special symbol, "a special hit of a special symbol" and "a small hit of a special symbol" are provided. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, to the player, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol (the probability variation of the special symbol It has become possible to have a strong expectation that it will be a "big hit, usually a big hit with a special symbol".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first symbol display device 37 or 37 even when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform similar stop display. Also, the same specific effects are configured to be performed in the same manner. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display, the specific effect, or the operation of the specific winning hole 65a, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol of a sudden hit" or "a small symbol of a special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize the

  In addition, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol high probability state B", but the special symbol When the lottery result is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Also, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state B", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is as in the case of the "special symbol high probability state A". , "Normal pattern short time" will not be. Therefore, in this state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is made and the hit of the normal symbol is achieved, in the case of the electric role, as in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state of the special symbol. Control is performed such that the second opening / closing operation of the motorized part is performed. That is, even when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also the "low probability state of the special symbol", the electric winning combination attached to the first ball entry Works the same way.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player can grasp the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or when it comes to "small hit of special symbol", then the player plays the pachinko game 10 until the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15R normal hit of special symbol". It becomes difficult to grasp whether the state is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state".

  Thereby, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol", the player can not grasp it, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol Thus, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the probability of winning is high. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the lottery of the special symbol is more It has become possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the result will be "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R positive variation jackpot of the special symbol, the 15R regular jackpot of the special symbol)". Therefore, with the present pachinko machine 10, unlike conventional pachinko machines, it has become possible to enhance the interest of gaming.

  However, as described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the player is provided with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 by providing the "special hit of the special symbol" and the "small hit of the special symbol" as the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes impossible to grasp, and as a result, the following problems occur.

  First, the case where it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described more specifically. For example, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player is grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" Or suppose that it became "a small hit of a special symbol".

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "perception of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol", the first symbol display device 37 is similar regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. The first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the similar third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" or If it becomes "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol", and whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become "a high probability state B of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the lottery result is “a small hit of a special symbol” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol whose lottery result indicates (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, while the third symbol indicating the lottery result (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the jackpot effect, the specific effect, the special effect and the like are not performed. Therefore, the player can recognize "disappearance of the special symbol" if he pays attention to the presence of the stop indication of the first symbol, the stop indication of the third symbol, and the execution of the effect. And, since the lottery result of the special symbol is "the out of special symbol", the player can also grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. However, since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the "special symbol is removed", the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  In addition, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", for example, the lottery result of the special symbol Is assumed to have become "a special design hit" or "a special design hit". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the similar first symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the stop display of the similar third symbol is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision with a special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "a high probability state B of a special symbol", the lottery result of a special symbol is "a small symbol of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed. In addition, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the lottery of the special symbol in the first place. Therefore, the player can not keep track of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  On the other hand, in the state where the player has difficulty grasping whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", the lottery result of the special symbol It is assumed that “15R of the special symbol big hit” or “15R of the special symbol usually hit”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot effect is performed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display car of the first symbol and the stop display of the third symbol, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "the 15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol" or "the special symbol It can be recognized whether it is 15R usually a big hit. In addition, if it pays attention to the jackpot effect, it can be recognized that it became a jackpot of a special symbol.

  And, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the player, after the jackpot of the 15th round (the first special game state), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol of It can be grasped that it becomes the high probability state A ". In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot", the player, after the 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol low probability state" Know what to do.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set after the jackpot (first special gaming state) ends in the 15th round, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been grasped so far. Therefore, with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 being "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or even if it becomes "a small hit of a special symbol" and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, then, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R definite variation big hit of a special symbol" or "special symbol of If it becomes “15R normal jackpot”, then the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, even if the player's lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” and it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, this is The game state of the pachinko machine 10 up to is still difficult to grasp.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine provided with "a special pattern hit" and "a small hit of a special symbol" as a lottery result of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot of 15 rounds (first special game) Even if a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal state, the first special game state is obtained by the process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). The jackpot of the special symbol ends without knowing whether the payout has been made. That is, although the player has won the jackpot of the special symbol, the circumstances of the win remain unknown.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may be questioned by what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol". If the player is asked a question, the player will continue playing the game without solving the question, and hence the player may continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  In particular, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol once "a sudden hit of the special symbol". Or, after the player has become unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after becoming a "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) In the case of a jackpot of a symbol, there is a high possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol" in the drawing of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) Including the case that the player can not grasp the game state of 10, among the lottery of the special symbol up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol" It is highly likely that the player has doubts as to whether it has been.

  That is, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol high probability state B” and the winning probability is high, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 several times (for example, When the third lottery of special symbols is made, it is highly likely that the player may have doubts that the lottery result of the special symbols has become "the jackpot of special symbols".

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any of the special symbols in the lottery of the special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time) The player can not know whether or not the "special symbol hit" has been reached. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  In addition, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability (for example, Even though 1/300) is low, the player doubts that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of about 100 special symbols is made. There is a risk of having

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols among the special symbol lottery up to about 100 times is “special symbol The player can not know whether or not it has become a sudden hit. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the circumstances have caused the jackpot of the special symbol of this time. Although the reason will be described later, this makes it possible to make the player feel comfortable and to enhance the interest of the game. When the variation pattern type is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “Junken effects A to E” is not performed, and normal variation display (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) is performed.

  As described above, “Junken effects A to E” is a character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) representing a player (self side) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and an opponent The character on the other end side is displayed, and the Janken game between the respective characters is started, and the final determination is made.

  In the present embodiment, when the “Junken effect” is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the character representing the player (self side) wins the Janken (or Finally, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", if "Junken effect" is executed, the character representing the player (your side) lose. In addition, "Junken effect A" is also executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" even when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". However, the "Junken effect B to E" is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can recognize that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol" when the "Junken effect B to E" is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the effect for the big hit of the special symbol According to the pattern table 222c and the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f, any one of "no Janken effect, Janken effect A to D" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1808 in FIG. 40).

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the change pattern type of the variable display is "Super reach (90 Second) or “special reach (120 seconds)”, and further, if the value of the probability continuous counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be “Junken effect A”, and the player ( Determine the display mode so that the character representing your side wins Janken. Similarly, if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be "Junken effect B", and if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variation effect is If the "Junken effect C" is determined, and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (own side) is Janken respectively. Determine the display mode to win the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special reach" (120 seconds) and if all the following three conditions are satisfied, "Janken effect E" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1805 to S1807 in FIG. 40).

  The first condition is that the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the second condition is that the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 100 or less It is. The third condition is that the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on. Here, when all three conditions are satisfied, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of "the low probability state of the special symbol", and once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the small hit of the special symbol", Thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become the "certain hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the "big hit of the special symbol".

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode (the type of Janken effect type) of the variable effect is determined by the value of the estimated continuous number counter 223f.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player pays attention to the type of "Junken effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81. From the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol", it is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "rapid hit of special symbol". Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player then displays the change effect when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Depending on the mode (ie, the type of the Janken effect), it can be grasped in which gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) was made.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" If there is, it is configured to execute "Junken effect A" in the variable display. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect.

  Therefore, the player can not recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "rapid hit of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player can not grasp what kind of gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the removal of the special symbol) is made. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the special event from the next time onward It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the lottery result of the symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Next, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, an example of the contents that can be grasped by the player, and the reason why the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. An example will be specifically described.

  When the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect A", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "big hit" special symbol It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" even once between the present and the "big hit of the special symbol". In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the player When the character representing the side wins the Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) has been made in the latest gaming state where it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Then, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when a special symbol of about 100 times is drawn, luckily, it may be doubtful that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol". is there.

  In addition, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Although it has become), there is a possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" at last, when the lottery of the special symbol is not made. .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Junken. Although the player is in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lucky result of this special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" It can be understood that Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct. Also, the player can have a satisfaction that he is lucky to be elected with a low probability of winning.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" and the "special symbol big hit" of this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect B", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and among the special symbol lotterys up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbols is “special symbol There is a high possibility of doubting that it was a sudden hit of That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Because it had become, there is a high possibility of doubting that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become twice in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect C," and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has been twice in the "special symbol hit" during the last "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". . In addition, the player is twice due to the “rapid hit of the special symbol” in each of the specific effects executed within the difficult-to-understand period, including when it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It can be understood that the rest was due to the "special symbol small hit".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, Because it has become 1/30), if the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility of doubting that the special symbol lottery result has become "the special symbol jackpot".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol," including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time) It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the hit of the special symbol" twice among the lottery of.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". On the other hand, the probability of being "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot" is "1/3", and the probability of being the "special symbol of 15R regular jackpot" is "1/2". Thus, when it comes to "big hit of special symbol", "15 R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15 R usually big hit of special symbol", rather than being judged as "striking hit of special symbol" The probability of being judged as “is higher.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, of the special symbol lottery up to a few times (for example, the third time), I am a little disappointed at the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol was "the special symbol's hit" twice. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become three or more times in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect D", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player grasps that the lottery result of the special symbol has been three or more times in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". it can. In addition, the player is at least three times among the specific effects performed within the difficult-to-understand period, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by the “rapid hit of the special symbol”. It can be understood that it was something, and others were by "small hit of a special symbol".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the fourth time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the fourth time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that "the jackpot of the special symbol" is immediately obtained after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth time) It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol hit" more than three times among the lottery.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". That is, the probability of being determined as "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" is higher than being determined as "a special symbol's striking hit".

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, the lottery of the special symbol up to the first time (for example, the fourth time) I am also very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol was "a hit of a special symbol" more than three times. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the character on the other side, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" from the "big hit of the special symbol" to the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way. Furthermore, it means that the lottery of the special symbol has not exceeded 100 times since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the player When the character representing the side wins the character on the other side, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in the “low probability state of the special symbol”. In addition, the player, once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", and thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become a "falling hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times. , It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Then, as described above, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then a lottery of about 100 special symbols is made, it is lucky that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbols", There is a possibility of having a question.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, although it has become 1/30), it has not been won very much, and it is doubtful that the lottery result of the special symbol finally becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol is made this time. There is a risk of having

  In such a case, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins over the character on the other side. Although the player is in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol of It can be understood that it has become a jackpot. Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct.

  In addition, the player can grasp that "the jackpot of the special symbol" has been made by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he is elected with a low probability of winning or a satisfaction that he is lucky.

  Also, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Then, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second time (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The player is very different from the forecast, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is " It can be grasped that it became a jackpot of special symbols.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the drawing of the special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped. In the situation, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very lucky and he was very fortunate to have won the prize in a very rare situation, although the idea of the player was largely out of place.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation as described above occurs, the player can not grasp the situation. Therefore, the player, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special symbol high probability state B", the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), so the lottery result of the special symbol is " I thought that it would be a jackpot of a special symbol, and it might end with it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “when the lottery result of the special symbol is“ big hit of the special symbol ”. If it is a super reach (90 seconds) or a "special reach (120 seconds)", it is comprised so that either of "Junken production AE" will be performed in the fluctuation display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the current situation of the special symbol has become a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", When the lottery result is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player is in what gaming state the lottery of the special symbol (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made according to the type of "Janken production". I can understand. Therefore, even if the player is asked to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery). You can solve the question. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. As a result, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is If the player is determined to be a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol hit", it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the exact hit of the special symbol" The player does not have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player wins the "small hit of special symbol".

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state A" state, and even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "jumping", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high in special symbol It becomes "high probability state B of special symbol" from probability state A ". On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as the "special symbol high probability state A".

  Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is "certain hit of the special symbol" Or, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because it becomes a small hit of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of the special symbol or "B" can be understood. Therefore, in this case, there is little possibility of causing the player to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery).

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", any one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured as follows. And, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified to what kind of circumstances the jackpot of the special symbol this time has become, but during the jackpot effect "Janken Effects A ~ E" is executed It is good. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effect, rear face image displayed in the main display area Dm, and continuous advance notice effect are controlled. As described above, in the present embodiment, “rear image for high probability”, “rear image for short time”, “rear image for special effect”, and “low probability” as the type of rear image Four types of “rear image for time” are provided, and any one type of rear image is set as the rear image of the third symbol display device 81. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ("back image for high probability time", "back image for time reduction", "special effect time" And a “rear image for low probability” are connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 42) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 42) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 44B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and buffers when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. The image data stored in the RAM 237a is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 42).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 17 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of the special symbol”, and in FIG. 17 (c) when “out of special symbol”. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the range of the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235c among the back surface image and the back surface image will be described. FIGS. 18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. 18 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", while FIG. 19 shows the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". Are shown respectively.

  Of the back faces A to C, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 18, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the back image on the back C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back surface C, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island, the third pattern It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the player changes the stage to the “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, a rear surface image shown in FIG. 19A is displayed as an initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the back image shown in FIG. 19A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the back image shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 19 (b), a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 19C is displayed. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 19C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.19 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.19 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage is a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is the resident video RAM 235 Is stored in the rear image area 235c of Also, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 19 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 19 (a) and FIG. 19 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a 'or in the range of FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (b). The image data between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image corresponding to the image between FIG. 19 (a) and FIG. 19 (b) are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range image is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the rear surface C displays the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 19 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to 19 (a) can be completed from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 19A and 19B are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are for normal use. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to 19 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes, using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236 a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Referring back to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a fanfare data transfer flag 223 i, at least a stored image data determination flag 233 j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, a specific effect Display data tables corresponding to special effects, fanfare effects, round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change production is started, the stop type of the change production is either “off (full out, front or back reach, reach other than back and forth) reach”, “certain hit”, or “small hit” If there is, while the stop design that indicates "deletion of the special symbol" is finally stopped and displayed, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is either "15R probability variation jackpot", and "15R normal jackpot", The stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  As described above, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a special symbol's exact hit" or "a special symbol's small hit". In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 When the (variation effect) ends, subsequently, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. Then, a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, during the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed. Note that "the second opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" means that a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds has elapsed from opening") has elapsed after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the opening and closing operation is to close the specific winning opening 65a, and this operation is repeated 15 times. Then, when the second special game state ends, the “rear image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the special effect is started.

  As described above, the special effect may be that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol high probability state B”, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in an advantageous state for the player It is an effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility of being present. In the present embodiment, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the “back image for special effect” during the period in which the special effect is continued (during special effect) On the other hand, a period other than during special rendering is set to another back image (a back image for high probability, a back image for time reduction, a back image for low probability). Furthermore, the lighting and blinking patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the sound (music) output from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 5) are different during special effects and other than special effects. Is changed to Thereafter, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect is further executed while the special effect is being executed.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for notifying the player that the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed at a normal time, is shifted to the jackpot of the special symbol, and the round effect It is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on, blessing the jackpot of the special symbol. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the jackpot of the special symbol is ended.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the specific effect, the special effect, the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 20) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 21 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 21).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Referring back to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 42). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 53 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 44B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 44B) so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 44 (b) (see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 45 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are performed.

  Further, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 of FIG. 53A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 53B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later (see FIG. 22) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2303), the pointer updating process (see S3205 in FIG. 50) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 22), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 22, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3207 in FIG. 50). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by the initial setting process (see S 2002 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3717 in FIG. 54). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3718 in FIG. 54). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 55).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 44B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3802 of FIG. 55).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 23 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, a reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, when the external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed, the award ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per random number counter C4, and those counter values are When the maximum value (in this embodiment, 899, 119, 99, 198, 239, respectively) is reached, each value is cleared to 0. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one rotation), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the first value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one revolution), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing is performed to set display processing in the first symbol display device 37 or the variation pattern type of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (S104), and then the first symbol A start-up winning process accompanying the winning on the entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether there is a ball entry to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning, the ball is excluded If the number of holding balls is less than the maximum value (four balls), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing of the start winning, and are stored in the holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Then, when the start winning process is finished, next, the normal symbol variation process is executed to set the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time and the number of times of the electric combination (S106). , Through gate passage processing accompanied by passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, launch control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. Thus, when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The start winning process determines the presence or absence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and when there is a starting winning, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is a special symbol holding ball storage area Prefetching process (described later) to execute the process of storing (holding) in 203a and further prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol drawing for the held data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) Execute S207).

  In the start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S201). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has won in the first ball entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (fluctuation effect pending in the main controller 110 The number of holding balls N) is acquired (S202), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 4 If it is above (S203: No), the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number Add 1 to the value of the counter 203c (holding ball number N) (S204), and send the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) after addition to the voice lamp control device 113 In order to do this, the holding ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when the external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed, the ball holding ball number command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer and provided in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. The first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 and the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the areas corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c among the held first area to the held fourth area The suspension pattern selection counter 203b3 and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are respectively reserved (stored) (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is "1", each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in each of the storage areas 203b1 to 203b4 of the first holding area Hold the value Moreover, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "2", the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "3" in each storage area 203b1 to 203b4 of the holding second area If it is, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "4" in each storing area 203b1 to 203b4 of the holding third area, it is stored in each storing area 203b1 to 203b4 of the holding fourth area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are suspended.

  Although the details will be described later, when the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect has come, each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value is shifted to the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, lottery of the special symbol, determination of the variation pattern type, etc. are executed. As described above, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is the drawing of the special symbol performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the determination of the variation pattern type, etc. Used in

  Next, the preread process is executed (S207), and the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) of the special symbol is newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a by the above-mentioned start winning process. Look ahead to the lottery results. That is, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are also used for prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The details of the prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the pre-reading process (S207) is finished, the start winning process is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the prefetch process (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S207) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 24). This pre-reading process is a process executed when data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) associated with the detection of the start winning is newly obtained in the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 24). The prefetching result of the special symbol is read using the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a finally Read out (S301). In addition, the data (each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1) finally stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are specified based on the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the first holding area is identified as the data finally stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the holding second area is stored in the holding third area when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a is 3. When the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 4, the data stored in the holding fourth area is specified as the data finally stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Next, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203 e indicates “high probability state A of special symbol” or “high probability state B of special symbol” (S 302). In the process of S302, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" (S302: Yes), the high probability among the special symbol big hit random number table 202a prepared in two types The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for time is acquired (S303), and the process proceeds to the processing of S305. On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol low probability state" (S302: No), the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability is acquired (S304) , Shift to the process of S305.

  In the process of S305, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a obtained in the process of S303 or S304 and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 are compared to predict the success or failure (S305). As described above, three random number values "7, 307, 582" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a big hit of the special symbol at low probability ing. In addition, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a jackpot at high probability 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. There is. In the process of S305, the random number value (hit value) stored in the obtained special symbol big hit random number table 202a is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301, and when they match To predict that it is a jackpot of special symbols.

  Next, as a result of comparison by the processing of S305, it is determined whether or not it is predicted to be a jackpot of a special symbol (S306), and in the process of S306, if it is predicted to be a jackpot of a special symbol (S306) : Yes), the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern type at the time of jackpot are predicted (S307). In the process of S307, first, the special symbol big hit type table 202b is compared with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 to predict a jackpot type. Next, the variation pattern type is predicted by comparing the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for jackpot and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301. Then, when the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S313.

  On the other hand, in the process of S306, when it is predicted that it is not the jackpot of the special symbol (S306: No), the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c is acquired (S308). And the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c which is acquired, and the value of the 1st hitting random number counter C1 which is acquired with the processing of S301 are compared, it predicts the lottery result whether or not it is the small hitting of special symbol (S309) .

  Next, as a result of performing the process of S309, it is determined whether it is predicted that it is a small hit of the special symbol (S310). And in the process of S310, when it is predicted that it is a small hit of a special symbol (S310: Yes), the stop type at the time of a small hit of a special symbol and the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol It predicts (S311).

  In the process of S311, first, the stop type at the time of small hitting is predicted to be "small hitting". Next, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for removing the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. In addition, when the game state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" and the case where the regular symbol is short (in the hour symbol of the regular symbol), the special symbol is out (probable variation) The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is "the special symbol low probability state" and "the normal symbol normal state", the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (normal) of the special symbol is compared Used for And if the process of S311 is complete | finished, it will transfer to the process of S313.

  On the other hand, in the process of S310, when it is predicted that it is not a small hit of the special symbol (S310: No), it predicts the stop type at the time of the special symbol out and the variation pattern type at the time of the special symbol out (S312). In the process of S312, first, the stop type selection table (not shown) is compared with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol. .

  Next, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for removing the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. In addition, when the game state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" and the case where the regular symbol is short (in the hour symbol of the regular symbol), the special symbol is out (probable variation) The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is "the special symbol low probability state" and "the normal symbol normal state", the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (normal) of the special symbol is compared Used for Then, when the process of S312 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S313.

  In the process of S313, the ring for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is a prefetch command indicating the predicted success or failure of the special symbol, the predicted stop type (big hit type in the case of the special symbol), and the predicted variation pattern type It sets to a buffer (S313). As a result, when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process to be described later is executed, a prefetch command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, when the process of S313 is completed, this pre-reading process is ended, and the process returns to the start winning process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The special symbol variation process (S104) is to control variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S401). During the jackpot, during the jackpot during the first special gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37, and during the predetermined time after the end of the first special gaming state And are included.

  As a result of the determination in S401, if the jackpot is currently in progress (S401: Yes), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot currently (S401: No), it is determined whether a specific effect is currently being performed (S419). During the specific effect, during the specific effect, during the second special gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37, and a predetermined time after the end of the second special gaming state The middle part is included.

  If, as a result of the determination in S419, the specific effect is currently in progress (S419: Yes), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if the specific effect is not currently underway (S419: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S402), and the display manner of the first symbol display device 37 If it is not during fluctuation (S402: No), it is then determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S403: No), the present processing ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S403, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S403: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number of the fluctuation display being held in the main control device 110) N) is acquired (S404), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the acquired special symbol holding ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S405). As a result, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) exceeds 0 (S405: Yes), it is judged that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, first, the special symbol holding ball number The value of the counter 203c (the number of holding balls N) is decremented by 1 (S406). This is because one of the pending variable effects is started by the special symbol variation start process (S408) to be described later, and as a result, the number of holding balls decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S407). The data shift process performed in the process of S407 is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a toward the area with a smaller area number 1 is there. Specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data

  When the process of S407 is finished, next, special symbol variation start processing for starting variable display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S405, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) is 0 (S405: No), a state in which the demonstration effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is determined whether or not the demonstration is under way (S409). In the process of S409, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) is greater than 0 It is judged that the time between is being demonstrated.

  Then, if the demo is not underway (S409: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S410), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the demo is underway (S409: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demonstration command set in the process of S410 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop. Therefore, after the fluctuation stop, if the fluctuation display is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined in the process of S402 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S411). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S411: No), the process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S411: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set to the first symbol display device 37 (S412). The stop symbol is preset by a special symbol variation start process (S408) described later with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol variation start process, it is determined whether or not the big hit of the special symbol according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the special symbol jackpot, stop symbol (special symbol jackpot type) is determined according to the value of the first hit classification counter C2. Specifically, the stop symbol (big hit type) or the special symbol 15R usually becomes the 15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol (the maximum round number changes to the high probability state after the 15 hit round). It is determined whether or not the stop symbol (jackpot type) that is the jackpot (the jackpot that the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds) is determined.

  And in this embodiment, when it comes to the 15R positive variation of special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol, the blue LED is turned on, and when it comes to the 15R normal big indicator of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol, the red LED is turned on. Turn on. In addition, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on in the case of the special symbol bumping and in the case of the small symbol of the special symbol. Also, when the special symbol is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, about the case where it is a hit of a special symbol, and the case where it is a small hit of a special symbol, each LED is lighted only for several seconds after the stop of fluctuation. On the other hand, in the other cases, after lighting each LED, when the next variable display is started, the lighting is canceled. In addition, it may be decided arbitrarily whether to turn on each LED only for a few seconds after the stop of the fluctuation or to cancel the turn-on when the next fluctuation display is started after turning on each LED.

  When the process of S412 is finished, next, the lottery result corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the variable display of this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R It is determined whether the normal jackpot) or the special symbol of the special symbol (S413). In the process of S413, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the big hit of the special symbol or the sudden hit of the special symbol (S413: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e is "the low probability state of the special symbol" To indicate the game state flag 203e (S414), the process proceeds to S415.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, the drawing of the special symbol is not performed, but the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “special symbol low probability state”. That is, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol is set such that the game state flag 203 e indicates “the low probability state of the special symbol”. On the other hand, in the process of S413, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the omission of the special symbol or the small hit of the special symbol (S413: No), the process of S414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S415. Transition.

In the process of S415, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415).
In the process of S415, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set ( S416), returns to the timer interrupt process. Here, when the start of the jackpot is set, if the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S415, when the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is not the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415: No), it corresponds to the current fluctuation display It is determined whether the lottery result is the special symbol or the small symbol of the special symbol (S417). In the process of S417, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is a collision of a special symbol or a small collision of a special symbol (S417: Yes), the start of a specific effect is set (S418) ), Return to timer interrupt processing. Here, when the start of the specific effect is set, if the specific effect control process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, the process branches to S1201: Yes. As a result, the specific effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S417, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is not the exact hit of the special symbol or the small hit of the special symbol (S417: No), the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display , Is the case of the removal of a special symbol. In this case, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S408) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). In this special symbol variation start process (S408), based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is performed Further, the effect pattern (variation pattern type) or the like of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the special symbol high probability state A or B" (S502), and the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol high probability state A or B" For example (S502: Yes), among the special symbol big hit random number table 202a prepared two types, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is acquired (S503). On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol" (S502: No), among the special symbol big hit random number table 202a prepared two types, the special symbol big hit random number for low probability The table 202a is acquired (S504).

  Then, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a obtained in the processing of S503 or S504 is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S501 (S505). As described above, three random number values "7, 307, 582" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a big hit of the special symbol at low probability ing. In addition, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178 as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a jackpot of the special symbol at high probability. , 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". It is stored. In the process of S505, the random number value (hit value) stored in the obtained special symbol big hit random number table 202a is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S501, and when they match It is determined that it is a jackpot of a special symbol.

  And the result of the comparison by processing of S505 judges whether it was a big hit of a special symbol (S506), and when it is a big hit of a special symbol (S506: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is determined (S507) . In the process of S507, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 is compared with the special symbol jackpot type table 202b, and the jackpot type associated with the first hit type counter C2, that is, It is determined whether it is the 15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol, the 15R normal jackpot of the special symbol, or the collision of the special symbol. And the display mode (lighting state of LED37a) at the time of the big hit in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is set based on the big hit classification of the determined special symbol.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type of the special symbol, the jackpot type of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, bump hit) is decided as the stop type as it is By doing this, the display mode at the time of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is set. That is, if the jackpot type is "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot", the stop type is determined as "15R probability variation jackpot". In addition, if the jackpot type is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", the stop type is set as "15R normal jackpot", and if the jackpot type is "crash hit of special symbol", the stop type is "rapid hit" It is decided.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501 and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d for the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S508). In the process of S508, among the various types of normal reach, super reach, and special reach, the special corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the process of S507 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501. The variation pattern type at the time of the jackpot of the symbol is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S508, the variation time in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is previously defined by a table or the like. When the process of S508 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  In the process of S506, when it is not the jackpot of the special symbol (S506: No), the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c is acquired (S509). Then, the acquired special symbol small hitting random number table 202c is compared with the value of the first hitting random number counter C1 obtained by the processing of S501 (S510). And the comparison result by processing of S510 judges whether it is a small hit of a special symbol (S511), and when it is a small hit of a special symbol (S511: Yes), stop classification at the time of a small hit of a special symbol Is determined (S512). In the process of S512, the stop type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol is determined as "small hit".

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of the small hit of the special symbol is determined (S513). In the process of S513, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S501 to determine the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. . In the case where the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" and the case where the regular symbol is short (in the hour symbol of the ordinary symbol), the special symbol is out (probability) The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is "the special symbol low probability state" and is the "ordinary symbol normal state", the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (ordinary) of the special symbol is compared Used for In addition, the fluctuation time in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern type. When the process of S513 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is not a small hit of the special symbol (S511: No), the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol is determined (S514). In the process of S514, the stop type selection table (not shown) is compared with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501 to determine the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol. Here, the type of stop is determined to be "completely out of place", "reach in front / back out of reach", or "reach other than in front / back out of reach". And if the process of S514 is complete | finished, next, the fluctuation pattern classification at the time of removal of a special symbol will be determined (S515). Since the process of S515 is the same process as the process of S513, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when the process of S515 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  In the process of S516, a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern type determined by the process of S508, S513 or S515 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S516). Next, a stop type command indicating the stop type determined in the process of S507, S512 or S514 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S517). And if processing of S517 is completed, this processing will be ended and it will return to special symbol variation processing (refer to Drawing 26).

  The commands set in the processing of S516 and S517 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 when the external output processing (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main processing described later is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based thereon, to the display control device 114. Send. As a result, variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and stop display of the third symbol are performed.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the through gate passing process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). This through gate passage processing (S107) judges the presence or absence of passage of the ball in the 2nd ball entrance 67, and when there is passage of the ball, the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored as a normal symbol holding ball storage area It is a process for storing (holding) in 203 b.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the second entry hole 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second ball entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S602) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  And, in the process of S601, whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or in the process of S603, even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the normal symbol If the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603: No), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 in the process of S603 ( S603: Yes) The value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604).

  Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 Is stored in the area (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. Then, when the process of S605 is completed, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. In the process of S701, when it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit in the process of S701 (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702) If the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is a normal symbol short time state (normal symbol time shorting) (S708). If the current time is a normal symbol time short state (S708: Yes), S710 Move to the process of On the other hand, if the current time is not the time saving state of the normal symbol (S 708: No), it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203 e indicates the “special symbol high probability state A” (S 709). In the process of S709, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol high probability state A" (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state A" (S709: No), the process proceeds to S711.

  In the process of S710, the random pattern per random symbol table 202e for high probability is compared with the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 to determine the lottery result of the normal symbol (S710). It transfers to the process of S712. As described above, when the comparison is performed using the normal symbol per random symbol table 202e for high probability, if the value of the second type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", the symbol of the normal symbol is used. If it is determined that it is a hit and it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, it is determined that the symbol is normally out (see FIG. 7C).

  Moreover, in the process of S711, the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined by comparing the random number per table symbol 202e for low probability with the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 (S711) (S711 And the process of S712. As described above, when the comparison is performed using the normal symbol per random symbol table 202e for low probability time, if the value of the second category counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", the symbol of the normal symbol is If it is determined that it is a hit and it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the symbol is normally out (see FIG. 7C).

  In the process of S712, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol determined in the process of S710 or S711 is the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S712), and if it is the disconnection of the normal symbol (S712) : No), The display mode at the time of detachment of a normal symbol is set (S721). In the process of S 721, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal of the normal symbol is completed, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, in the process of S712, when it is a hit of a normal symbol (S712: Yes), the display mode when the normal symbol is hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S714). When it is determined in the process of S714 that the jackpot of the special symbol is being played (S714: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S719. In this embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the process proceeds to S 719, and the number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time are set as in the case where the normal symbol is removed. Be done. As a result, the electric combination does not block the ball heading in the direction of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) more than the first ball entrance 64. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time are set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S714, if the present is not currently in the jackpot of the special symbol (S714: No), it is determined whether the current is the time symbol of the normal symbol If the current time is a time symbol of a normal symbol (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. On the other hand, if the present time is not the time saving state of the normal symbol (S715: No), it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A of the special symbol" (S716). In the process of S716, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol high probability state A" (S716: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state A" (S716: No), the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S717, the opening period of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S717). Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S 718), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). In the process of S719, the opening period of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S719). And the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the 2nd symbol display 83 is set to 30 seconds (S720), this processing is ended, and it returns to timer interruption processing (refer to Drawing 23).

  As described above, in this embodiment, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, the time of the variable display is very "30 seconds → 3 seconds" at the high probability of the normal symbol as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. As it becomes short and the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as "0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 It becomes a state.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S718 or the processing of S720.

  In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "o" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol turns out of the normal symbol, and the display mode is set by the processing of S721, the "x" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S723, the second symbol display updating process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S721.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S724). If the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S 724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S 725), this processing is ended, and timer interruption Return to processing (see FIG. 23). When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized combination is set by the process of S725, the opening / closing control of the electrically operated combination is executed when the motorized combination opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next. Is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S717 or S719 end. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is the deviation of the normal symbol (S724: No), the processing of S725 is skipped, the present processing is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) Return to).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (the sub controller such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, the wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. As described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. 32, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub control device (sub control device) (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (sub control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power-off (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S910), and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start processing of the main control apparatus 110 is completed will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing of main controller 110. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1011 and S1012 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, while the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pre-reading command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the last 4 ms cycle, a fanfare command, a round number command, and an ending command set by the jackpot control processing described later are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1002), and then the jackpot control processing is executed (S1003). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but the jackpot control process executes the jackpot effect, and the opening time and number of times of the specified winning opening (large opening port) 65a opened and closed during the jackpot. It is a process for setting. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Then, when the jackpot control process (S1003) is finished, next, the specific effect control process is executed (S1004). The details of the specific effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. However, the specific effect control process includes the execution of the specific effect and the opening time of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that opens and closes during the specific effect. It is a process for setting the number of times of release. In the present embodiment, the specific effect control process is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Then, when the specific effect control process (S1004) is finished, next, the large opening opening and closing process is executed (S1005). In the large opening opening and closing process, it becomes "big hit of special symbol (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)", "a special hit of a special symbol" or "small hit of a special symbol", etc., special winning opening (large opening When the opening time and opening number of the mouth 65a are set, the specified winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed according to the set opening time and opening number.

  Then, when the large opening opening and closing process (S1005) is finished, next, the electric combination is opened and closed (S1006). In the motorized part opening and closing process, when the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized part accompanying the first ball entrance 64 have been set by hitting a normal symbol (the second symbol), it is set. Open and close the motorized part according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Then, when the large opening opening / closing process (S1006) is finished, next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern type is set by the process of S508 of the special symbol variation start process (refer to FIG. 27), the process of S513, or the process of S515, it corresponds to the variation pattern type The variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern type set by the process of S508 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the process of S513, or the process of S515 ends. As a result, when the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the process of S412 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26), the change display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, In the display mode set by the process of S507, the process of S512, or the process of S514 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the stop symbol (the first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 ( Turn on).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display updating process, when the second symbol lottery is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display mode in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 83.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No) SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1010: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main processing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011, S1012).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1012). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 30 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (a sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 or the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of S1009 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  In this embodiment, in the main processing, winning ball counting signal, payout abnormal signal reading processing (S1002), jackpot control processing (S1003), specific effect control processing (S1004), large opening opening and closing processing (S1005), motorized role thing Opening and closing processing (S1006), first symbol control processing (S1007), and second symbol control processing (S1008) are executed, but some or all of these processings are not main processing but timer interrupt processing It may be configured to execute inside.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1003) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) of the main control device 110. In this jackpot control process (S1003), when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol, 15R normal jackpot of a special symbol), It is a process for setting the opening time and the number of times of opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that opens and closes during the jackpot.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S416 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the opening time and the opening number of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a are set (S1102).

  In the process of S1102, as the opening time of the specific winning a prize opening (large opening) 65a per round, "10 balls are won by 10 balls to the special winning opening (large opening) 65a" and "30 seconds after opening" Set until one of the conditions is met. Further, the specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to be opened 15 times (15 times).

  Next, the start of the open / close control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S1103). Here, when the start of the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set, the large opening opening / closing process (see S1005) of the above-described main process (see FIG. 32) is executed. The specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed under the conditions set in the above.

  Next, a fanfare command is set (S1104), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 32). The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process described above (see FIG. 32). Sent towards. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, it transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is currently being played (S1105). During the jackpot of the special symbol, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol, and during the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over And are included.

  In the process of S1105, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not in progress (S1105: No), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1106). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1106: Yes), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the present process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the above-described main process (see FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 Sent towards.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1106, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1106: No), it is determined whether or not opening and closing of the 15 specified winning combinations (large opening) 65a has ended (S1108). In the process of S1108, when the opening and closing of 15 times of the specific winning a prize opening (large opening) is finished (S1108: Yes), it is the start timing of the ending effect, so the ending command is set (S1109). The process ends and returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 32). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described above. Sent towards.

  When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when the opening and closing of the 15-specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is not finished (S1108: No), it is the timing to finish the big hit of the special symbol under execution It is determined (S1110). In the process of S1110, when it is the timing to end the jackpot of the special symbol under execution (S1110: Yes), the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S1111) and the lottery result of the special symbol this time It is determined whether or not it is "15R probability variation jackpot" of the special symbol (S1112).

  In the process of S1112, if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" (S1112: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e indicates "high probability state A of special symbol" Then, the game state flag 203e is set (S1113), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate "the high probability state A of the special symbol", if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "the 15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the special At the end of the jackpot of the symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol high probability state A".

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" (S1112: No), since the lottery result of this special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", the gaming state flag A game state flag 203e is set to indicate 203e as "the low probability state of the special symbol" (S1114). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate "the low probability state of the special symbol", when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol", the special symbol At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol low probability state".

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", as the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol", the gaming state flag 203e Is set, but since the gaming state flag 203e is set to the “low probability state of special symbol” during the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state flag 203e is not set (does nothing) It is good.

  When the jackpot of the special symbol is started by the jackpot control processing shown in FIG. 33 above, the opening and closing conditions of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a per round can be set, and the specific winning opening (large opening) The opening and closing of the 65a can be set to be performed 15 times (15 times).

  Next, the specific effect control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the specific effect control process (S1004) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) of the main control device 110. In the specific effect control process (S1004), when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", the specific winning combination, the specific winning combination that opens and closes during the specific effect The opening (large opening) 65a is a process for setting the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  In the specific control process, first, it is determined whether a specific effect is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S418 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the specific effect is set, it is determined that the specific effect is started. In the process of S1201, when the specific effect is started (S1201: Yes), the opening time and the opening number of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are set (S1202).

  In the process of S1202, "until 0.2 seconds have elapsed from opening" is set as the opening time of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a per round (around 1 time). Further, the specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to be opened 15 times (15 times). Next, the start of the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S1203), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the above-mentioned main processing (see FIG. 32). Here, when the start of the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set, the large opening opening / closing process (see S1005) of the above-described main process (see FIG. 32) is executed. The specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed under the conditions set in the above.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect is not started in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the specific effect is currently performed (S1204). Here, “during specific effect” is a period during which specific effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. In the process of S1204, when the specific effect is not being performed (S1204: No), this process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when the specific effect is being performed (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether the opening / closing of the fifteen specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has ended (S1205).

  In the process of S1205, when the opening / closing of the 15-specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is not finished (S1205: No), this process is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the opening and closing of the 15 specific winning a prize opening (large opening) 65a is finished (S1205: Yes), the end of the specific effect is set (S1206), the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "special It is determined whether or not it is a "pattern hit" (S1207).

  In the process of S1207, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "a sudden hit of a special symbol" (S1207: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e indicates "a high probability state B of a special symbol" The game state flag 203e is set (S1208), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing described above (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate "the high probability state B of the special symbol", when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "the hit of the special symbol", the specific effect At the end of the game, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B".

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not "the exact symbol of the special symbol" (S1207: No), since the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "the small hit of the special symbol" Without changing, the process ends and returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 32).

  When the specific effect is started by the specific effect control process shown in FIG. 34, the opening and closing conditions of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a per round can be set, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a Can be set to open and close for 15 rounds (15 times).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 35, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the current start-up process is a main process to be described later (see FIG. 36) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary stoppage”). It is determined whether it is started during the execution of the power-off process (S1420) (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 36, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1417 in FIG. 36), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1420. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1420 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1420 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. (From S1303), judging that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process shifts to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1420 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1420, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S1420 is performed (see S1419 in FIG. 36). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1420 is performed, the process of S1308 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1420 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310). The permission is set (S1311), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the above-described startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. When this main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous S1401 process was executed (S1401). If the millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the processing proceeds to S1412 without performing the processing of S1402 to S1411. In the process of S1401, it is the process concerning execution of display (rendering) to determine whether 1 millisecond has passed or not, although it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1412, the special effect setting process of S1413, and the command determination process of S1414 in a short cycle. By performing the process of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform the setting relating to the variable performance without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. In addition, since the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  If one millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), the various commands set in the process of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 in the previous 1 ms cycle (S1402) . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1404) . The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1405 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting the hold lamp in accordance with the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and the rear surface image change for the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process ends, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1408). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13 to detect whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408), first, an output value (vibration level) is read from a vibration sensor (not shown) (S1501), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is a predetermined level or more. (S1502). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1502: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1502: Yes), it is determined that vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10, and setting is made to output an alarm sound from the audio output device 226 (S1503) An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1504), and the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 36). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image notifying of a vibration error is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description of the main processing is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) is ended, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S1409), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1410). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. Also, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 37) (see S1503), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is a voice It is output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1410, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1409 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1410 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1412, the fluctuation display setting process is performed to set the fluctuation effect such as the display mode of the fluctuation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode of the stop display at the end of the fluctuation (S1412). The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display setting process, the special effect is set in the third symbol display device 81, or the special effect in progress is ended, and the special effect setting process is performed to set the special effect (S1413) ). The details of the special effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the special effect setting process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1414). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 is finished, the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is updated (S1415), and the process of updating the special effect lottery counter 223i is executed (S1416). The update of the successive announcement lottery counter 223k is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 127 each time the update processing is performed, and is performed so as to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). In addition, the special effect lottery counter 223i is updated by one each in the range of 0 to 149 each time the updating process is performed, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 149). Then, the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is referred to by the continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 39) described later, and is used to determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is referred to by the special effect setting process (see FIG. 41) described later, and it is judged whether the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect which is once ended is restarted. Used for

  When the process of S1416 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1417). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1417 (S1417: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1419), and the power-off process is executed (S1420). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1421), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S1417 (S1417: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1418). If not (S1418: No), the process returns to S1401 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1418: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the main processing is not executed when the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1414) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, this command determination process (S1414) executes the process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110. In this process, when the stop type command is received from the main control device 110, the change start flag 223d is set to ON so that setting of the change effect to be executed is started. Further, when the prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not (S1601). If the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1602), and the extracted variation pattern type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a of the RAM 223. It stores in fluctuation pattern classification storage area 223a2 (S1603). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). In the process of S1602, any one of “special reach”, “super reach”, “normal reach”, “long out”, and “short out” is extracted as the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type stored here is referred to when the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set up the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to indicatory control control equipment 114.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the change start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605). Then, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the extracted stop type is stored in the stop type storage area 223a1 in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1607). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). In addition, in the process of S1606, other than "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "very accurate hit", "small hit", "completely out (out)", "back and forth out of reach" (outside) Any one of reach (disengagement) is extracted as the stop type. The stop type extracted here is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1608). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1608: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110 (variation display The number of holding times N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609). Further, in the process of S1609, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1609 ends, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entry slot 64, the voice in the process of S1609 every time the starting winning is detected. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110.

  In the process of S1608, if the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1608: No), it is next determined whether or not the pre-read command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1610). Then, when the pre-reading command is received (S1610: Yes), from the received pre-reading command, the prediction result of the lottery of the special symbol (prediction result of success or failure and prediction result of stop type) and its fluctuation pattern type The prediction results are extracted, and they are stored as prefetching information in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223j (S1611). Then, the continuous advance notice determination process is executed (S1612), this process is ended, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins to the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, and the values are acquired. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. And when data (each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1) is stored in the reserve area of special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a in main control 110, separately from the lottery of the original special symbol, the reserve area From the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the above, various information (appropriate, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained when the lottery of the original special symbol is performed is read (predicted).

  Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control unit 110, a pre-reading command indicating various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern type) obtained by pre-reading is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command, it extracts from the pre-reading command the prediction result of the lottery of the special symbol (the prediction result of the pass / fail and the prediction result of the stop type) and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type Then, they are stored as prefetching information in the reserve area of the prefetching information storage area 223j.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, in the continuous notice determination process, the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j last, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the continuous notice lottery counter Based on the value of 223 k, it is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous advance notice effects with respect to the fluctuation effects pending at that time.

  In the process of S1610, when the prefetch command is not received (S1610: No), it is next determined whether the fanfare command is received from the main control device 110 (S1613). When the fanfare command is received (S1613: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 sets a display fanfare command for starting the jackpot effect (S1614), and this processing ends, and the main processing described above Return to (see FIG. 36).

  The display fanfare command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the display control device 114 is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described above. Sent towards. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1615). When the round number command is received (S1615: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1616), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1617), end this processing, and return to the main processing described above (see FIG. 36).

  The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the display control device is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described above. Sent towards 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1618). When the ending command is received (S1618: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 sets a display ending command to start ending effect (S1619).

  The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1618, when the ending command is not received (S1618: No), it is determined whether or not other commands are received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1620) ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice determination process (S1612) executed in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 36). As described above, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1612) determines whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect when the prefetch command is received.

  In this continuous advance notice determination process, first, it is determined whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) which is a predetermined condition to be described later is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, next, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect. If it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is started here, the continuous advance notice effect is started. S1702 to S1710 described later are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1711 to S1716 described later start continuous notice effects. It is the process for determining whether to do.

  In addition, (condition 1) is that execution of continuous advance notice production is not set, and (condition 2) is a "big hit of the special symbol (15 R probability variation big hit when all set continuous advance notice effects are finished Or, 15R normal jackpot) and, furthermore, between the fluctuation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the newly received prefetch command and the last fluctuation effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set , There are two or more fluctuation effects (holding balls) (ie, the difference between the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 3 or more) (condition 3) ) Is “out of special symbol” when all set continuous announcement effects are finished, and further, among the prefetching information extracted from the newly received prefetch command, the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is “ Special figure Jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, or, 15R usually jackpot) is to be. "

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, first, the prefetching information stored in the prefetching information storage area 223 j (that is, the prediction result of the drawing of the special symbol and the prediction result of the variation pattern type) is read (S 1701). In addition, the pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223 j is specified based on the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b. That is, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 1, the pre-reading information stored in the holding first area is specified as the pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223j. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 2, the pre-reading information stored in the holding second area is stored in the holding third area when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 3. If the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 4, the prefetching information stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the prefetching information finally stored in the prefetching information storage area 223j.

  Next, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1701, it is determined whether the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1702), When the prediction result of the design success or failure is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1702: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S1704. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is “slip off the special symbol, a small hit on the special symbol, or a collision on the special symbol” (S1702: No), the stop type read in the process of S1701 It is determined whether the prediction result is "long reach out" (S1703). In the process of S1703, when the prediction result of the stop type is "reach before and after (reach)" (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the type of stop is not “back and forth out of reach (out)” but other types of stop (S1703: No), this processing ends and the command determination processing described above (see FIG. 38) Return to).

  In the process of S1704, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is substituted into a variable A (S1704), and then the value of the continuous notice number counter 2231 is substituted into a variable B (S1705). Then, it is judged whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 2231) is 0 (S1706). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1706: Yes), the continuous notice effect is executed. Since the setting is not made and the above (condition 1) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the process of S1711, and it is determined by the processes after S1711 whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1706, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 2231) is not 0, ie, 1 or more (S1706: No), the execution of the continuous notice effect is already set. Therefore, it is next determined whether or not the value of the jackpot flag 223m after advance notification is on (S1707). As described above, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is ON, the gaming state after the change presentation after the continuous notice presentation is performed in all the change indications for which the continuous notice effect is set is “special Indicates that the jackpot of the pattern (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) will be in the state, and if the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off, continuous in all the fluctuation effects for which the continuous notice effect is set It indicates that the game state after the change effect after the advance effect is performed is in the “special symbol out” state.

  And, in the process of S1707, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is on (S1707: Yes), when all the continuous notice effects set have ended, the "special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, Or, because it becomes 15R normal big hit) ”, furthermore, the difference between the value of variable A (ie special symbol holding ball number counter 223b) and the value of variable B (ie consecutive notice number counter 2231) is calculated, The difference is substituted into a variable C (S1708). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1709). As a result, when the variable C is 3 or more (S1709: Yes), the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received prefetch command (pending It can be determined that two or more variable effects (held balls) exist between the ball) and the last variable effects (held balls) for which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is currently set. Therefore, it can be determined that the above (condition 2) is satisfied from the results of the processing of S1706, the processing of S1707, and the processing of S1709, so the processing shifts to the processing of S1711 and continuous notice effect starts by the processing of S1711 and later. Decide whether to

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1709, when the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) (S1709: No), the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuous at this time Since two or more variable effects (held balls) do not exist between the final changed effects (held balls) for which the execution of the preliminary effects is set, the processing of S1706, the processing of S1707, and the processing of S1709 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect.

  In the process of S1707, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the advance notice is on (S1707: Yes), when all the continuous advance notice effects set have ended, the special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, or Because the 15R normal jackpot), the “special jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” temporarily interrupts the sense of expectation of the continuous preview effect held by the player. However, if (condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last fluctuation effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set If two or more variable effects (holding balls) exist, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notification effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if it is determined that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, in two or more change effects to be performed after the "special symbol jackpot (15R positive variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" Be sure to display the chance eye as a stop symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous advance notice effect, and to strengthen the expectation which the player feels to the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1707, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off (S1707: No), it becomes "out of the special symbol" when all the continuous notice effects set are finished. Therefore, it is further determined, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1701, whether the predicted result of the special symbol's success or failure is "the special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1710). And when the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1710: Yes), the special reading information read out in the process of S1701 Since the prediction result of the design success or failure is “big hit of the special symbol (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)”, the condition of the condition 3 is described above from the results of the process of S1706, the process of S1707, and the process of S1709. It can be judged to be satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1711, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect by the process after S1711.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1710, when the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol, the small hit of the special symbol, or the collision of the special symbol" (S1710: No), the processing of S1707 From the results of the process of S1708 and the process of S1711, it can be determined that none of the above (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect, and the process returns to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). Here, if the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off (S1707: No), it becomes "out of the special symbol" when all the set continuous notice effect is finished. In such a situation, among the prefetching information extracted from the newly received prefetching command, the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "big hit of the special symbol (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)" Since the start of continuous notice production is determined with a predetermined probability, the continuous notice production in progress is finished and it becomes "out of special symbol", and the continuous notice production is continued and "special symbol is performed again. Can be prevented. Therefore, it can suppress that the state which becomes "off of a special symbol" generate | occur | produces continuously after completion | finish of continuous advance notice production. In addition, it is expected that the player will be "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" when the continuous advance announcement effect is "off of the special symbol" and the continuous advance announcement effect is subsequently performed. The feeling can be made strong, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

  As described above, in the processing of S1702 to S1710, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is If not satisfied, the continuous advance notice determination process is ended, and the process returns to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). Thus, when none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the processing after S1711 for determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is not executed, and therefore, the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is reliably and easily performed. It is possible not to be Moreover, since the process after S1711 is abbreviate | omitted, the increase in the processing load in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 can be suppressed.

  Next, in the process of S1711 to S1713, continuous notice is made from among two continuous notice determination tables 222d (continuous notice determination table 222d for jackpot of special symbol or continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of special symbol). The continuous advance notice determination table (see FIG. 13) used to determine the start of the effect is selected.

  First, in the process of S1711, it is determined whether the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)" among the prefetched information read in the process of S1701 ( S1711). And, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "the special symbol jackpot (15R positive variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1711: Yes), as a continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of continuous notice effect start , And selects the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol (S1712). On the other hand, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "out of the special symbol, a small hit of the special symbol, or a sudden hit of the special symbol" (S1711: No), continuous notice used to determine start of continuous notice effect start As a determination table, a continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of a special symbol is selected (S1713).

  When the continuous notice determination table is selected by the process of S1711 to S1713, next, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is acquired (S1714). Then, the continuous notice determination table (continuous notice determination table 222d for big hit of special symbol or continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of special symbol) selected in the process of S 1712 or the process of S 1713, and the special symbol holding ball The continuous advance notice determination range is specified based on the value of the number counter 223b (the number N of holdings of variable display), and the continuous advance notice determination range is compared with the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k (S1715).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, and it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect (S1716). If it is determined in the process of S1716 that the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is not included in the continuous advance notice determination range and the continuous advance notice effect is not started (S1716: No), the process after S1717 is skipped and the command described above It returns to the determination process (see FIG. 38). That is, the setting of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is held as it is. Therefore, if there is a holding ball for which the setting for performing the fluctuation production advance notice is present, the continuous advance notice effect is performed on the holding ball, and if such a retention ball does not exist, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1716, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined to start the continuous notice effect (S1716: Yes), the number of special symbol holding balls in the continuous notice frequency counter 223l. The value of the counter 223b is set (S1717). Here, by setting the value of the holding ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 by the process of S1717, all the fluctuation effects previously held before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously performed. The execution of the notice effect is set. In other words, it is possible to display the chance symbol on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuation effects corresponding to the holding balls held before the holding balls corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, it is judged whether the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is “the jackpot of the special symbol (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” among the prefetched information read out in the process of S1701 (S1718). And, if the prediction result of the special symbol is "big hit (15 probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)" (S1718: Yes), set the jack hit flag 223m after advance notice (S1719), this processing And return to the command determination process described above (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "off special symbol, small hit of special symbol, or special symbol hit" (S1718: No), set the jackpot flag 223m to OFF after notice (S1720) This process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38) described above.

  When all the set continuous announcement effects are finished by the processing of S1719 or S1720, "is the jackpot of the special symbol (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" or "special symbol of It is possible to set the jackpot flag 223 m after notice as to whether it is out, the small symbol of the special symbol, or the collision of the special symbol. As a result, when the continuous advance notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1707 is executed, the above-described (condition 2) or (condition 3) is performed using the value of the after-announce jackpot flag 223m set here. It can be judged whether or not it is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing variation display setting processing (S1412) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113. The fluctuation display setting process (S1412) is a process for setting the fluctuation effect such as the display mode of the fluctuation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode of the stop display at the end of the fluctuation.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (ie, off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are received from the main control device 110 Since the process is not performed, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is stopped from the type and fluctuation The pattern type is acquired (S1803).

  Next, it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot” (S1804), and the stop type acquired in the processing of S1803 is “15R probability variation jackpot”, Alternatively, in the case of "15R normal big hit" (S1804: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol low probability state" (S1805).

  In the process of S1805, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" (S1805: No), the process proceeds to S1808. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates other than the “special symbol low probability state” (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the small hitting after number fluctuation counter 223h is 100 or less (S1806) .

  In the process of S1806, when the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h exceeds 100 (S1806: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1808. On the other hand, if the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 100 or less (S1806: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1807).

  In the process of S1807, when the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1807: Yes), the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is determined as "Junken effect E" (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1818. Do. In addition, when the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to be “Janken effect E” in S1810, in the fluctuation effect, although the character representing the player (the player side) loses to Junken, an effect to be won is finally performed. . On the other hand, when the special effect in-progress flag 223e is off (S1807: No), the process proceeds to S1808. In the process of S1808, the effect pattern table 222c (see FIG. 10A) for the jackpot of the special symbol is compared with the variation pattern type acquired in the process of the probability continuous number counter 223f and S1803 (S1808).

  And the display mode corresponding to the condition of the variation pattern type acquired by the processing of the probability continuous number counter 223f and S1803 among the display modes defined in the special design jackpot effect pattern table 222c, the variation to be executed It determines as a display mode of an effect (S1809), and transfers to the process of S1818. In the process of S1809, for example, when the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is normal reach (20 seconds), “no Janken rendition” is to be executed as a variation effect regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. decide. If the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1 and the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is super reach (90 seconds), “Junken effect B” is determined as the variation effect to be executed. . If the display mode of the variable effect is determined to be “Janken effect A to D” in S1809, in the variable effect, an effect is produced in which the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Janken.

  Further, in the process of S1804, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S1804: No), the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is "probable" It is determined whether it is a hit (S1811). In the process of S1811, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "probable hit" (S1811: Yes), 1 is converted to the probability continuous count counter 223f (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1815. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1811, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not "accurate" (S1811: No), it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is "small hit" S1813). In the process of S1813, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "small hit" (S1813: Yes), the process proceeds to S1815.

  In the process of S1813, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is not "small hit" (S1813: No), the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "out (complete out It is the case of "other reach". In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive notice number counter 2231 is 2 or more (S1814). In the process of S1814, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 2 or more (S1814: Yes), since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect, the display of the change effect to be executed The mode is set to "chance eye effect" (S1817), and the process proceeds to the process of S1818.

  When the process of S1818 is executed, in the process of S1821 to be described later, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110. The symbol on the middle line L2 is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1814, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is less than 2 (S1814: No), when the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (the continuous notice frequency counter 223l If the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous advance frequency counter 223l is 0). In this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1815.

  In the process of S1815, the effect pattern table 222c (see FIG. 10B) for removal of the special symbol is compared with the fluctuation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 (S1815). Then, among the display modes specified in the effect pattern table 222c for removal of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the condition of the fluctuation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed. (S1816), the process proceeds to S1818. In the process of S1816, for example, when the fluctuation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is short (5 seconds), the fluctuation effect “Janken no effect” should be executed regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Decide as. If the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is super reach (90 seconds), “Junken effect A” is determined as the variation effect to be executed regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. In addition, even if the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to be "Junken effect A" in S1816, since the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the character representing the player (self side) in the fluctuation effect. There will be a production that loses to Janken.

  In addition, when the process of S1816 is executed, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 in the process of S1821 described later. Instead, it is set to “reach where reach occurs (reach before or after reach or reach other than before and after)”.

  In the process of S1818, it is determined whether the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1818), and if the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1818: Yes), 1 is added to the small hitting after fluctuation counter 223h. Then (S1819), the process proceeds to S1820. On the other hand, if the after small hit flag 223g is off (S1818: No), the process of S1819 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1820.

  In the process of S1820, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the display mode of the variation display determined in the process of S1809, S1810, S1816 or S1817, and the command is displayed It sets to transmit to the control device 114 (S1820). When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81 executes the third symbol variation display in the display pattern of the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Control the display.

  Next, based on the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1821). . In the case where the process of S1816 is executed and the "Junken effect A" is determined as the change effect to be executed, the stop type is replaced with the display stop type command indicating the stop type acquired in the process of S1803. A display stop type command is generated to indicate that "reach is out of reach (reach before or after reach or reach other than back and forth)". In addition, when the process of S1817 is executed, instead of the display stop type command indicating the stop type acquired in the process of S1803, a display stop type command indicating that the stop type is a chance eye is generated. . When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the change design is stopped so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Control the display.

  When the process of S1821 ends, next, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1822), and the data stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223j is shifted (S1823). In the process of S1823, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223j is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted (moved) in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, etc. ).

  When the process of S1823 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 1 or more (S1824), and if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 1 or more (S1824: Yes), the value of the consecutive notice number counter 2231 is decremented by 1 (S1825), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36) described above. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 0 (S1824: No), the process of S1825 is skipped, the process is ended, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  When the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" by the variation display setting process shown in FIG. 40 above and the variation display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f Regardless of the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display, any one of “no Janken effect, Janken effect A” can be determined as the display mode of the fluctuation display.

  More specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" For example, "Junken effect A" can be executed in the variable display. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Can be determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect.

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" Although it is a counter which counts the number, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined irrespective of the probability continuous number counter 223f.

  Therefore, the player can not recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "rapid hit of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player can not grasp what kind of gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the removal of the special symbol) is made. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the special event from the next time onward It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the lottery result of the symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Moreover, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" by the variable display setting process shown in FIG. 40 described above, and the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 When it is performed, any one of "no Janken effect, Janken effect A to E" can be determined as the display mode of the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern type of the variable display and the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f. .

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation If the display variation type is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)" and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variation display is "Junken Effect A Furthermore, the display mode can be determined such that the character representing the player (own side) wins over Janken. Similarly, if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be "Junken effect B", and if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variation effect is If the "Junken effect C" is determined, and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (own side) is Janken respectively. You can decide the display mode to win the game.

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode of the variable display (type of Janken effect) is determined by the value of the estimated continuous number of times counter 223f.

  Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", if the player pays attention to the type of "Junken effect" to be executed in the third symbol display device 81, the previous "special" It is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the special symbol hit" from the jackpot of the symbol to the current "big hit of the special symbol". Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player then displays the change effect when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Depending on the mode (ie, the type of the Janken effect), it can be grasped in which gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) was made.

  Hereinafter, an example of contents that the player can grasp will be specifically described. As described above, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect A", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous time. It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has not become "the hit of special symbol" even once from "the jackpot of the special symbol" to the present "big hit of the special symbol". In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the player When the character representing the side wins the Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) has been made in the latest gaming state where it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Then, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when a special symbol of about 100 times is drawn, luckily, it may be doubtful that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol". is there.

  In addition, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Although it has become), there is a possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" at last, when the lottery of the special symbol is not made. .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Junken. Although the player is in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lucky result of this special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" It can be understood that Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct. Also, the player can have a satisfaction that he is lucky to be elected with a low probability of winning.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" and the "special symbol big hit" of this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect B", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and among the special symbol lotterys up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbols is “special symbol There is a high possibility of doubting that it was a sudden hit of That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Because it had become, there is a high possibility of doubting that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become twice in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect C," and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has been twice in the "special symbol hit" during the last "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". . In addition, the player is twice due to the “rapid hit of the special symbol” in each of the specific effects executed within the difficult-to-understand period, including when it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It can be understood that the rest was due to the "special symbol small hit".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, Because it has become 1/30), if the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility of doubting that the special symbol lottery result has become "the special symbol jackpot".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol," including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time) It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the hit of the special symbol" twice among the lottery of.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". On the other hand, the probability of being "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot" is "1/3", and the probability of being the "special symbol of 15R regular jackpot" is "1/2". Thus, when it comes to "big hit of special symbol", "15 R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15 R usually big hit of special symbol", rather than being judged as "striking hit of special symbol" The probability of being judged as “is higher.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, of the special symbol lottery up to a few times (for example, the third time), I am a little disappointed at the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol was "the special symbol's hit" twice. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become three or more times in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect D", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player grasps that the lottery result of the special symbol has been three or more times in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". it can. In addition, the player is at least three times among the specific effects performed within the difficult-to-understand period, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by the “rapid hit of the special symbol”. It can be understood that it was something, and others were by "small hit of a special symbol".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the fourth time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the fourth time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that "the jackpot of the special symbol" is immediately obtained after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth time) It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol hit" more than three times among the lottery.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". That is, the probability of being determined as "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" is higher than being determined as "a special symbol's striking hit".

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, the lottery of the special symbol up to the first time (for example, the fourth time) I am also very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol was "a hit of a special symbol" more than three times. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the character on the other side, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" from the "big hit of the special symbol" to the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way. Furthermore, it means that the lottery of the special symbol has not exceeded 100 times since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the player When the character representing the side wins the character on the other side, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in the “low probability state of the special symbol”. In addition, the player, once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", and thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become a "falling hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times. , It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Then, as described above, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then a lottery of about 100 special symbols is made, it is lucky that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbols", There is a possibility of having a question.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, although it has become 1/30), it has not been won very much, and it is doubtful that the lottery result of the special symbol finally becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol is made this time. There is a risk of having

  In such a case, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins over the character on the other side. Although the player is in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol of It can be understood that it has become a jackpot. Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct.

  In addition, the player can grasp that "the jackpot of the special symbol" has been made by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he is elected with a low probability of winning or a satisfaction that he is lucky.

  Also, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Then, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second time (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The player is very different from the forecast, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is " It can be grasped that it became a jackpot of special symbols.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the drawing of the special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped. In the situation, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very lucky and he was very fortunate to have won the prize in a very rare situation, although the idea of the player was largely out of place.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation as described above occurs, the player can not grasp the situation. Therefore, the player, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special symbol high probability state B", the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), so the lottery result of the special symbol is " I thought that it would be a jackpot of a special symbol, and it might end with it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is a reach (90 seconds) or a "special reach (120 seconds)", it is comprised so that either of "Junken presentation A-E" may be performed in the fluctuation display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the current situation of the special symbol has become a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", When the lottery result is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player is in what gaming state the lottery of the special symbol (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made according to the type of "Janken production". I can understand. Therefore, even if the player is asked to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery). You can solve the question. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. As a result, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is If the player is determined to be a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol hit", it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the exact hit of the special symbol" The player does not have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player wins the "small hit of special symbol".

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state A" state, and even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "jumping", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high in special symbol It becomes "high probability state B of special symbol" from probability state A ". On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as the "special symbol high probability state A".

  Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is "certain hit of the special symbol" Or, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because it becomes a small hit of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of the special symbol or "B" can be understood. Therefore, in this case, there is little possibility of causing the player to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery).

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", any one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured as follows. And, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified to what kind of circumstances the jackpot of the special symbol this time has become, but during the jackpot effect "Janken Effects A ~ E" is executed It is good. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special effect setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1413) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113. The special effect setting process (S1413) is a process for setting a special effect, such as executing a special effect in the third symbol display device 81 or ending the special effect being executed.

  In the special effect setting process, first, the type of stop is acquired from the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a (S1901). Next, it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and it is the end timing of the specific effect (S1902). In the process of S1902, if it is the end timing of the specific effect (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is "probable hit" (S1903).

  In the process of S1903, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "immediate hit" (S1903: Yes), the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the high probability state B of the special symbol", the gaming state flag The setting 223 c is set (S 1904), and the process shifts to the processing of S 1906.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1903, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is not "probable hit" (S1903: No), the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is "small hit". In this case, the after small hit flag 223g is set to ON (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906.

  In addition, in the process of S1902, when it is not the end timing of the specific effect (S1902: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 and it is the end timing of the fluctuation effect (S1909).

  In the process of S1909, when it is not the end timing of the fluctuation effect (S1909: No), the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are in the jackpot effect and the jackpot effect It is determined whether it is the end timing (S1910). In the process of S1910, when it is not the end timing of the jackpot effect (S1910: No), this process ends without doing anything, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is the end timing of the jackpot effect (S1910: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1911).

  In the process of S1911, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1911: Yes), the game state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol high probability state A", the game The status flag 223c is set (S1912). And "the back image for high probability" is applied as a back image which should be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81 (S1913), and it shifts to processing of S1916.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1911, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1911: No), the stop type is "15R normal jackpot". In this case, the game state flag 223c is set so that the game state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol low probability state" (S1914). Then, the "time-lapse back image" is applied as the back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1915), and the process proceeds to S1916.

  In the process of S1916, the probability continuous number counter 223f and the small hitting post variation counter 223h are cleared (S1916). Next, the after small hit flag 223g is set to OFF (S1917), and the process proceeds to S1919. Then, in the process of S1909, if it is the end timing of the fluctuation effect (S1909: Yes), the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "out (complete out, reach back and forth, reach other than back and forth)" It is determined whether or not (S1921).

  In the process of S1921, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not "displacement (complete removal, reach before out-of-front reach, reach other than out-of-front out)" (S1919: No), the stop type obtained in the process of S1901 is It is determined whether it is a hit or a "small hit" (S1931). In the process of S1931, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is "perspective or small hit" (S1931: Yes), a specific effect start command is set (S1932), and this process is ended. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  The specific effect start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives this specific effect start command, the third symbol display device 81 executes display (specific effect) indicating that the second special gaming state is in progress.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1931, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is not “certain hit or small hit” (S1931: No), this process is ended and the main process described above (see FIG. 36). Return to).

  In the process of S1921, if the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "disengagement (complete disengaging, reach before out-of-back reach, reach other than out-of-front out of reach)" (S1921: Yes), whether to end the special effect under execution This is a case where it is determined whether or not to resume the special effect once it has been terminated.

  In this case, first, it is determined whether the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1922). In the process of S1922, if the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1922: Yes), the special effect is currently being executed. In this case, the special effect end determination table 222a (see FIG. 12A) is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i (S1929) to determine whether or not the special effect being executed is to be ended. .

  As described above, the special effect end determination table 222a is a table for determining whether or not the special effect is to be ended when the special effect is being executed. In the special effect end determination table 222a, three random number values for determining the end of the special effect are defined, and the range is “0 to 2”. In addition, the range of the random number value does not change regardless of the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol. The total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which the end of the special effect is determined is three, so the specials currently being executed The probability that the effect ends is “1/50”.

  In the process of S1929, the random number value determined in the special effect end determination table 222a is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i, and when they match, it is determined that the custom effect under execution is ended. Then, as a result of comparison by the processing of S1929, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the special effect being executed is ended (S1930). In the process of S1930, when it is not determined to end the special effect in progress (S1930: No), it is a case where the special effect in progress is continued. In this case, the present process ends, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1930 that the special effect in progress is to be ended (S1930: Yes), the process proceeds to S1918.

  Further, in the process of S1922, when the special effect in-progress flag 223e is off (S1922: No), in order to determine whether the special effect is temporarily ended, the value of the after-small variation counter 223h Or, check the game state flag 223c. First, it is determined whether the value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923), and if the value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923: Yes), shift to the processing of S1925. On the other hand, in the process of S1923, if the value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is not 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923: No), does the gaming status flag 223c indicate "high probability status B of special symbol"? Is determined (S1924).

  In the process of S1924, when the gaming state flag 223c does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state B" (S1924: No), the process proceeds to S1927. On the other hand, in the process of S1924, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol high probability state B" (S1924: Yes), the process proceeds to S1925. In the process of S1925, the special effect resumption judgment table 222b (refer to FIG. 12B) and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i are compared (S1925), and it is judged whether or not the special effect once ended is resumed. Do.

  As described above, the special effect resumption determination table 222 b is a table for determining whether or not the special effect once ended is resumed after the special effect is temporarily ended. In the special effect resumption determination table 222b, five random number values for determining restart of the special effect are defined, and the range is “50 to 54”. The range of the random number does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol. The total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which restart of the special effect is determined is five, so the special once ended The probability of resuming the effect is "1/30".

  In the process of S1925, the random number value determined in the special effect resumption determination table 222b is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i, and when they match, it is determined that the special effect once ended is resumed. Then, as a result of the comparison in the process of S1925, it is determined whether it is determined to resume the special effect that has once ended (S1926). In the process of S1926, if it is not determined that the special effect which has once ended is to be resumed (S1926: No), the state where the special effect is ended is continued. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1927.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1926, when it is determined that the special effect which has once ended is to be resumed (S1926: Yes), the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, "back image for special effect" is applied as the back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1906), and the back image change indicating the type of the applied back image The command is set (S1907).

  The back image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives this back surface image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to “the back surface image for special effect”.

  Here, when the “rear image for special effect” is applied, the lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the audio output device (speaker not shown, etc.) 226 (see FIG. 5). The sound (music) output from) is also changed to one corresponding to the "rear image for special effect". As a result, it is different from the case where the “rear image for high probability”, the “rear image for short time”, and the “rear image for low probability” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A presentation is performed. Then, when the process of S1907 ends, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to ON (S1908), this process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36).

  Then, in the process of S1927, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the high probability state B of the special symbol" or whether the after small hit flag 223g is on (S1927). In the process of S1927, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol high probability state B", or when the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1927: Yes), this process is ended. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1927, when the gaming state flag 223c does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state B" and the small hitting after flag 223g is off (S1927: No), the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether "the time saving state of the normal symbol" has ended because the predetermined number of times of fluctuation has ended in (S1928). In the process of S1928, when "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is not finished because the predetermined number of times of variation is finished (S1928: No), this process is finished and the main process described above (see FIG. 36) Return to

  On the other hand, in the process of S1928, when the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is finished because the predetermined number of times of variation is finished (S1928: Yes), the process proceeds to S1918. In the process of S1918, "a back image for low probability" is applied as a back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1918), and the process shifts to the process of S1919. In the process of S1919, a back image change command indicating the type of the back image applied in the process of S1913, the process of S1915, or the process of S1918 is set (S1919).

  The back image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives this back surface image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the back surface image of the type indicated by the back surface image change command.

  For example, if the “rear image for high probability” is applied in the process of S1913, the lighting and blinking patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33, an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226 (along with that) The sound (music) output from (see FIG. 5) is also changed to one corresponding to the “rear image for high probability”. As a result, an effect different from that when the “rear image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The same applies to “rear image for time reduction” and “rear image for low probability” as well as “rear image for high probability”. Then, when the process of S1919 ends, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to OFF (S1920), this process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36).

  When the special effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 by the special effect setting process shown in FIG. 41 described above, and the specific effect is ended, the third symbol display In the device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, special effects can be started subsequently. That is, the “rear image for special effect” can be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, if the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 in the state where the special effect is being executed, the special effect which is being executed is ended there. Do.

  In the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, when the jackpot effect is finished, the rear image according to the jackpot type is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 it can. Specifically, if the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “high-probability back image” can be displayed. Also, if the jackpot type is “15R normal jackpot”, “time-saving short-time back image” can be displayed.

  In addition, in the state where the special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, when the fluctuation effect is finished, the special effect with a probability of 1/50. Can be ended once. That is, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed from "back image for special effect" to "back image for low probability". In addition, after the special effect is ended once, when the fluctuation effect is ended in the third symbol display device 81, the value of the after-small change counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less, or the game state flag 223c is If the "special symbol high probability state B" is shown, the special effect can be resumed with the probability of "1/30". That is, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed from "back image for low probability" to "back image for special effect".

  In addition, when the special effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the special effect is not ended once, the fluctuation effect is ended, If the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is ended because the predetermined number of times of variation has ended, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to "low" from the "back image for time saving" It can be changed to "Rear Image for Probability". As described above, in the present embodiment, the effects (including the display of the rear image) performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 can be made various. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect not to make the player get bored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special effect in progress is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed at the timing when the fluctuation effect ends, but the special effect in progress is performed within the period of the fluctuation effect. It may be ended, or the special effect once ended may be resumed. That is, if the special effect in progress is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed in the execution unit of the fluctuation effect, it may be ended at any time, or may be restarted at any time.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 55. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 42). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 42) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 43, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, next, the power on change image is generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. (S2005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 53A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3502 of FIG. 53A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Accordingly, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the simplified command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and simplified display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 44B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 44 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 44 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15 probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, exact hit, small hit, front and back out of reach, front and back The stop type table and stop type counter corresponding to the non-outreach reach, complete outlier, chance eye) are compared with each other, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2309) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 45, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S 2503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504) 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S2406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden hit, small hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out reach, complete out, any chance eyes ) Is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 44 (b)) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2603).

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2603, next, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15 probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden hit, small hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, any chance eyes Determines whether the stop type of the jackpot (S2604), if it is the stop type of the jackpot (S2604: Yes), if it is in the ON state, the transfer start of the image data used in the fanfare effect is The fanfare data transfer flag 223i to be notified to the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) is set to ON (S2605), the termination type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, when the stop type information is not the big hit stop type (S2604: No), the process of S2605 is skipped, the process of the stop type command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the fanfare data transfer flag 223i, while the fluctuation effect to be a big hit is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the video RAM 236 for normal use It can be transferred. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display fanfare command instructing start of fanfare production is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in time with the end of the fluctuation production in the third symbol display device 81, the display fanfare command is received. From the above, if image data used in fanfare production is transferred from character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the fluctuation production to the start of the fanfare production, and the player There was a fear that they might not have stopped, or they might have a sense of discomfort.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished until the fluctuation effect which becomes the big hit at 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. there were. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and display is performed. If there is a fanfare command for use (S2408: Yes), the fanfare command processing is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47 (a) is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. The fanfare command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command process, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ((0) S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the fanfare command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2704, from the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S2702 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the necessary sprites in the set fanfare display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 2. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the fanfare command processing is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for round effect and ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data required for the round effect has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 since the command for the number of rounds for display has been received, there will be a lot of waiting before the start of the round effect after the fanfare effect is completed. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, since the ending command for display instructing the start of ending effect is sent from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) are finished, If image data required for ending effecting is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for ordinary use since the ending command for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effecting to the start of the ending effecting As a result, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the big hit is finished in the third symbol display device 81 It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) The ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81 when it is finished, so that the player does not feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation is not stopped. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2408 that there is no display fanfare command (S2408: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2410), and display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2410: YES), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S2801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2410 that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S2901 is turned on, The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to OFF (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903, which ending effect display mode corresponds to the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2415) will be described. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3001) .

  Then, the back image type is extracted from the back image change command (S3002). In the process of S3002, four types of "rear image for high probability time", "rear image for short time", "rear image for special effect", and "rear image for low probability time" Among them, any one is extracted. Then, among the rear surface image determination flags provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A to C), the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type extracted from the rear surface image change command is turned on. Is set to OFF (S3003), and this rear image change command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3003. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  Further, in the task processing, when displaying any one of the back surfaces A to C is defined by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3003 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3003, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2414 that there is no rear image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2416). For example (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2418), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), The processing of S2402 to S2418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2418 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 17, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 46 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 46 (b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 46A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S3201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3202). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of In the process of S3203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process (S3204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters. Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204), or when it is determined in the process of S3203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205. At S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205).

  Here, the details of the pointer update process (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is the End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents acquired in the processing of S3206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d The setting is made (S3210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the finalized display flag is not on but is on (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3217), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the fanfare command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 44B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of ((b) or (c) in FIG. 17) is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 53 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3602 (S3602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3603, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 44B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 45 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are performed, drawing of an image in normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) (see S3501: No in FIG. 53A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702), and if it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233. The transfer start flag indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3706).

  In this processing of S3706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is ended. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3706 (S3706: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the process of S3705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3705: No), the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S3717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), it is then determined whether the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709).

  When the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 45), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is It means that it was determined that it is a jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed until the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation effect which becomes a big hit. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set to off (S3710), and the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data used in fanfare effect is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (video RAM 236 for normal use) are acquired. (S3712), the process proceeds to S3717.

  In the process of S3709, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but is off (S3709: No), it is then determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3713). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3713: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3714), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3715). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3716), and the process proceeds to S3717.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3715, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3717, it is determined whether or not transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3717). The determination in the process of S3717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3717 (S3717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3717 (S3717: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3718). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3718, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3719), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 44B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control unit 110 selects the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , And CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110. Then, after that, when the data stored in the reserved area is shifted to the execution area, the drawing of the special symbol is performed based on the shifted data.

  And, when the lottery of special symbol is done, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”, the first symbol display device 37 and the first symbol display device 37 The variable display is performed in the three symbol display device 81, and the stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed after the predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol", "15R of the special symbol It is possible to recognize which is usually a "big hit". In addition, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the first special gaming state ends, according to the lottery result.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot of the 15th round (first special gaming state), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state The display (big hit effect) to be shown is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Further, during the first special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "first opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  And, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol”, when the first special game state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to “the high probability state A of the special symbol”, In the third symbol display device 81, a "rear image for high probability" is displayed. On the other hand, when the first special gaming state ends when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol" and "ordinary symbol" The display shifts to the time saving state, and the “rear image for time saving” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the lottery result of the special symbol by paying attention to the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the player can recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, if the special symbol lottery is performed and the special symbol lottery result is "the special symbol jackpot" or "the special symbol small hit", the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol The variable display is performed on the display device 81, and the stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed after the predetermined time has elapsed. However, among the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol indicating the abutment of the special symbol and the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol are similar. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol of the big hit" or "the small symbol of the special symbol", in the third symbol display device 81, a similar third symbol (that is, reach) The generated "off special symbol" is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit" or "a small special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize if it is a hit.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state The display (specific effect) which shows that is performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81. Further, in the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  And, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “a sudden hit of the special symbol”, when the second special game state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to “the high probability state B of the special symbol”, 3 “Back image for special effect” is displayed on the symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at the current state even if the second special gaming state being executed is over, In the third symbol display device 81, “rear image for special effect” is displayed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific effect, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, and the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it becomes difficult to recognize the lottery result of the special symbol, pachinko machine It becomes difficult to recognize 10 game states.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery is performed and the special symbol lottery result is "out of the special symbol", the variable display is made in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the predetermined time is given. Is displayed, a stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", after the stop display is performed, the jackpot effect or the specific effect described above is not performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, if the player pays attention to stop display on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 or that the effect is not executed after the stop display, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special It can be recognized that it is a "detachment of a symbol". Also, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player can grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change.

  Therefore, in a state where the player can grasp the gaming state (high probability state, low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player It can be grasped that the gaming state being grasped is continuing. On the other hand, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a collision of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol”, and in a state where it is difficult to recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of the special symbol is “off of the special symbol In the case of “1”, since the player can not first grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, he can not continue to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 either.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, the same specific effects are similarly obtained when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. It is configured to be run. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific effect or the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". Become.

  Here, the reason why the player has difficulty in recognizing whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “a sudden hit of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol” will be described.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, as a lottery result of the special symbol, only three of the above-mentioned "certain jackpot of special symbol", the above-mentioned "normal jackpot of special symbol" and the above-mentioned "off of special symbol" are provided. It was not. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", it was easy for the game to be monotonous.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the gaming state of the pachinko machine does not change only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol jackpot" or "the special symbol big hit". Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player can easily grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine has not changed. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "out of the special symbol", it is easy for the player to continue the low probability of winning To understand.

  In a pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the jackpot of the special symbol is made with a probability of 1/300, for example The winning probability is set such that the jackpot, the normal jackpot of special symbols). On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the high probability state of special symbol", if the lottery of the special symbol is done, for example the probability of 1/30 "the big hit of the special symbol (special variation oddity big hit, special symbol The winning probability is set to be "usually a big hit of Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", when the drawing of the special symbol is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is often "off of the special symbol".

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the player is the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol , I could not have a strong sense of expectation that it would be a special jackpot). Therefore, the game was easy to become monotonous.

  So, in this pachinko machine 10, as a lottery result of a special symbol, "a special hit of a special symbol" and "a small hit of a special symbol" are provided. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, to the player, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol (the probability variation of the special symbol It has become possible to have a strong expectation that it will be a "big hit, usually a big hit with a special symbol".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first symbol display device 37 or 37 even when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform similar stop display. Also, the same specific effects are configured to be performed in the same manner. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display, the specific effect, or the operation of the specific winning hole 65a, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol of a sudden hit" or "a small symbol of a special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize the

  In addition, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol high probability state B", but the special symbol When the lottery result is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Also, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state B", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is as in the case of the "special symbol high probability state A". , "Normal pattern short time" will not be. Therefore, in this state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is made and the hit of the normal symbol is achieved, in the case of the electric role, as in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state of the special symbol. Control is performed such that the second opening / closing operation of the motorized part is performed. That is, even when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also the "low probability state of the special symbol", the electric winning combination attached to the first ball entry Works the same way.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player can grasp the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or when it comes to "small hit of special symbol", then the player plays the pachinko game 10 until the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15R normal hit of special symbol". It becomes difficult to grasp whether the state is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state".

  Thereby, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol", the player can not grasp it, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol Thus, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the probability of winning is high. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the lottery of the special symbol is more It has become possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the result will be "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R positive variation jackpot of the special symbol, the 15R regular jackpot of the special symbol)". Therefore, with the present pachinko machine 10, unlike conventional pachinko machines, it has become possible to enhance the interest of gaming.

  However, as described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the player is provided with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 by providing the "special hit of the special symbol" and the "small hit of the special symbol" as the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes impossible to grasp, and as a result, the following problems occur.

  First, the case where it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described more specifically. For example, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player is grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" Or suppose that it became "a small hit of a special symbol".

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "perception of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol", the first symbol display device 37 is similar regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. The first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the similar third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" or If it becomes "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol", and whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become "a high probability state B of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the lottery result is “a small hit of a special symbol” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol whose lottery result indicates (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, while the third symbol indicating the lottery result (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the jackpot effect, the specific effect, the special effect and the like are not performed. Therefore, the player can recognize "disappearance of the special symbol" if he pays attention to the presence of the stop indication of the first symbol, the stop indication of the third symbol, and the execution of the effect. And, since the lottery result of the special symbol is "the out of special symbol", the player can also grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. However, since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the "special symbol is removed", the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  In addition, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", for example, the lottery result of the special symbol Is assumed to have become "a special design hit" or "a special design hit". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the similar first symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the stop display of the similar third symbol is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision with a special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "a high probability state B of a special symbol", the lottery result of a special symbol is "a small symbol of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed. In addition, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the lottery of the special symbol in the first place. Therefore, the player can not keep track of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  On the other hand, in the state where the player has difficulty grasping whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", the lottery result of the special symbol It is assumed that “15R of the special symbol big hit” or “15R of the special symbol usually hit”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot effect is performed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display car of the first symbol and the stop display of the third symbol, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "the 15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol" or "the special symbol It can be recognized whether it is 15R usually a big hit. In addition, if it pays attention to the jackpot effect, it can be recognized that it became a jackpot of a special symbol.

  And, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the player, after the jackpot of the 15th round (the first special game state), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol of It can be grasped that it becomes the high probability state A ". In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot", the player, after the 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol low probability state" Know what to do.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set after the jackpot (first special gaming state) ends in the 15th round, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been grasped so far. Therefore, with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 being "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or even if it becomes "a small hit of a special symbol" and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, then, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R definite variation big hit of a special symbol" or "special symbol of If it becomes “15R normal jackpot”, then the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, even if the player's lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” and it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, this is The game state of the pachinko machine 10 up to is still difficult to grasp.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine provided with "a special pattern hit" and "a small hit of a special symbol" as a lottery result of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot of 15 rounds (first special game) Even if a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal state, the first special game state is obtained by the process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). The jackpot of the special symbol ends without knowing whether the payout has been made. That is, although the player has won the jackpot of the special symbol, the circumstances of the win remain unknown.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may be questioned by what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol". If the player is asked a question, the player will continue playing the game without solving the question, and hence the player may continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  In particular, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol once "a sudden hit of the special symbol". Or, after the player has become unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after becoming a "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) In the case of a jackpot of a symbol, there is a high possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol" in the drawing of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) Including the case that the player can not grasp the game state of 10, among the lottery of the special symbol up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol" It is highly likely that the player has doubts as to whether it has been.

  That is, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol high probability state B” and the winning probability is high, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 several times (for example, When the third lottery of special symbols is made, it is highly likely that the player may have doubts that the lottery result of the special symbols has become "the jackpot of special symbols".

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any of the special symbols in the lottery of the special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time) The player can not know whether or not the "special symbol hit" has been reached. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  In addition, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability (for example, Even though 1/300) is low, the player doubts that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of about 100 special symbols is made. There is a risk of having

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols among the special symbol lottery up to about 100 times is “special symbol The player can not know whether or not it has become a sudden hit. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the circumstances have caused the jackpot of the special symbol of this time. Although the reason will be described later, this makes it possible to make the player feel comfortable and to enhance the interest of the game. When the variation pattern type is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “Junken effects A to E” is not performed, and normal variation display (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) is performed.

  As described above, “Junken effects A to E” is a character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) representing a player (self side) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and an opponent The character on the other end side is displayed, and the Janken game between the respective characters is started, and the final determination is made.

  In the present embodiment, when the “Junken effect” is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the character representing the player (self side) wins the Janken (or Finally, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", if "Junken effect" is executed, the character representing the player (your side) lose. In addition, "Junken effect A" is also executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" even when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". However, the "Junken effect B to E" is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can recognize that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol" when the "Junken effect B to E" is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the effect for the big hit of the special symbol According to the pattern table 222c and the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f, any one of "no Janken effect, Janken effect A to D" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1808 in FIG. 40).

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the change pattern type of the variable display is "Super reach (90 Second) or “special reach (120 seconds)”, and further, if the value of the probability continuous counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be “Junken effect A”, and the player ( Determine the display mode so that the character representing your side wins Janken. Similarly, if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be "Junken effect B", and if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variation effect is If the "Junken effect C" is determined, and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (own side) is Janken respectively. Determine the display mode to win the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special reach" (120 seconds) and if all the following three conditions are satisfied, "Janken effect E" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1805 to S1807 in FIG. 40).

  The first condition is that the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the second condition is that the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 100 or less It is. The third condition is that the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on. Here, when all three conditions are satisfied, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of "the low probability state of the special symbol", and once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the small hit of the special symbol", Thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become the "certain hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the "big hit of the special symbol".

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode (the type of Janken effect type) of the variable effect is determined by the value of the estimated continuous number counter 223f.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player pays attention to the type of "Junken effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81. From the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol", it is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "rapid hit of special symbol". Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player then displays the change effect when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Depending on the mode (ie, the type of the Janken effect), it can be grasped in which gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) was made.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" If there is, it is configured to execute "Junken effect A" in the variable display. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect.

  Therefore, the player can not recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "rapid hit of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player can not grasp what kind of gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the removal of the special symbol) is made. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the special event from the next time onward It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the lottery result of the symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Next, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, an example of the contents that can be grasped by the player, and the reason why the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. An example will be specifically described.

  When the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect A", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "big hit" special symbol It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" even once between the present and the "big hit of the special symbol". In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the player When the character representing the side wins the Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) has been made in the latest gaming state where it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Then, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when a special symbol of about 100 times is drawn, luckily, it may be doubtful that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol". is there.

  In addition, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Although it has become), there is a possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" at last, when the lottery of the special symbol is not made. .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Junken. Although the player is in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lucky result of this special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" It can be understood that Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct. Also, the player can have a satisfaction that he is lucky to be elected with a low probability of winning.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" and the "special symbol big hit" of this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect B", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and among the special symbol lotterys up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbols is “special symbol There is a high possibility of doubting that it was a sudden hit of That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Because it had become, there is a high possibility of doubting that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become twice in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect C," and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has been twice in the "special symbol hit" during the last "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". . In addition, the player is twice due to the “rapid hit of the special symbol” in each of the specific effects executed within the difficult-to-understand period, including when it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It can be understood that the rest was due to the "special symbol small hit".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, Because it has become 1/30), if the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility of doubting that the special symbol lottery result has become "the special symbol jackpot".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol," including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time) It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the hit of the special symbol" twice among the lottery of.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". On the other hand, the probability of being "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot" is "1/3", and the probability of being the "special symbol of 15R regular jackpot" is "1/2". Thus, when it comes to "big hit of special symbol", "15 R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15 R usually big hit of special symbol", rather than being judged as "striking hit of special symbol" The probability of being judged as “is higher.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, of the special symbol lottery up to a few times (for example, the third time), I am a little disappointed at the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol was "the special symbol's hit" twice. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become three or more times in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect D", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player grasps that the lottery result of the special symbol has been three or more times in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". it can. In addition, the player is at least three times among the specific effects performed within the difficult-to-understand period, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by the “rapid hit of the special symbol”. It can be understood that it was something, and others were by "small hit of a special symbol".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the fourth time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the fourth time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that "the jackpot of the special symbol" is immediately obtained after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth time) It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol hit" more than three times among the lottery.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". That is, the probability of being determined as "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" is higher than being determined as "a special symbol's striking hit".

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, the lottery of the special symbol up to the first time (for example, the fourth time) I am also very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol was "a hit of a special symbol" more than three times. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the character on the other side, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" from the "big hit of the special symbol" to the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way. Furthermore, it means that the lottery of the special symbol has not exceeded 100 times since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the player When the character representing the side wins the character on the other side, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in the “low probability state of the special symbol”. In addition, the player, once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", and thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become a "falling hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times. , It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Then, as described above, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then a lottery of about 100 special symbols is made, it is lucky that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbols", There is a possibility of having a question.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, although it has become 1/30), it has not been won very much, and it is doubtful that the lottery result of the special symbol finally becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol is made this time. There is a risk of having

  In such a case, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins over the character on the other side. Although the player is in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol of It can be understood that it has become a jackpot. Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct.

  In addition, the player can grasp that "the jackpot of the special symbol" has been made by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he is elected with a low probability of winning or a satisfaction that he is lucky.

  Also, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Then, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second time (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The player is very different from the forecast, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is " It can be grasped that it became a jackpot of special symbols.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the drawing of the special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped. In the situation, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very lucky and he was very fortunate to have won the prize in a very rare situation, although the idea of the player was largely out of place.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation as described above occurs, the player can not grasp the situation. Therefore, the player, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special symbol high probability state B", the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), so the lottery result of the special symbol is " I thought that it would be a jackpot of a special symbol, and it might end with it.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the current situation of the special symbol has become a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", When the lottery result is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player is in what gaming state the lottery of the special symbol (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made according to the type of "Janken production". I can understand. Therefore, even if the player is asked to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery). You can solve the question. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. As a result, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is If the player is determined to be a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol hit", it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the exact hit of the special symbol" The player does not have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player wins the "small hit of special symbol".

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state A" state, and even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "jumping", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high in special symbol It becomes "high probability state B of special symbol" from probability state A ". On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as the "special symbol high probability state A".

  Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is "certain hit of the special symbol" Or, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because it becomes a small hit of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of the special symbol or "B" can be understood. Therefore, in this case, there is little possibility of causing the player to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery).

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", any one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured as follows. And, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified to what kind of circumstances the jackpot of the special symbol this time has become, but during the jackpot effect "Janken Effects A ~ E" is executed It is good. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  The above is the description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", "Junken effect A ~ in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 According to the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified of the process of the jackpot of the current special symbol according to the type of the executed E). However, the method of notification is not limited to "Janken effects A to E", and another notification may be performed to notify the player as to how the current situation has become a big hit with the special symbol. Also good.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, only parts different from the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit of the special symbol”. If the variation pattern type is "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variation display. In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a sudden hit of a special symbol" within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. And, it reports the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of the special symbol" and the number of lottery of the special symbol made during the period when it is difficult to grasp.

  As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the portions different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment are only the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores programs for executing variable display setting processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) in the second embodiment to be described later and special effect setting processing (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment. .

  FIG. 56 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In addition to the areas 223a and 223j, the counters 223b, 223f, 223h, 223i, 223k, and 223l, and the flags 223c to 223e, 223g, and 223m, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 performs the small hitting continuous number counter. 223n, a recognition impossible period flag 223o, and a recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p at least.

  The small hit continuous number counter 223n counts the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the "small hit of the special symbol" in the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". Is a counter for The small hit consecutive number counter 223 n is cleared by the initialization processing (see S 1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is “small hitting”, 1 is added to the small hitting continuous number counter 223f (S4001 in FIG. 57). reference). Also, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is cleared (FIG. 60 See S4103). That is, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the small hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" by the small hit continuous number counter 223n. It is counted.

  The value of the small hit continuous number counter 223 n is that the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “Super reach (90 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes“ big hit of the special symbol ” If it is "seconds" or "special reach (120 seconds)", it is informed in the variable display (see FIG. 58). When the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is notified, the value of the estimated continuous number counter 223f described in the first embodiment is also notified.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  The unrecognizable period flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the player is in a difficult period to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. When the unrecognizable period flag 223o is on, it indicates that it is a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. When the unrecognizable period flag 223o is off, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is Indicate that it is a period that can be

  The unrecognizable-period flag 223o is set to off by the initial setting process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is ended, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to ON (FIG. 60). See S4101).

  In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to off (FIG. 60). See S4102). This unrecognizable period flag 223o will be described later in order to count the number of fluctuation effects during a period in which the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 among the fluctuation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is used together with the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to OFF, but it may be set to OFF at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  The unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p is a period during which the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the period from the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol". It is a counter for counting the number of times. The unrecognized period fluctuation number counter 223p is cleared by the initialization process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the above-mentioned recognition impossible period flag 223o is on, 1 is added to the recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p (see S4004 in FIG. 58). ). In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p is cleared (FIG. 60) See S4103).

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, the jackpot effect may be cleared at the start.

  That is, the period during which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the period from the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol" by the unrecognizable period variation frequency counter 223p. The number of effects is counted.

  The value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p is informed in the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol" (see FIG. 59). .

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is "reach (120 seconds)", the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuous frequency counter 223n are displayed in the fluctuation display (FIG. 59) reference). As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The same reference numerals are given to steps for executing the same processes as those of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the variable display setting process (S1412) in the second embodiment.

  The variable display setting process in the second embodiment is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above. As in the case of the first embodiment, the fluctuation display setting process in the second embodiment also changes the display mode of the fluctuation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode of the stop display at the end of the fluctuation, etc. It is a process for setting the effect.

  In the variable display setting process, when the process of S1812 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S4002. In the process of S 1813, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S 1803 is “small hit” (S 1813: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S 4001. Then, in the process of S4001, 1 is added to the small hitting continuous number counter 223n (S4001). Then, the process proceeds to step S4002. In the process of S4002, the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to ON (S4002). Then, the process proceeds to step S1815.

  In the process of S1818, when the after small hit flag 223g is on (S1818: Yes), 1 is added to the after small change number counter 223h (S1819), and the process proceeds to S4003. On the other hand, in the process of S1818, when the after small hit flag 223g is off (S1818: No), the process of S1819 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4003.

  In the process of S4003, it is determined whether the unrecognized period flag 223o is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when the unrecognized period flag 223o is on (S4003: Yes), 1 is added to the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4005. On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when the unrecognized period flag 223o is off (S4003: No), the process of S4004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4005.

  In the present embodiment, the unrecognized period flag 223o is provided, but it is not necessary to provide it. When the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to ON, either the process of S1812 or the process of S4001 is executed. Therefore, in the process of S4003, it may be determined whether one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more. If one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more, the processing proceeds to S4004, and the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f, If the values of the small hit consecutive number counter 223 n are both 0, the processing may be shifted to the processing of S4005.

  In the process of S4005, it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005). In the process of S4005, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005: Yes), the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p and the probability continuous number of times The value of the counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n are acquired respectively (S4006). And the display aspect of a fluctuation production is set so that each acquired value may be displayed in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81 during execution of a Janken production (S4007). Then, the process proceeds to step S1820.

  Here, when the processing of S4006 and S4007 is executed, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of unrecognizable period variation counter 223p The value, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f, and the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n are displayed. As a result, the details such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period in which the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are informed.

  As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, when the type of stop acquired in the processing of S1803 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005: No), the processing of S4006 and S4007 described above is skipped and S1820 Move to the process of

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, the fluctuation pattern classification type of fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “big hit of the special symbol”. Is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, the value of the unrecognizable period change frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous time counter 223f, and the small hit continuous time in the variable display The display mode of the fluctuation effect can be set so that the value of the counter 223 n is displayed.

  In this embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "normal reach (20 seconds)" For example, the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuity frequency counter 223n are not displayed in the fluctuation display. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the symbol may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59, an example of a display screen in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the jackpot of the special symbol” and the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 59 is a view showing an example of a display screen when variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds If it is "" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuous frequency counter 223n are displayed in the fluctuation display. Be done.

  In the present embodiment, of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds, the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p and the probability The value of the continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n are displayed. In addition, as long as it is in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 not only in the subdisplay area Ds, you may display it anywhere.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, “Special production rush to big hit” is displayed, and further, “all fluctuation counts →” is displayed, and the value of the unrecognized period fluctuation count counter 223 p is displayed. Be done. For example, "20 times" is displayed. Further, following the display of “the number of times of sudden hit →”, the value of the number of times of continuous consecutive count 223 f is displayed. For example, “1 time” is displayed. Further, following the display of “small hitting count →”, the value of the small hitting continuous count counter 223 n is displayed. For example, "five times" is displayed.

  By visually recognizing the display screen, the player can count the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the sudden hit of the special symbol” within a period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to recognize the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a small hit of the special symbol" and the number of times the lottery of the special symbol is performed. Therefore, the player can grasp the details such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In particular, since the number of times is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in any circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). It is easy for the player to grasp intuitively.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol's exact hit" or "the special symbol's small hit", the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, after that, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). There is a possibility that the player may be asked the question as to whether the

  Even if the player is asked to question, by what circumstances, the result of the drawing of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the player It is possible to grasp the details such as what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the player's question can be resolved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to participate in the game from being lowered. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special effect setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1413) in the second embodiment.

  The special effect setting process in the second embodiment is executed instead of the special effect setting process (see FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. Also in the special effect setting process in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the special effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, or the special effect in progress is ended, etc. It is a process for setting.

  In the special effect setting process, when the process of S1917 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S4101. In the process of S4101, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to OFF (S4101). Next, the small hit continuous number counter 223 n and the unrecognized period fluctuation number counter 223 p are cleared (S 4102), and the process proceeds to S 1919.

  The above is the description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type is " If "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a sudden hit of a special symbol" within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 The number of times, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a small hit of the special symbol", and the number of lottery times of the special symbol made during the period when it is difficult to grasp is notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the process such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period in which it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol's exact hit" or "the special symbol's small hit", the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, after that, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). There is a possibility that the player may be asked the question as to whether the

  Even if the player is asked to question, by what circumstances, the result of the drawing of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the player It is possible to grasp the details such as what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the player's question can be resolved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to participate in the game from being lowered. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the special symbol hit” within the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 The number of times that the lottery result of the symbol has become “a small hit of the special symbol” and the number of lottery of the special symbol made during the period when the grasp is difficult is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, only parts different from the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (when the lottery result of the special symbol is“ big hit of the special symbol ”) If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" within a period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It was configured to notify the number of times, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol became "a small hit of the special symbol", and the number of lotterys of the special symbol made during the period when the grasp was difficult.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If reach (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", lottery results for a predetermined number of times from the most recent among lottery results of special symbols in the past are notified. As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the portions different between the second embodiment and the third embodiment are only the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores a program for executing the variable display setting process (see FIGS. 63 and 64) in the third embodiment described later.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In addition to the areas 223a and 223j, the counters 223b, 223f, 223h, 223i, 223l, 223n, and 223p, and the flags 223c to 223e, 223g, 223m, and 223o in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. , Lottery result history storage area 223 q at least.

  The lottery result history storage area 223 q is an area for storing a lottery result for a predetermined number of times from the most recent among lottery results of special symbols in the past. Here, the details of the lottery result history storage area 223 q will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of the lottery result history storage area 223q. The lottery result history storage area 223 q has twenty areas from the first area to the twentieth area. In each of these areas, at least a stop type storage area 223p1 and a variation pattern type storage area 223q2 are provided. The stop type storage area 223p1 is an area for storing the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, and the change pattern type storage area 223q2 is a change pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. It is an area to store.

  Each area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is initialized by an initialization process (see S 1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is cleared to 0. As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, it extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command, and the extracted stop type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. Store. Also, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern type is extracted, and the extracted variation pattern type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when setting the display mode of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 stops the type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, and the variation pattern type. Are stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q.

  When the stop type and the variation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a are stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q, first, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q A shift process is performed to pack the data stored in area 1 to area 19) into an area (area 2 to area 20) having a large area number. When this shift process is performed, the shift process is performed in order from the area with the largest area number. Specifically, first, 19 is set to the variable n, and the data of the nth area is shifted to the (n + 1) th area, respectively. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of n, and this shift processing and subtraction of the value of n are repeated until the value of the variable n becomes 0.

  In the lottery result history storage area 223q, of the data indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the older the data in time is stored in the area having the larger area number, and the oldest data is stored in the 20th area in time It will be In the present embodiment, although the first area to the twentieth area are provided, the number of areas to be provided may be determined arbitrarily.

  The data stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q is used to notify the lottery result of the past special symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" (FIG. 64 of FIG. See S4201 and S4202).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The same steps as those in the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the variable display setting process (S1412) according to the third embodiment.

  The variable display setting process in the third embodiment is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 57 and FIG. 58) of the second embodiment described above. As in the case of the second embodiment, the change display setting process in the third embodiment also changes the display mode of the change effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode of the stop display at the end of the change, etc. It is a process for setting the effect.

  In the variable display setting process, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot” in the process of S4005 (S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to S4201. In the process of S4201, the history corresponding to the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation frequency counter 223p among the history of the lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired from the latest one S4201). For example, when the value of the unrecognizable period change frequency counter 223p is 1, the stop type stored in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired. When the value of the unrecognized period fluctuation number counter 223p is 5, the stop type stored in each of the first area to the fifth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired.

  Then, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is set to display the history of the lottery result acquired in the process of S4201 in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the Janken effect (S4202). Then, the process proceeds to step S1820.

  Here, when the processing of S4201 and S4202 is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol in the past is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. In addition, the lottery result of the special symbol in the past is displayed for the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation frequency counter 223p from the latest one.

  As described above, the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p counts the number of fluctuation effects during a period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 among the fluctuation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. Is a counter to Therefore, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result (that is, the history) is displayed for the lottery of the special symbol made within the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Be done. As a result, the details such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period in which the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are informed.

  As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005: No), the processing of S4201 and S4202 described above is skipped and S1820 Move to the process of

  When the process of S1825 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S4203. When the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 0 in the process of S1824 (S1824: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4203.

  In the process of S4203, the data of each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is shifted (S4203). The data shift process performed in the process of S4203 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to nineteenth areas of the lottery result history storage area 223q toward the area having a larger area number. Specifically, the data in each area are as follows: 19th area → 20th area, 18th area → 19th area, 17th area → 18th area, ..., 1st area → 2nd area, etc. shift.

  Then, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is stored in the stop type storage area 223p1 in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, and is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a The variation pattern type is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 223q2 in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q (S4204). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36).

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 above, the fluctuation pattern classification type of fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “big hit of the special symbol”. Is “Super reach (90 seconds)” or “Special reach (120 seconds)”, the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q in its variable display is the third symbol The display mode of the fluctuation effect can be set so as to be displayed while the fluctuation display is being performed on the display device 81.

  In this embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "normal reach (20 seconds)" For example, the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q in the variable display is not displayed. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the symbol may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, an example of the display screen in the case where the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the big hit of the special symbol” will be described. FIG. 65 is a view showing an example of a display screen when variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds Or the “special reach (120 seconds)”, the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q is displayed in the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds, a lottery stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q in the sub display area Ds. The result (ie, the stop type) is displayed. In addition, as long as it is in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 not only in the subdisplay area Ds, you may display it anywhere.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, first, "lottery history from special effect rush to jackpot" is displayed. Here, when the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p is represented as n, the lottery result stored in the n-th area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is further displayed under the display of “at the time of entry” (stop Type is displayed. For example, "small hit" is displayed. In addition, here, the lottery result of the special symbol in the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the state in which the player can grasp the gaming state is displayed.

  Further, under the display of “first time”, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the (n−1) area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is displayed. For example, "disengagement" is displayed. In the present embodiment, in the case where the stop type is “complete removal”, “front / rear outreach”, and “reach other than front / rear out”, all are displayed as “out”. In addition, here, after the player has become difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the first lottery result of the special symbol is displayed.

  Further, under the display of “second time”, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the (n−2) area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is displayed. For example, it is displayed as "crash hit". In this case, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the second lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. Similarly, until the value of n (here, the value of the unrecognized period fluctuation frequency counter 223p) becomes 1, ie, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q. Until the is displayed, the lottery results of the past special symbols are displayed.

  The player visually recognizes this display screen, and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, etc. I can understand the process.

  In particular, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery results are displayed in chronological order for the lottery of the special symbol made within a period when the player is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 ( That is, the history of the lottery result is displayed). Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  Specifically, after "small symbols of special symbols" and "disappearance of special symbols" continue, it becomes "clash of special symbols" and then it becomes "big hit of special symbols" or "special" The player intuitively sees whether the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while after the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while, despite the fact that the symbol symbol became "probable". I can understand.

  For example, after "small hit of a special symbol" or "deletion of a special symbol" continues, the player becomes "a hit of a special symbol" and then immediately becomes a "big hit of a special symbol". It didn't quite get "big hit with special symbol", but at the end the situation changed completely (a big reversal) and it can be grasped that it became "big hit with special symbol" at a stretch. Therefore, by making the player recognize that the "special symbol jackpot" has been dramatically made, the player can be enhanced and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Also, the player can be satisfied with being lucky.

  Also, for example, in spite of having become "a certainty of special symbol", if "a small hit of a special symbol" or "a removal of a special symbol" continues for a while, and "a big hit of a special symbol", the player Is happy to be a "special symbol jackpot", but despite having a high probability of winning (for example, 1/30), it has not been "a special symbol jackpot", despite the long lasting condition. I am also disappointed. As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery made during the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in chronological order on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ( That is, by displaying the history of the lottery result), the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol's exact hit" or "the special symbol's small hit", the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, after that, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). There is a possibility that the player may be asked the question as to whether the

  Even if the player is asked to question, by what circumstances, the result of the drawing of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the player It is possible to grasp the details such as what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the player's question can be resolved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to participate in the game from being lowered. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery results for the special symbol lottery made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are in chronological order (that is, the lottery results History) is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  In particular, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery results are displayed in chronological order for the lottery of the special symbol made within a period when the player is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 ( That is, the history of the lottery result is displayed). Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  Specifically, after "small symbols of special symbols" and "disappearance of special symbols" continue, it becomes "clash of special symbols" and then it becomes "big hit of special symbols" or "special" The player intuitively sees whether the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while after the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while, despite the fact that the symbol symbol became "probable". I can understand.

  For example, after "small hit of a special symbol" or "deletion of a special symbol" continues, the player becomes "a hit of a special symbol" and then immediately becomes a "big hit of a special symbol". It didn't quite get "big hit with special symbol", but at the end the situation changed completely (a big reversal) and it can be grasped that it became "big hit with special symbol" at a stretch. Therefore, the player can be boosted by having become "the jackpot of a special symbol" dramatically, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Also, the player can be satisfied with being lucky.

  Also, for example, in spite of having become "a certainty of special symbol", if "a small hit of a special symbol" or "a removal of a special symbol" continues for a while, and "a big hit of a special symbol", the player Is happy to be a "special symbol jackpot", but despite having a high probability of winning (for example, 1/30), it has not been "a special symbol jackpot", despite the long lasting condition. I am also disappointed. As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery made during the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in chronological order on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ( That is, by displaying the history of the lottery result), the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Although it is displayed, out of the areas from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, it is out as a lottery result (other than the stop type is “completely out”, “back and forth out of reach” and “out of back and forth” In the area where the reach is stored, the lottery result (stop type) may not be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  Also, in the first place, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is configured so as not to be stored as a lottery result (stop type is "complete out," "back and forth out of reach", "reach other than out of back and forth") It may be configured such that the detachment is not displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  The "high probability state of special symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first gaming state" described in the claims, and the "low probability state of special symbol" described in the above embodiment It corresponds to the "second game state" described in the claims. In addition, "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "first lottery result" described in the claims, and "15R normal jackpot of special symbol" described in the above embodiment This corresponds to the "second lottery result" described in the claims. In addition, the "special symbol collision hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third lottery result" described in the claims, and the "small symbol special symbol hit" described in the above embodiment is claimed. Corresponding to the "fourth lottery result" described in the range, "the removal of the special symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "fifth lottery result" described in the claims. In addition, the “Janken effects A to D” described in the above embodiment are selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means described in the claims, and the contents of the lottery result storage means The "Junken effect E" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "another aspect" described in the claims, corresponding to the aspect to be switched.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol within the period when the player was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable display. In order to report the number of times it has become a "certain hit", the number of times a lottery result of a special symbol has become "a small hit of a special symbol", and the number of lotterys of a special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp It is configured. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 of the said 3rd Embodiment is a change pattern classification of the fluctuation display performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is "super reach", when the lottery result of a special symbol turns into "big hit of a special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", among the lottery results of the past special symbols in the variable display, it is configured to notify the lottery results for a predetermined number of times from the most recent. On the other hand, the screen of the stop display made on the third symbol display device 81 during the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the work RAM 223 of the display control device 114 in chronological order Every time, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the image stored in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, in the sub display area Ds) You may arrange and display in order of a series. Note that the images may be displayed one by one or a plurality of each in chronological order. The player visually recognizes this display screen, and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, etc. I can understand the process. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Even if the player is asked to wonder if the special symbol lottery result "the special symbol's jackpot" in any case, the player may Can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from holding the unpleasant feeling continuously, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol within the period when the player was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable display. In order to report the number of times it has become a "certain hit", the number of times a lottery result of a special symbol has become "a small hit of a special symbol", and the number of lotterys of a special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp It is configured. On the other hand, with the combination of the third symbol in the stop display in the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" The number of times it became "small hit" and the number of times the drawing of the special symbol made during the period when it is difficult to grasp may be notified. For example, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1. The third symbol has the same number as the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the special symbol hit". Then, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 with the same number as the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit of the special symbol". Then, on the effective line L1 of the right symbol row Z3, the number of drawing times of the special symbol made during the period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. The player visually recognizes this display screen, and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, etc. I can understand the process. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 When the player wins the game, even if the player is asked to wonder why the drawing result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", by the circumstances. I can solve the question. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from holding the unpleasant feeling continuously, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" or In the case of "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is informed of the circumstances with which the jackpot of the special symbol of this time has become a big hit. However, "Junken effects A to E" may be executed during the jackpot effect. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed at the timing when the fluctuation effect is ended, but it is being executed within the period when the fluctuation effect is being executed. The special effect of may be ended, or the special effect once ended may be resumed. That is, if the special effect in progress is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed in the execution unit of the fluctuation effect, it may be ended at any time, or may be restarted at any time.

  Moreover, although the recognition impossible period flag 223 o is provided in the second and third embodiments, it is not necessary to provide it. When the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to ON, either the process of S1812 or the process of S4001 is executed (see FIGS. 57 and 63). Therefore, in the process of S4003, it may be determined whether one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more. If one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more, the processing proceeds to S4004, and the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f, If the values of the small hit consecutive number counter 223 n are both 0, the processing may be shifted to the processing of S4005.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "deletion of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach", the number of accus Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, "Junken effect A" is selected as the display mode of the variable display. Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" or "special reach", the variation display As the display mode, “Janken effect A” may not be selected, and any one of “Janken effect B to E” may be selected. Thereby, when the display mode of the variable display is "Junken effects B to E", it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, every time when the variable display is performed, the player can be attracted to the variable display, and the player can be made to rejoice by the display mode of the variable display. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "deletion of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach", the number of accus Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, "Junken effect A" is selected as the display mode of the variable display. On the other hand, not only the "Junken effect A" but also other "Janken effects B to E" may be selected. However, since the effect is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the character representing the player (the player's side) always loses to the character of the other party. Then, when "Junken effects A to E" is selected, "Junken no effect" and "Junken effects A to D" based on, for example, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f or the value of the small hitting after number fluctuation number counter 223h. Select one from "E". Further, for example, one of "Junken effects A to E" may be selected with reference to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f or the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h (that is, always the Janken effect You may choose In addition, a random number counter may be provided to select an effect at the time of disconnection, and one of “no Janken effect” and “Janken effect A to E” may be selected according to the random number counter. One of "Junken effects A to E" may be selected according to the random number counter.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "deletion of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach", the number of accus Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, "Junken effect A" is selected as the display mode of the variable display. On the other hand, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is "outside of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variable display is "super reach", the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol" Similarly to the case, “Junken effects A to D” may be selected according to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223 f. Also, "Junken effect E" may be selected. However, since the effect is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the character representing the player (the player's side) always loses to the character of the other party. As a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the display mode of the variable display is determined according to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. If the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state B of special symbol" or if the lottery result of the special symbol is "clash of special symbols" It can be suggested to the player.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" or If it is "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the contents of the effects performed in "Junken effects A to E" You may change it. For example, when the variation pattern type of the variation display is "super reach (90 seconds)", the character representing the player (self side) and the small character as the other party character are made to appear and the Janken confrontation is performed. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Then, when the variation pattern type of the variation display is "special reach", a character representing the player (self side) and a large character (boss) character as the other party character are made to appear, and the effect of performing the Janken confrontation It may be configured to perform.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, it does not include the case where the lottery result of a special symbol turns into "a small hit of a special symbol", and after that, within the period until the lottery result of a special symbol turns into "a big hit of a special symbol". In order to determine whether or not the number of variable display (lottery of special symbol) executed on the is 100 or less, a post-small change counter 223 h is provided. Specifically, when the initial value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is set to 0, and the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hitting of a special symbol", if the variation effect is executed thereafter, then 1 is set. It is adding. In addition, after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the jackpot of the special symbol” and the jackpot effect is executed, the jackpot is cleared to 0 when the jackpot effect is finished. And, if the value of the small hitting post fluctuation number counter 223h is 100 or more, it does not include the case where the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a small hit of the special symbol”, and after that, the lottery result of the special symbol is “ It is determined that the number of variable displays (lottery of special symbols) executed within the period until the jackpot of the special symbol is “100 times or less (S1806 in FIG. 40, S1921 in FIG. 41, etc.). On the other hand, if the initial value of the small hit post variation counter 223h is 100, and the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit of the special symbol", then 1 is subtracted if the variable display is executed. You may. And, in this case, after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the jackpot of the special symbol” and the jackpot effect is executed, it is set to 100 when the jackpot effect is ended. And, if the value of the small hitting post fluctuation number counter 223h is 0 or less, it does not include the case that the drawing result of the special symbol becomes “the small hitting of the special symbol”, and from that point on, the drawing result of the special symbol is “ It may be determined that the number of variation effects (lottery of special symbols) executed within the period until the jackpot of the special symbol is “100 or less”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit" or "a small symbol of a special symbol", the variable display of the third symbol is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the predetermined time has elapsed, a similar third symbol (i.e., "the special symbol is removed" at which reach occurs) is displayed to be stopped. However, the stop display of the third symbol does not have to be limited to this. For example, it is a combination of the 3rd designs which does not become reach, and the same main symbols (10 kinds of character symbols corresponding to the numbers of "0" to "9") to upper, middle and lower each symbol row Z1 to Z3 You may stop display so that one) is included. In addition, it is the combination of the 3rd symbol which becomes reach, but does not become a hit, and it corresponds to the specified main symbol (the number of "4" or "7" as the 3rd symbol displayed in the middle of middle symbol row Z2 Character pattern) may be stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, the display mode of the fluctuation display in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is determined to either "Junken no effect" and "Junken effects A-E". doing. In addition, the execution of special effects, the end of special effects, and the restart of special effects are determined. However, the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the display mode of the variable display, the execution of the special effect, the end of the special effect, and the determination of resumption of the special effect, or the display control device 114 It may be configured to perform in In that case, a program for executing the variation display setting process shown in FIG. 40 and the special effect setting process shown in FIG. 41, the special effect end determination table 222a, the special effect resumption determination table 222b, and the effect pattern The table 222 c is stored in the ROM of the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Also, a special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, a gaming state flag 223c, a special effect in progress flag 223e, a probability continuous number counter 223f, a small after hit flag 223g, a small after hit fluctuation counter 223h, and a special effect drawing The memories such as the counter 223i are provided in the RAM of the main control unit 110 and the display control unit 114.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “normal reach (20 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes“ big hit of the special symbol ” If it is "seconds", the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuity frequency counter 223n are not displayed in the fluctuation display. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", it may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of unrecognizable period fluctuations in the sub display area Ds of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds. Although the value of the counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f, and the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n are displayed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the sub display region Ds. If so, it may be displayed anywhere.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first to twentieth areas are provided in the lottery result history storage area 223q, but the number of the provided areas may be arbitrarily determined.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "normal reach (20 If it is "seconds", the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q in the variable display is not displayed. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the symbol may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds, the lottery result history storage area in the sub display area Ds. Although the lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in 223 q is displayed, it may be displayed anywhere within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, not limited to the sub display area Ds. .

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery result (ie, the stop type) is stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q, but instead of the lottery result, the lottery of the special symbol is a line The gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 may be stored when being hit. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the history of the gaming state stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q may be notified. As a result, the player can grasp the process such as what gaming state or the like the drawing of the special symbol made in the period in which it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Even if the player is asked to wonder if the special symbol lottery result "the special symbol's jackpot" in any case, the player may Can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from holding the unpleasant feeling continuously, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol". If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n in the fluctuation display It is displayed on. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to produce an effect indicating the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n. For example, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the number indicated by the probability continuous number of times counter 223f is represented by the number of characters (characters on the friend side) belonging to the player (self side) The number indicated by the small hit consecutive number counter 223 n may be represented by the number of characters (characters on the enemy side) belonging to That is, the character on the ally side is made to appear (displayed) the same number as the number indicated by the probable continuous number counter 223f, and the enemy character is made to appear the same number as the number indicated by the small hitting continuous number counter 223n. As you configure the rendition. As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances. Also, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”. In addition, not only when the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display is similarly performed in other cases. It may be configured to perform.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “Super reach (when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes“ big hit of the special symbol ”) If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, It is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, an effect indicating the lottery result stored in each area may be performed by the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is the old one Are sequentially extracted one by one, and effects are executed in units of the extracted lottery results. More specifically, a character indicating the player (your side) and a character on the other side are made to appear, and if the extracted lottery result is "immediately hit", the character on the other side is the character on the other side An effect of punching is performed, and on the other hand, if the extracted lottery result is "small hit", an effect is produced in which the character on the own side is punched by the character on the opposite side. Further, if the extracted lottery result is “off”, the character on the one side and the character on the other side are configured to perform an effect of holding back each other.
As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances. In addition, since the lottery results are shown in chronological order, the player instincts, by what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery), the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol". Easy to grasp. In addition, not only when the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display is similarly performed in other cases. It may be configured to perform. If the extracted lottery result is "off", the effect may be skipped. That is, the effect may be configured to be produced in the case where the lottery result is "immediately hit" and "small hit".

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol". If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n in the fluctuation display It is displayed on. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed as the third symbol display device It is displayed on the display screen of 81. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds) Or “special reach (120 seconds)”, in addition to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n in the variable display, from the nth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q Each of the lottery results (stop types) stored in each area up to the first area may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, not only when the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display is similarly performed in other cases. It may be configured to perform.

  In the above embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the special effect in progress flag 223e is set to off, but it may be set to off at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the jackpot effect is ended, the probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  In the above embodiment, when the jackpot effect is finished, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state", the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and the special effect When the middle flag 223e is on, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined to be "Junken effect E". On the other hand, even if the special effect flag 223e is off, the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 1 to 100, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state". If it is within the range, the display mode of the change effect to be executed may be determined as "Junken effect E".

  In the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is cleared, but it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect is ended, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to OFF, but if it is within the period of the jackpot effect, it may be set to OFF at any time. good. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  In the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p is cleared, but it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed as the third symbol display device Of the areas from the n-th area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, it is displayed on the display screen of 81 as a lottery result (stop type is “completely out”, “back and forth out of reach”) For the area in which “reach other than back and forth deviation” is stored, the lottery result (stop type) may not be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  Also, in the first place, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is configured so as not to be stored as a lottery result (stop type is "complete out," "back and forth out of reach", "reach other than out of back and forth") It may be configured such that the detachment is not displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but during the change effect, an image different from normal is displayed or a sound different from normal is displayed. An effect such as emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. If configured in this manner, the stop type of each of the variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect does not have to be changed to "chance", and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is it can. In addition, since the continuous advance notice effect can be performed also in the last variation effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of giving the player a sense of anticipation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Moreover, when performing continuous advance notice production over a plurality of change effects, the effect contents may be changed for each change effect, or the effect contents may be changed for only some of the change effects.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits a change pattern command and a stop type command, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81 , Fluctuation representation according to the fluctuation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when it is time to execute the variation effect execution time, the stop symbol of the stop type corresponding to the stop type command is displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) instructing the stop display of the stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from main control device 110, the execution time of the scheduled fluctuation effect is scheduled Even if it finishes, you may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 performs pre-reading for the start winning combination, but the voice lamp control device 113 may perform pre-reading for the starting winning combination. In that case, when the start winning combination is detected in main controller 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, and pachinko at the time of winning The gaming state of the machine 10 (in addition, during the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1, etc. Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the voice lamp control device ROM 222, respectively. Also, the prefetching process (see FIG. 25) executed by the main control unit 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that it can be executed by the audio lamp control unit 113. If configured in this way, when the read ahead command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, the voice lamp control unit 113 extracts various counter values from the read ahead command, and a lottery for a big hit lottery You can look ahead to the results. As a result, since the main control device 110 does not have to look ahead to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be further alleviated, and transition should be made based on entering the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to concentrate on the lottery process for lottery the gaming state. However, since important random number values such as the random number value of the jackpot may be discovered unfairly, notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the lottery result (success or failure), the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are included in the prefetch command. Is preferred. For example, it can be prevented that the signal output from the main control device 110 is illegally stolen and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are analyzed. Moreover, it can prevent that important random number values, such as a random number value which determines whether it is a big hit, from the signal output from the main control apparatus 110 is analyzed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the processing for determining whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect (the continuous advance judging process in FIG. 39) is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, but these processes are displayed in the display control device It may be performed at 114. In such a case, the program for executing the continuous advance notice determination process shown in FIG. 39 can be executed by the display control device 114, and the continuous advance decision table 222d and the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area). Store in 234a1). Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with respective memories such as the above-described prefetched information storage area 223j, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the continuous notice lottery counter 223k, the continuous notice frequency counter 2231, and a notice after jackpot flag 223m. Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command as it is to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the pre-reading command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining whether to start the continuous preview effect (continuous preview determination process of FIG. 39).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead, and may provide them as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time when important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. In addition, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided is described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 50). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 51) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233 j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, in the back surface C that is the back image of the "island stage", the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time is described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time Good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuation effect is performed, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 and the third symbol display device 81 Is provided with another fourth symbol display device, and combined with the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, even if continuous notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device Good. In this case, control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, an award winning feature may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various effects, and the bonus item may be combined with the fluctuation effect and actuated in a predetermined mode to perform continuous advance notice effect. In addition, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by causing the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output the sound for the continuous advance announcement effect by the control of the audio lamp control device 113, and the electric decoration portion of the pachinko machine 10 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the change effects.

  Thereby, every time when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the prize is operated in a predetermined mode Alternatively, the player can be made to have a feeling of jackpot expectation by outputting a voice from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually pays attention to the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed and continues playing the game, but the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 Since the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the action of the special effects, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, a different effect is produced to the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effects can be easily and easily continued by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, activation of characters, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33. An advance notice can be made.

  In addition, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113. The main control unit 110 causes the main control unit 110 to perform a determination of acceptance or rejection at the start of the change, causes the voice lamp control unit 113 to perform continuous advance notice effects, and causes the display control unit 114 to perform change effects. In the case of performing the advance presentation, each control device can share each processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so it is possible to suppress the performance required for the MPU of each control device.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the character in the predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and interlockingly controlling them. As a result, it is possible to execute a more diverse continuous notice effect. In addition, execution method of continuous announcement production (the indication with the 3rd symbol display 81, the indication with the 4th symbol display, the action of the special feature, the voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the electric decoration 29-33) Or, by changing the combination of them, the continuous notice effect mode selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (15R probability variation big hit of special symbol, 15R normal big hit of special symbol, out of special symbol) You may prepare two or more.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notice effects other than a fluctuation production was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, when continuous notice effects are performed, it is necessarily limited to this. Instead of the above, continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the change effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command processing (refer to FIG. 37) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and other stop symbol determination The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so the chance symbol is set as a stop pattern instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command, so the fluctuation stop Sometimes you can see the chance eyes fixed. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as the stop symbol for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  Further, in the audio lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined by the continuous advance notification determination process (S1612) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 38), and the continuous advance presentation effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. It is also good. As a result, transfer of image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode can be started from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the start of the change presentation where the continuous notice effect is performed Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect in the sub-area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by another image data, so the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 The probability can be increased. Thus, it is possible to suppress repeated transfer of image data used in continuous advance notice effects.

  In addition, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. Thus, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous advance notice effect. When control is performed so that image data is not overwritten, cancellation of the overwrite control can be easily performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the information about the execution of continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type is included in the display change pattern command, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each change pattern, and each continuous The display control device 114 prepares a display data table corresponding to each notice image type, and the display control device 114 displays a corresponding display data table according to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command and the continuous notice image type. It may be set to 233 d. That is, the display data table may include the drawing content corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, setting of the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type is not necessary. Therefore, since the data table to be set can be reduced, the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, one transfer data table may be prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and therefore, an increase in data tables can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the change effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is a voice lamp control device based on the stop symbol (long reach, reach other than forward or backward, complete miss reach) determined by the main controller 110. Although the case where it was set by 113 was explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last fluctuation effect that has been held is If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be replaced with the stop symbol of the reach aspect out of reach, instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control unit 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control unit 110, but is always an out-of-front reach, giving the player a high sense of expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing continuous advance notice effects along with all of the pending change effects, each change effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each change, but in this case It may be configured to change the effect mode of change effects other than the last change effect on hold, to out-of-change effects. The variation pattern is changed according to the setting condition of the continuous advance presentation effect and the number of times of the continuous advance presentation effect executed by the process of generating the display change pattern command in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1821 in FIG. 40). May be In addition, when the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is displayed based on the change pattern determined by the main control unit 110 without updating the effect mode of the change effect. May be Here, even if continuous notice effects are continuously performed, the player's sense of expectation if the situation where the jackpot does not appear as a result continues even though the mode of the corresponding change effect is, for example, the super reach change effect. There is a risk that they will move backwards, but with the continuous advance notice effect being performed continuously, the fluctuation effect other than the change effect performed last is performed finally by being performed by the change effect continuously. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the fluctuation effect.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, when execution of continuous notice production was decided, although a case where continuous notice production was always performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this, for example, continuous notice When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In the above-described embodiment, although the case where one first entrance 64 is arranged in the game board 13 where the lottery of the big hit is started when the ball enters the ball has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entry ports where entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect when the ball holding ball number command is received, all the first ball entrances are performed at that time. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the fluctuation effect (hold ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in pachinko machines that are provided with a plurality of first ball entrances and preferentially execute the fluctuation effects reserved in one first ball entrance, the fluctuation effects are preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only when the ball enters the first ball entrance. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority, the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where continuous advance notice effects are not easily finished when the fluctuation effect is continuously suspended at the first entrance with high priority.

  In the above embodiment, when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c in the main control device 110 is increased, the case of transmitting the holding ball number command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, every time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc., the special symbol holding ball number counter Every time the value (N) of 203c is updated, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 may be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 it can.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined in the voice lamp control device 113 when the pre-reading command is received, the continuous advance presentation effect is executed for all the fluctuation effects pending at that time. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each of further variation effects. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect does not appear or does not appear for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance effect, and perform the effect that does not make the player bored. Can. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated each time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and a counter for determining whether to perform the continuous notice effect in each variation effect is determined. You may provide. Then, in the continuous advance notice determination process, when performing continuous advance notice effects (S 1716: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether to execute the continuous advance notice effects in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding fluctuation effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b at the time of judging whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous advance notice effect, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect in which the judgment is made , A game state after the end of a series of continuous advance notice effects (a special symbol of 15R, a special symbol of 15R, a normal symbol, a special symbol of a special symbol), or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each of the change effects is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each change effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, display data table and transfer data table are set in display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning image are generated. Alternatively, it may set an instruction to transfer necessary image data.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown. A display mode for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and an aspect of effect including dynamic display of the identification information according to a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And at least one of the first to fifth different lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery means. In the gaming machine provided with the first character, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where the game medium is difficult to enter is opened for a first period. Opening control means and, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results, a second opening in which the entrance is opened for a second period shorter than the first period System Means, entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and game media at the entrance Means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the player enters, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state when the second lottery result is the second lottery result Before If the second gaming state setting means set as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained Playing state maintaining means, a lottery result storing means for storing at least that effect when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means It is characterized by further comprising: mode switching means for switching the mode selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means when any of the first and second lottery results is obtained. A game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the mode of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means corresponds to the lottery result Control is performed by the effect control means so as to be selected by the mode selecting means and the effect of the selected mode is executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine A1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result. In the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first and second lottery results without the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming the third lottery result The selected mode can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, it is possible to allow the player to continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  The gaming machine A1 includes counting means for counting the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result storage means stores the number counted by the counting means When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first or second lottery result, the mode switching means responds to the number of times counted by the counting means. A game machine A2 characterized in that the mode selected in the mode selection means is switched.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the counted number of times is stored in the lottery result storage means. Then, in the mode switching means, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the mode selecting means is selected according to the number of times counted by the counting means The mode is switched. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. As a result, game media can easily enter the entrance, and a predetermined game value can be easily awarded. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change, and it is not easy for gaming media to enter the entrance. Therefore, the third lottery result is more advantageous for the player than the fourth lottery result. According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of times the player has reached the third lottery result which is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. Therefore, since the player's discomfort can be further reduced, the player can be more motivated to participate in the game.

  A display mode for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and an aspect of effect including dynamic display of the identification information according to a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And at least one of the first to fifth different lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery means. In the gaming machine provided with the first character, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where the game medium is difficult to enter is opened for a first period. Opening control means and, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results, a second opening in which the entrance is opened for a second period shorter than the first period System Means, entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and game media at the entrance Means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the player enters, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state when the second lottery result is the second lottery result Before If the second gaming state setting means set as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained Playing state maintaining means, a lottery result storing means for storing at least that effect when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means It is characterized by further comprising: mode switching means for switching the mode selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means when any of the first and second lottery results is obtained. A gaming machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the mode of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means corresponds to the lottery result. Control is performed by the effect control means so as to be selected by the mode selecting means and the effect of the selected mode is executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine B1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result. In the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first and second lottery results without the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming the third lottery result The selected mode can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, it is possible to allow the player to continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In any of gaming machine B1 and gaming machines A1 to A2, among the lottery performed in the lottery means, the number of lotterys made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result The lottery result storage unit stores the number of times counted by the counting unit, and the mode switching unit is configured to count the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit. When any of the second lottery results, the number of times counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and whether the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state The state is provided with a determination means for determining, when it is determined by the determination means that the number is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state The mode selected in the selection means is switched to a mode different from the mode selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means A game machine B2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B2, among the lottery performed in the lottery means, the number of lotterys made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result is counted by the counting means and the counted lottery The number of times is stored in the lottery result storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the number of times counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine When it is determined by the determination means whether the game is in the second gaming state, the aspect selected in the mode selection means by the mode switching means is selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, A mode different from the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means is switched. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, it is not easy to select the first or second lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means. Therefore, after the fourth lottery result is reached, the first or second lottery result is selected within the predetermined number of times without changing to the third lottery result and in the second gaming state. The probability of failure is quite low. According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the first or second lottery result is selected in a state where the probability of selection of the first or second lottery result is considerably low. The player can be made to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to have a sense of surprise that the first or second lottery result has been selected in a situation with a very low probability and satisfaction that he is lucky. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have more desire to participate in the game.

  A display mode for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and an aspect of effect including dynamic display of the identification information according to a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And at least one of the first to fifth different lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery means. In the gaming machine provided with the first character, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where the game medium is difficult to enter is opened for a first period. Opening control means and, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results, a second opening in which the entrance is opened for a second period shorter than the first period System Means, entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and game media at the entrance Means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the player enters, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state when the second lottery result is the second lottery result Before If the second gaming state setting means set as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained Playing state maintaining means, a lottery result storing means for storing at least that effect when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means It is characterized by further comprising: mode switching means for switching the mode selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means when any of the first and second lottery results is obtained. A gaming machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the mode of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means corresponds to the lottery result. Control is performed by the effect control means so as to be selected by the mode selecting means and the effect of the selected mode is executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine C1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes any of the first and second lottery results. In the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first and second lottery results without the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming the third lottery result The selected mode can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, it is possible to allow the player to continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  First counting means for counting the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result in any of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines B1 to B2 and the gaming machines A1 to A2; And second counting means for counting the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result, and the lottery result storage means includes the number of times counted by the first counting means, and The number of times counted by the second counting means is stored, and the mode switching means, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, According to the number counted by the first counting means and the number counted by the second counting means, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the mode selected in the mode selecting means is switched.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the first counting means counts the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result Is counted by the second counting means. Then, the number of times counted by the first counting means and the number of times counted by the second counting means are stored in the lottery result storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the number of times counted by the first counting means by the mode switching means, and counting by the second counting means The mode selected in the mode selecting means is switched according to the number of times the user has made the request. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. As a result, game media can easily enter the entrance, and a predetermined game value can be easily awarded. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change, and it is not easy for gaming media to enter the entrance. Therefore, the third lottery result is more advantageous for the player than the fourth lottery result. According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the number of times the player has become the third lottery result which is advantageous for the player and the number of the player who is the fourth lottery result which is not advantageous for the player The player can be made to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. Therefore, since the player's discomfort can be further reduced, the player can be more motivated to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C2, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines A1 to A2, the lottery result storage means is configured to select the third lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, and When any of 4 lottery results is obtained, lottery result information indicating the lottery result is stored in association with the order of the lottery, and the mode switching means is a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means. When either is the first or second lottery result, according to each lottery result information stored in the lottery result storage means and the order associated with the lottery result information, A game machine C3 characterized in that the mode selected in the mode selection means is switched.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the third lottery result or the fourth lottery result, the lottery result information indicating the lottery result is the lottery It is associated with the order and stored in the lottery result storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, each lottery result information stored in the lottery result storage means by the mode switching means and the lottery result Depending on the order associated with the information, the aspect selected in the aspect selection means is switched. Therefore, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the player is made to grasp the order which resulted in the third lottery result which is advantageous for the player and the order which resulted in the fourth lottery result which is not advantageous for the player. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand more in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. Therefore, since the player's discomfort can be further reduced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine D1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine D3 characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a specific winning combination (entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control unit 113 Voice lamp control unit 114 Display control unit 223 h Small hitting after number variation count counter (lottery result storage unit, counting unit)
S415: No, S417: No, S1005 Entrance Maintaining Means S415: No, S417: No, S1207: No Playing State Maintaining Means S416, S1005, S1102, S1103 First Opening Control Means S418, S1005, S1202, S1203 Second Opening Control means S502 to S505 Lottery means S508, S513, S515 Mode selection means S516, S1001, S1402, S1412, S1414, S2301 to S2307 Effect control means S1002 Game value giving means S1112, S1113, S1207, S1208 First game state setting means S11 , S1114 Second game state setting means S1805, S1806 Determination means S1808 to S1810, S1820 Mode switching means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening perform an equivalent or lottery, pachinko machines have been known to carry out the change production and directing those of or in accordance with the lottery result. The pachinko machine, but the game state changes in accordance with the lottery result, therefore lottery result is indicated by the effect of such fluctuations produce and directing those or, the player pays attention to the effect of such fluctuations produce and specific effect Thus, the gaming state of the pachinko machine can be grasped.

Some of this type of pachinko machine, if example embodiment, the per such and per small win突確, fluctuation effect and per effect corresponding to per its (hereinafter, referred to "specific effect") there is one provided with a The fun of the game is improved by increasing the chance of winning and the pattern of the effect .

Per extracted election results突確, or, when it becomes to hit small, for a similar change production and specific effect is carried out, the player, even though paying attention to the effect of such change production and specific effect, lottery results The distinction becomes difficult, and it becomes unclear whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine has changed. Then, once the game state is unknown, is this thereafter, lottery results probability variation big hit, or, become a normal big hit, until the lottery results are shown by the production of such change production and directing those or, the player pachinko It becomes impossible to grasp the gaming state of the machine.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-333089

  However, even if the player is able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine because the lottery result has become a big hit or a big hit normally, the gaming state is about the gaming state during which the gaming state is unknown, the player is I can not grasp. Therefore, even if the lottery result is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot and a predetermined gaming value is given, the player may feel uncomfortable because the process of winning is unknown. If the player is asked to question the player, the player will continue playing the game without solving the question, and thereafter, the player will continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of causing a player to continue to have a willingness to participate in a game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, display means for displaying the identification information, and selecting means for performing lottery based on the establishment of starting conditions, according to the results of the lottery by the selecting means It comprises: mode selection means for selecting a mode of production including the mode of dynamic display of the identification information, and production control means for performing control so that production of the mode selected by the mode selection means is performed, the lottery are those in which at least different drawing result of the first through fifth provided as lottery result means, when the result of the lottery performed by the lottery unit is one of the first and second lottery result, a first opening control means for entering opening difficult the entrance first period of game media, when the result of the lottery performed by the lottery unit is one of the third and fourth lottery result, the entry opening From the first period Short and second opening control means for the second period open, if the result of the lottery performed by the lottery unit is a lottery result of the fifth, entrance to the entrance port the game medium is kept in a difficult state to enter and maintaining means, when said game medium to inlets enters the player a game value providing means for providing a predetermined game value to said selecting means according to the lottery result is the first and third drawing A first game in which a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine if any of the results is a state setting means, when the result of the lottery is the second lottery result by said selecting means, the lottery result of the selected probability the first is from the first in drawing by the drawing means to the third Than the gaming state of A second game condition setting means for have set the second game condition as a gaming state of the gaming machine, when the result of the lottery is either lottery result of the fourth and fifth by the selecting means, wherein a game state maintaining means for maintaining a gaming state of the gaming machine, when the result of the lottery performed by the lottery unit becomes the third lottery result, the lottery result storage means for storing at least that effect before Symbol lottery If the result of the lottery by means became one of the first and second lottery result, according to the contents of the lottery result storage means, mode switching means for switching a mode to be selected in the manner selecting means And counting means for counting the number of times of drawing by the drawing means after the drawing result of the drawing means becomes the fourth drawing result among the drawing made in the drawing means, and the drawing The result storage means stores information based on the number counted by the counting means, and the mode switching means is configured to select the first or the second result of the lottery by the lottery means in the second gaming state. When one of the lottery results of 2 is reached, if the number counted by the counting means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, switching is made such that the special mode is selected in the mode selecting means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the display means for displaying the identification information, the lottery means for performing the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition, and the dynamic display of the identification information according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means An aspect selection means for selecting an aspect of an effect including an aspect, and an effect control means for performing control so that an effect of the aspect selected by the aspect selection means is executed, wherein at least a first lottery result of the lottery means The fifth to fifth different lottery results are provided, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where the game medium is difficult to enter is selected. The first opening control means for opening for the first period, and the entrance is shorter than the first period if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results. Open period The opening control means, the entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and the game is played at the entrance In the case where the medium has entered, the game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to the player, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results. First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery by the lottery means The second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state if the result of the second lottery is Said play The second gaming state setting means set as the gaming state of the machine, and when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results, the game maintaining the gaming state of the gaming machine The state maintaining means, the lottery result storage means for storing at least that effect when the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and the second Among the lottery performed in the lottery means, a mode switching means for switching the mode selected in the mode selection means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means when any of the 2 lottery results is obtained, The counting means for counting the number of times of the drawing by the drawing means after the drawing result by the drawing means becomes the fourth drawing result, the drawing result storing means comprises the counting means Information is stored based on the number of times counted by the means, and the mode switching means is configured such that the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the second gaming state is either the first or second lottery result If the number of times counted by the counting means is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the special mode is selected in the mode selecting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the model which showed typically the structure of various counters and various holding ball storage areas. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot classification table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special symbol small hitting random number table. (C) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the random number table per symbol normally. It is a schematic diagram showing composition of a game state flag typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of a special symbol lottery result storage area. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the presentation pattern table typically. It is a table showing an example of the contents of the Janken effect. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect end determination table, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect restart decision table. (C) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the continuous notice determination table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the presentation performed when the random selection | lottery result of a special symbol is hit or is a small hit. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the presentation performed when the random selection | lottery result of a special symbol turns into a probability variation big hit or a regular big hit after specific presentation is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the specific presentation control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the vibration sensor input monitoring process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous notice determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special production setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation pattern command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the stop classification command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows fanfare command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows round number command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the back surface image change command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the error command processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the warning image setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart which shows the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart which shows the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the normal image transmission setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in case the fluctuation display is performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special performance setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed the structure of the lottery result log | history storage area typically. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen of the fluctuation display performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81. FIG.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage" → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In addition, in FIG. 2, in order to make the reference numerals easy to understand, parts such as nails and metal fittings are removed and illustrated.

  The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A variable display unit 80, which will be described later, is disposed in the central portion of the game area, and below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed. . When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is made by the main controller 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. The first ball entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  On the left and right of the variable display unit 80, one second entrance port 67 through which a ball can pass is provided. When the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is made by the control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the second symbol display device 83. In addition, since the second ball entrance 67 is not a winning opening, even if the ball passes, the payout of the winning balls is not performed.

  In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, when it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the big hit The determination of the type is also performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is not determined, it is determined whether the special symbol is a small hit or not.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit or not. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, once for 0.2 seconds or twice for 1 second), The ball enters the ball entry port 64 easily. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, as a big hit classification of the special symbol, 3 types of “15 R definite variation big hit of special symbol”, “15 R usually big hit of special symbol” and “crash hit of special symbol” are provided, and each big hit A game value (game value) is given to the player according to the type.

  "The special pattern of 15R probability variation big hit" is when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the 15 round jackpot (first special gaming state) and the first special gaming state is over, the gaming of the pachinko machine 10 It is a jackpot that the state shifts to the “special symbol high probability state”. "The special symbol 15R normal jackpot" is when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the 15 round jackpot (first special gaming state) and the first special gaming state ends, the gaming of the pachinko machine 10 As the state shifts to the "special symbol low probability state", the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) is a jackpot that becomes the "normal symbol time reduction state" described later. The details of the first special gaming state will be described later.

  In addition, when "the special symbol hit" is transferred to a hit (second special game state) different from the 15 round big hit (first special game state) described above, and the second special game state is ended. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the transition to "high probability state of special symbol". The details of the second special gaming state will also be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the period in which the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is very short compared to the period in which the first special gaming state is in effect. For this reason, the "special symbol hit" has a smaller game value (game value) to be given to the player than "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" and "the special symbol 15R regular jackpot".

  In addition, "the small hit of the special symbol" is not the big hit of the special symbol, but is the hit provided separately with it, and when it becomes the "small hit of the special symbol", the second special game mentioned above Although the state is shifted, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change (is maintained) even when the second special gaming state is ended. In addition, "the removal of the special symbol" indicates that any of the jackpots, did not hit any, "if the special symbol is out", the first special gaming state or the above-mentioned The second special gaming state is not established, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not changed (maintained). In the present embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is performed, effects according to the lottery result are displayed in the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device (speaker etc. not shown) 226, etc. And the lamp display device 227 or the like. Details of this effect will be described later.

  Here, "the high probability state of special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, so-called "a definite variation state of the special symbol (in the definite variation of the special symbol)", in other words, the jackpot of 15 rounds It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to (the first special game state). In the present embodiment, in the case of "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" and "crash hit of special symbol", transition is made to "high probability state of special symbol", but in the case of "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" Further, the probability of hitting the symbol normally increases, and the game becomes easy to enter the ball into the first entrance 64 into the game state ("time symbol state of the normal symbol" described later). On the other hand, in the case of "a special symbol hit", it only shifts to "a special symbol high probability state".

  Hereinafter, the "special symbol high probability state" transitioning to the "special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" is referred to as "special symbol high probability state A", and becomes the "special symbol prominence hit". The "special symbol high probability state" to be transferred is referred to as "special symbol high probability state B". And when showing both "the high probability state A of a special symbol" and "the high probability state B of a special symbol", it simply describes as "the high probability state of a special symbol".

  On the other hand, when it is not "high probability state of special symbol" is called "low probability state of special symbol", it is a state where jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of special symbol, that is, jackpot probability of special symbol is normal It is a state (normal state of special symbol). In addition, while the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot of the special symbol, although the drawing of the special symbol is not performed, the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “special symbol low probability state”.

  Also, "time symbol of normal symbol" (during the short hours of symbol) is a gaming condition in which the ball is likely to enter the first ball entry port 64 with an increased probability of hitting the symbol normally. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of the normal pattern" is called "normal state of the normal pattern", this is the probability that the hitting probability of the normal pattern is normal, that is, the hitting probability of the normal pattern Is a low condition. In addition, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed regardless of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 described later, and mainly displays the lottery result of the special symbol. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and can display the lottery result of a special symbol with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color. In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (a special symbol of 15R probability variation big hit, special symbol The special symbol (the first symbol) according to the 15R normal jackpot of the, the hit of the special symbol) is shown. Also, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit of the special symbol, it is shown that it is a small hit of the special symbol. In addition, the special symbol indicating the collision of the special symbol and the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol are similar to each other, and are configured so that the player can not easily recognize. The reason why the player configures the special symbol to be difficult to recognize easily will be described later.

  As described above, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 83 is changed by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) which is performed along with the passage of the ball through the second ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state As a stop symbol after the end of the change or the display, the normal symbol according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The normal symbol indicating is displayed stopped.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 has a predetermined opening period. (In this embodiment, it is activated (opened) only for 0.2 seconds once or twice for 1 second, and as a result, the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 easily. Is configured. The details of the open period of the motorized role will be described later.

  If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 And the second symbol hold lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. In addition, four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 in left-right symmetry. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting an ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is increased in "during a special symbol oddity" or in "time symbol of an ordinary symbol", but the hitting of an ordinary symbol is Instead of changing the probability, according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state of special symbol" or "low probability state of special symbol", accompanying to the first entrance 64 It may be configured to change the opening time of the motorized part (not shown) or the number of times of opening of the motorized part associated with one hit of the ordinary symbol.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later. Although details will be described later, for example, a predetermined back image is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the left, middle, and right 3 are displayed on the front of the back image One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed in the main control device 110, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol or 15R normal jackpot of special symbol", the predetermined time (variation time) ) Turns on the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 to become a stop symbol indicating the big hit type of the special symbol, and the third symbol stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type of the special symbol is the third symbol It is displayed on the display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot (first special game state) of which the maximum number of rounds is 15 is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a jackpot (first special gaming state) in which a large amount of award balls are paid out from the normal time. In the first special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, has a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "10 balls are won to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a" and " It is released until one of the conditions of “30 seconds after opening is satisfied”.

  Then, the specified winning opening 65a has a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, one of the conditions "10 balls are won for the ball to the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a" and "30 seconds after opening") When it passes, it is closed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined opening period. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a small symbol of a special symbol or a small symbol of a special symbol”, a predetermined symbol (variation time) has passed and then a special symbol of a certain hit or a small hit The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a stop symbol indicating the stop symbol of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state described above. In the second special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds have elapsed from opening").

  Then, the specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, until "0.2 seconds from opening" elapses), and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is again determined. Opening period is open. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated 15 times. However, in this case, since the opening time of the specific winning hole 65a is short, it is difficult for the ball to get to the specific winning hole 65a as in the normal time.

  Hereinafter, the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol or 15R normal big hit of special symbol" (ie, specific winning opening 65a in the first special gaming state Is referred to as "the first opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a". In addition, the opening and closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a collision of a special symbol or a small hitting of the special symbol" (ie opening and closing of the specified winning opening 65a in the second special gaming state The operation) is referred to as "the second opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a".

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the second entry hole 67, the main controller 110 draws the normal symbol (the second symbol) and when the normal symbol is hit, the predetermined time (variation is made After the elapse of time), a stop symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “o”) indicating the normal symbol hit is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Then, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined open period, and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball entrance 64. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the opening time of the electric character is different depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "time saving state of the normal symbol" or "normal state of the normal symbol". There is. Specifically, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the time saving state of the normal symbol", when the normal symbol comes into contact, the electric role item attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened twice in a row, It is opened for 1 second each time. On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "normal state of the ordinary symbol", when the symbol comes in contact with the ordinary symbol, the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball entrance 64 is opened only once for 0.2 seconds. . Therefore, in the case of the “normal symbol time reduction state”, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 more easily than the “normal symbol normal state”. Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and it becomes easy to carry out the lottery of the special symbol.

  Further, as described above, below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed the first entry port 64 where the ball can enter the ball, and when the first entry port 64, the ball enters the ball. Five balls are also one of the winning openings that are paid out as winning balls. Therefore, when the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is increased by becoming a time saving state of a normal symbol, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases accordingly, and as a result, even if playing a game, the balls are reduced It will be in a difficult state or in a state where balls are not reduced. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the player can obtain an expectation that a jackpot can be obtained in a state in which the balls are difficult to reduce or in a state in which the balls are not reduced. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  However, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "time saving state of the normal symbol", even if the period of the above-mentioned 15 rounds of jackpots (first special gaming state) becomes hitting of the normal symbol, the first entering ball The motorized accessory associated with the mouth 64 is opened for 0.2 seconds only once. This is because during the 15 rounds of jackpots (during the first special game state), the player hits a ball in an attempt to make a prize in the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first ball entrance 64 is released. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  Hereinafter, except for the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state, the opening and closing operation of the electric character when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "time symbol of the normal symbol" and hits the normal symbol , "The first opening and closing operation of the motorized role". In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state, or when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the normal state of the ordinary symbol", the opening / closing operation of the electrically operated combination when the ordinary symbol is hit, It is referred to as "the second opening / closing operation of the motorized role".

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. In the lower left and right corners of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is It can be viewed through the small windows 35 (see FIG. 1) of the frame 14.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same main symbol is used when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is “15R probability variation jackpot, 15 normal jackpot”. A variation display in which the symbols are aligned is performed, and after the variation display is finished, a jackpot (first special game state) of 15 rounds is generated. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the variable display in which the main symbol to which the odd number "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" is added is aligned and stopped is displayed To be done. Further, in the case of "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are displayed in a uniform stop.

  In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", a continuous notice that indicates that the possibility of becoming a big hit of the special symbol is high (notice) An effect may be performed, and in that case, when the variable display is performed, a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, a combination of main symbols on the effective line L1 sequentially from the left symbol row Z1 “3” “ The so-called "chance", which is 4 "or" 1 ", is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", the stop display is given by a combination of predetermined main symbols (e.g. Variable display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  In the main display area Dm, a rear image is displayed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the lottery result of the special symbol. In this embodiment, as a back image type, “a back image for a high probability of a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as“ a back image for a high probability ”)” and “a back image for a short time of a normal symbol ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “rear image for short time”, “rear image for special effect”, and “rear image for low probability of special symbol (hereinafter“ rear image for low probability ”) And at least one of the three types of back images is set as the back image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The “Rear image for high probability” is a rear image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “special symbol high probability state A”, and the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot” Thereafter, when the above-described 15 rounds of jackpot (first special game state) is ended, the main display area Dm is displayed. In addition, “the rear view image for the time saving” is a rear view image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “the time saving state of the normal symbol” and “the low probability state of the special symbol”. When the lottery result of the symbol becomes “15R normal jackpot” and thereafter, the above-mentioned 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is ended, it is displayed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, "the back image for special effect" is a back image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state B of the special symbol", the special symbol If the lottery result of "is a special symbol or a special symbol small hit" and then the second special game state described above is ended (when the specific effect described later is ended), the main display It is displayed in the area Dm.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" in the state that the "rear image for special effect" is displayed in the main display area Dm. When the variable display corresponding to the "deletion of the special symbol" is finished, the "rear image for special effect" displayed in the main display area Dm is "low probability of the special symbol" with a predetermined probability. It is switched (changed) to "Rear Image for Hour". However, for the case where the back image displayed in the main display area Dm is switched from "back image for special effect" to "back image for special symbol low probability time", thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol When the variable display corresponding to the "deletion of the special symbol" is finished by changing the "special symbol out", it is returned to the "rear image for special effect" with a predetermined probability.

  The “rear image for low probability” is a rear image showing that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not the “normal symbol short time state” but the “special symbol low probability state”. A pachinko machine is used for the case where the back image is switched to the "back image for special symbol low probability" while the "back image for special effect" is displayed in the main display area Dm. It becomes a back image which shows that 10 game states are "the low probability state of a special symbol, or the high probability state B of a special symbol".

  Further, the main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, the main display area Dm is superimposed on the front of a predetermined rear image ), Three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Further, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-described variable display and stop display of the third symbol, decorative display is performed along with the display of the first symbol display device 37. Although details will be described later, for example, a display (big hit effect) indicating that a jackpot of 15 rounds (first special game state) is in progress, and a second special game state different from the first special game state Is displayed (specific effect). Incidentally, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result of the special symbol has become “a sudden hit of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol”.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol or a small symbol of a special symbol", a display different from normal (special effect) is made, and then, in the main display area Dm, " "Back image for special effects" is displayed. In the special effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be "the high probability state B of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be advantageous to the player. It is an effect for notifying a player that there is a

  Also, for example, when variable display and stop display, or various effects are performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, the lamp display device 227, etc. operate according to the display or various effects. The lamp lights and flashes, and audio output is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the voice lamp control device is used for complex processing such as determination of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 so that the main control device 110 can concentrate on main control regarding the game such as lottery of special symbols. A sub control device such as the display control device 114 or the display control device 114 is configured to perform. When instructing the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, the main control device 110 transmits various commands from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device. The various commands are transmitted by the data transmission / reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit only in one direction.

  In the main control unit 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of normal symbols, setting of display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of display of the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display of the third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 6) for storing various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, setting of display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of display of the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display of the third symbol display device 81 Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 32) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas). Stores the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 according to the timing of entering the first entrance 64, respectively. Ru. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail below. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and then reached 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 32).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number to be the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is by the special symbol big hit random number table 202a If it matches with the set value of the random number that will be the jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. Also, this special symbol big hit random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state time period) of special symbol and high probability of high probability of becoming special symbol big win from that low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a high probability state, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random value "7, 307, 582" is the special symbol for low probability The jackpot random number table 202a is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of jackpots is 3, so the probability of being a special symbol is "1/300".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of special symbol, there are 30 random value which becomes a jackpot of special symbol, and the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are special symbol jackpot random number tables for high probability times It is stored in 202a. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 900, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/30".

  In the present embodiment, the winning value stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time and the winning value stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability time are overlapped. Each winning value is set so as not to be a value. Here, regardless of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, if there is always a random value used as a winning value, the random value will be easily predicted from the outside, so an illegal input will be made from the outside, and a large hit will be made illegally. It may be easier to On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the gaming situation of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol) By changing the random number value, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number that is the jackpot of the special symbol, so it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type (stop type at the time of jackpot) when it becomes a jackpot of the special symbol. Specifically, the determination of the jackpot type is the determination of the type of stop at the time of jackpot. First hit type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 119), and after reaching a maximum value (for example, 119 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 119), 0 It is configured to return to. That is, the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Thereafter, when the drawing of the special symbol is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the value of the first random number counter C1 is the big hit of the special symbol If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the same timing as the value of the first random number counter C1 is the specific display mode at the time of the big hit It becomes an aspect.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number for the big win of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number for which the special symbol goes out, the special one based on the value of the first random number counter C1 A drawing of the small hit of the symbol is performed. And, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number which is a small hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a small hit of the special symbol It becomes a thing. In addition, about the small hit of a special symbol, since there is no hit classification, the display mode becomes always the same. In addition, since there is no hit type, there is only one stop type at the time of small hit, which is uniquely determined.

  Then, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is neither a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol nor a random number to be a small hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol of out-of-order, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  As described above, the value of the first collision type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 119. The random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table 202b, and this table is the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 It is provided inside.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 39” in the first counter type counter C2 is “the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” It becomes. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "40-59" will be "hump of special symbol", the jackpot type when the value is "60-119", "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol It becomes ". Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, according to the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2, three types of jackpot types (special pattern 15R probability variation big hit, special symbol exact hit, special symbol 15R normal The jackpot is configured to be determined. Specifically, the determination of the jackpot type is the determination of the type of stop at the time of jackpot.

  And while the total number of random numbers is 120, since the total number of random numbers that will be "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" is 40, it will be "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" when it becomes the special symbol jackpot The probability is "1/3". Similarly, since the total number of random numbers that will be "a special symbol's sudden hit" is 20, when it becomes a big hit of a special symbol, the probability of "a special symbol's sudden hit" becomes "1/6", " Since the total number of random numbers for the special symbol 15R usually hits is 60, the probability of becoming the special symbol 15R usually hit is 1/2.

  As described above, at the low probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming the jackpot of the special symbol is "1/300". Therefore, at the low probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming a "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" becomes "2/1800", and the probability of becoming a "special symbol of sudden hit" becomes "1/1800", of the "special symbol of The probability of becoming “15R normal jackpot” is “3/1800”. On the other hand, at the time of the high probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/30". Therefore, at the high probability of the special symbol, the probability of becoming "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" becomes "2/180", the probability of becoming "the sudden symbol of special symbol" becomes "1/180", of "special symbol of The probability of becoming “15R normal jackpot” is “3/180”.

  Moreover, the random number value for determining the small hitting of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is set by the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c, and this table is the main control device It is provided in the ROM 202 of 110. In the present embodiment, the probability of becoming "a small hit of a special symbol" does not change (is constant) regardless of whether it is a low probability of a special symbol or a high probability of a special symbol.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the first random number counter C1, four random number values “0 to 3” are provided to be “a small hit of a special symbol”. Since the total number of random numbers for the first random number counter C1 is 900, the total number of random numbers for the "special symbol small hit" is 4, so the probability for the special symbol to be a small hit is "8/1800" Become.

  As mentioned above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the probability of becoming a "special symbol's hit" is "1/1800" and the probability of being a "special symbol's small hit" is always "8/1800." . Therefore, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the probability that it will be "a hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol" is "9/1800". On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, the probability of being "a sudden hit of a special symbol" is "1/180", and the probability of being a small hit of the special symbol is always "8/1800". Therefore, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the probability of becoming a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol small hit" is "18/1800".

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64.

  In this embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop symbol is 1 before and after the reach symbol. "Outside back and forth out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) which stops by shifting by one, and "reach out of back and forth out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected:) and "completely out of reach" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and according to the table, the range of the random number value for each stop classification of the special symbol out Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 32). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entry ball slot 64.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 uses so-called short separation (5 seconds), long separation (11 seconds), normal reach (20 seconds), and super reach (90 seconds) by the variation type counter CS1 and the special symbol variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. Determine variation patterns such as sec) and special reach (120 sec). Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the reach type or the fine symbol of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Determine the variation mode.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the special symbol variation pattern table 202d, a special symbol variation pattern table 202d used when a special symbol is hit and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d used when the special symbol is detached are prepared. In addition, depending on whether it is the time shortening state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol excluding the time shortening state of the normal symbol as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d for the removal of the special symbol. A special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (certain variation) of the special symbol and a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (usually) of the special symbol are prepared.

  When the jackpot lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1, if the lottery result is "jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)", the special for the jackpot Based on the pattern variation pattern table 202d and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a at the same timing as the first random number counter C1, the variation pattern at the time of big hit of the special symbol is determined Be done. On the other hand, if the lottery result is "a special symbol's collision or a small symbol or a special symbol's detachment", a special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of a special symbol and its first random number counter Based on the same timing as C1 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the variation pattern at the time of removal of the special symbol is determined.

  For example, as a variation pattern at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol, there are various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of special reach. In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d for the jackpot, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is various normal reach 0 to 10, super reach various 11 to 99, special reach various 100 to 198 It has become. The Norlech variety is a reach where the fluctuation time is short, and after the short reach, the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (so-called, the symbol is aligned with a stop at the bitter end). This is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching a variation time longer than normal reach (for example, reach extending from long reach or normal reach), and various special reach variations are longer than super reach. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the time reach (for example, a reach that develops further after a super reach or a special reach where a destination from a normal reach differs from a super reach).

  Since the variation pattern for the jackpot is selected in the case of “the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)”, various special reach are selected to give the player a sense of expectation It is easier. However, by configuring so that various types of normal reach and various types of super reach are selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  In addition, "reach various" means that there are many things that effect contents differ also in each reach, for example, in the super reach, the reach which changes the back image rapidly and is displayed, and a certain character There is a reach to be displayed suddenly, etc. In addition to that, there are multiple reach with different effects, such as the one to which a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, and the one to which a jackpot effect by re-change is added.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit of the special symbol is determined using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, it may be determined by another fluctuation type counter whether or not to add a notice effect for giving notice of the start of a jackpot or reach effect before the start of a change or during a change effect, or when reach is established, The number of first symbols (or third symbols) to be stopped may be determined by shifting the number of symbols and stopping (for example, one symbol offset or the like).

  Also, for example, as a variation pattern at the time of removal of the special symbol, there are various types such as short, long, various normal reach, and various super reach. In addition, for example, there are various types of normal reach and various types of super reach as a variation pattern at the time of striking of a special symbol and a variation pattern at the time of small hitting of a special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of the special symbol (normal) is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" in the case of the low probability state of the special symbol except for the time shortening state of the normal symbol. Ru. In addition, regardless of the time saving state of the normal symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol, etc., it is referred that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a special symbol hitting a special hit" or "a small symbol hitting a special symbol".

  Special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) is a complete removal only that is referred to when the complete removal is determined as the type of stop at the special symbol removal, and a reach other than the front and back out of reach and back and forth out of reach Is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type of the special symbol at the time of reach common referred to when the is determined, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each of the divided groups Are associated.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “a special symbol of collision” or “a small symbol of a special symbol”, ie, when a collision is determined as a stop type at the time of big hit, or For the case where the stop type at the time of small hit is determined, a reach common group (group) is selected from the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for removal (ordinary) of the special symbol.

  For complete dedication only, there are short deviances in which the fluctuation ends in a short time and reach does not hold, and long deductions that cause a longer fluctuation time than the short declination, but with a value of fluctuation type counter CS1. As for the correspondence, the short gap is 0 to 148, and the long gap is 149 to 198. In addition, common reach includes various out-of-reach normal reach types in which the reach is established but the variation time is short, and out-of-range super reach types in which the variation time is longer than the various normal reach types. The various types of normal reach are 0 to 148, and the various types of super reach are 149 to 198.

  Also, when the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probable variation) is a normal symbol time reduction state or a special symbol high probability state, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" Referenced. For the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (probable variation), complete removal is determined as the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol, similarly to the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol removal (normal) If there is a special symbol deviating stop type at the time of deviating from special symbol, it is divided into groups (groups) with complete deviating only when referred to and with reach common which is referenced when reaching before and after out of reach and before or after out of reach The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  The correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the complete deviation exclusive use is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, as for the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in common reach, various out-of-normal reach types are 0 to 148, and out-of-range super reach types are 149 to 198.

  The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of this special symbol (probability variation) is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation. Is easy to enter the ball. Therefore, when a long run is frequently performed when the time saving state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is performed, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, giving the player a waiting state, and the game May cause discomfort to people. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, when it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol, it is configured to be easy to select the short gap than in other cases, and by performing the start of the next variable display early, the game Can reduce the possibility of giving discomfort to people. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  In addition, although the variation pattern at the time of the special symbol's deviation is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice, etc.) good. In addition, the selection of the special symbol outclassification type is configured to be divided into the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol detachment (usually) and the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for special symbol detachment (probable variation) However, even if the special symbol is in a low probability state, if there are a plurality of holding balls (for example, three or more in the case of the maximum of four), the variation display may be ended early, so the special symbol may be removed. It may be selected by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for (certain variation), or it may be configured to prepare the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of holding balls. good.

  Furthermore, in the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of each special symbol mentioned above, the short deviation and the long deviation are simply regarded as the deviation, and when the deviation is selected, the short deviation and the length are referred to other tables. It may be configured to select out-of-space with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  Although the details will be described later, in the main controller 110, when the fluctuation pattern is determined based on each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern type is controlled from the main controller 110 by the audio lamp It is sent to the device 113. Also, when the lottery result is determined based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, the stop type command indicating the lottery result is the main control device The signal is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113 from 110. As described above, the fluctuation pattern type indicates the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation. In the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are received, the third symbol display is synchronized with the fluctuation display and the stop display of the first symbol display device 37. Third symbol display device 81 is controlled such that variable display and stop display of the third symbol are performed by device 81.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol random number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary random number table 202e. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the hit which is set by, it is judged as the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table 202e is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol), and high probability (normal symbol) with high probability of becoming a hit of normal symbol from the time of low probability Are divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the one for the high probability state of the special symbol, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers corresponding to the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table 202e for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 24, so the probability that the symbol is normally hit is “1/10”.

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table 202e for high probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be hit is 200. Therefore, the probability that the symbol is normally hit is "1 / 1.2".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “○” is displayed as lit), and the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × two times”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, attached to the first ball entrance 64 Since the release period of the motorized role is very long, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entry port 64 is only "one second x 2 times". Although it is open, the open time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, the motorized prize attached to the first ball entrance 64 may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 26).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 32), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further has at least a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a gaming state flag 203e. ing.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entry slot 64, and the acquired data includes four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas of the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is an execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as drawing of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the passage of the ball is stored while the order in which the balls pass is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  It should be noted that when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes empty, so similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the winning combinations stored in the other holding areas A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. Also, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the data corresponding to the passage of the ball is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. The values are added (see S204 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S404 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S205 of FIG. 24). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol storage ball number counter 203 c is incremented by one. You can get the value of the ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entry hole 67 It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S604 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 29).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S603 in FIG. 28: No).

  The gaming state flag 203 e is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the gaming state flag 203e will be described. FIG. 8 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the gaming state flag. The gaming state flag 203e is configured by one byte (8 bits), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by the lower 3 bits (bit 0 to bit 2). The other bits (bits 3 to 7) are not used.

  And as shown in FIG. 8, when lower 3 bits are "000", it shows that it is "low probability state of special symbol", and when lower 3 bits are "010", "high probability state of special symbol" It shows that it is "A", and when lower 3 bits are "100", it shows that it is "high probability state B of a special symbol". That is, when the lower 3 bits are "010", as a result of becoming "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol", it becomes "high probability state A of special symbol", and further, time saving state of regular symbol (hit probability is up Indicates that it is). In addition, when the lower 3 bits are “100”, as a result of becoming “the special symbol's collision probability”, it becomes “the special symbol high probability state B”, and the normal symbol's collision probability is in the normal state Show.

  This gaming state flag 203e refers to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability time or the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time when performing the lottery of special symbols Used by the MPU 201 to make decisions.

  Specifically, when the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "000", if the lottery of the special symbol is performed, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time is referred to, and the big hit lottery is made. To be done. On the other hand, when the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "010" or "100", if a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is referred to, and the big hit lottery Is done. Although details will be described later, reference is also made to the case of prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol lottery.

  In this gaming state flag 203e, all bits are set to "0" by the initial setting process (see S914 of FIG. 31) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. When the jackpot is started in the pachinko machine 10, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to "000" (see S414 in FIG. 26). Then, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed and the lottery result is "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol", when the jackpot is finished, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to "010" ((0) See S1113 in FIG. Also, when a special symbol lottery is performed, and the lottery result is “15R normal jackpot of a special symbol”, when the jackpot is over, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “000”. (See S1114 in FIG. 33).

  Further, when a special symbol lottery is performed, and the lottery result is “a special symbol hit”, the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e are set to “100” when the specific effect is finished. (See S1208 in FIG. 34). In addition, when the lottery of the special symbol is done, when the lottery result is “the special symbol is out”, the lower 3 bits of the game state flag 203e are not changed.

  In the present embodiment, when a special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery result is "15R of the special symbol usually hit", the state of the gaming state flag 203e is "000" when the big hit is over. Is set to (see S1114 in FIG. 33), but since the lower 3 bits are set to "000" at the start of the jackpot, the game state flag 203e is not set when the jackpot ends. It may be configured to (do nothing).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  Next, the prefetching of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery performed in main controller 110 and the prefetching command transmitted from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113 when the prefetching is performed will be described. . In the present embodiment, as the ball wins (start winning) to the first entrance 64 and each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is obtained according to the starting winning, the big hit of the original special symbol Apart from the lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3 and CS1. As described above, before the drawing of the original special symbol is performed, various kinds of information obtained when the original drawing is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning combination. The prediction of the information will be described later, when the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  If the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted, first, one of the two types of special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 5), one table to be used for prediction is determined, and thereafter, the special symbol is selected. As in the case of the lottery, when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the one table 202a used for the prediction (hit value), and any of the values match. It is predicted (judged) that the lottery result is a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, when predicting the lottery result of the special symbol, if the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "000", the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability is used to predict success or failure. Be done. On the other hand, if the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 203e is "010" or "100", the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is used to predict the success or failure.

  And the success or failure of the lottery result of the special symbol is predicted, and as a result, if the jackpot is predicted, the jackpot type is further predicted. When the jackpot type is predicted, as in the case of the special symbol lottery, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 and the random number stored in the special symbol jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 5) The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first collision type counter C2 is determined (predicted). On the other hand, if it is predicted that the lottery result of the special symbol is a drop of the special symbol, then it is predicted whether it is a small hit of the special symbol.

  When it is predicted whether or not the special symbol is small, it is stored in the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol small hit random number table 202c, as in the case of the special symbol lottery. The value is compared with the value of the random number (hit value). And if it is predicted that the lottery result of the special symbol is not a small hit of the special symbol, then the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol is predicted. Even when the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol is predicted, the value of the acquired stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop type selection table (not shown) are stored as in the case of the big hit lottery of the special symbol. The value of the selected random number is compared and the type of stop corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined (predicted).

  Also, even when the variation pattern type is predicted, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is compared with the value of the random number stored in the special symbol variation pattern table 202d, as in the case of the jackpot lottery The fluctuation pattern type corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined (predicted).

  Then, when the read ahead is executed in main controller 110 and the yes / no and its type and the variation pattern type are predicted, the read ahead command including the prediction result etc. is sent from main controller 110 to voice lamp control device 113. Be notified. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect with respect to the series of fluctuation effects pending at that time. Then, when it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed, setting of an aspect of the continuous advance notice effect is also performed.

  Here, the continuous advance notice effect will be described. The continuous advance notice effect is a type of advance notice effect that suggests (notices) that the lottery result of the special symbol to be performed along with the winning (opening start winning) to the first entrance 64 is high probability of being a big hit, Over all (or a part) of the fluctuation effects held at the time of winning, an opportunity is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the fluctuation effect. If this continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the pending variable effects, the player is expected to feel a big hit after all the pending changed effects are finished. It can be held against.

  In the present embodiment, when performing continuous advance presentation effects over all (or a part) of the change effects held at the time of winning, the chances are displayed in each of the change effects, but in each change effect The same character or characters related to the same character may be displayed. In addition, the number of the same character or the number of characters related to the same character may be displayed so as to be increased each time the variation effects are performed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that a change effect different from the normal one has been performed, and therefore can recognize that a continuous advance notice effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation to be a big hit after all the suspended change effects are finished.

  In the present embodiment, when execution of continuous advance notice effects is set for the pending change effects, the chance symbol (for example, a figure as a stop symbol when the change effects are finished in the third symbol display device 81) On the effective line L1 shown in 4, “3”, “4” and “1”) are displayed in order of the combination of main symbols from the left symbol row Z1. Then, among the series of fluctuation effects for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, for the last fluctuation effect, the display of the chance eye is not performed as the stop symbol, and the original stop symbol is displayed as it is.

  In general, the player pays attention to the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to play a game, so by displaying the chance eyes continuously as a stop symbol appearing after stopping the fluctuation effect. The player can easily recognize that the continuous advance presentation effect has been performed. In addition, even if the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, thereby providing the player with an expectation that the jackpot will be a jackpot after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can have it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins the start winning combination, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection obtained according to the start winning combination are selected. From each value of the counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern type) obtained by lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is predicted (estimated). Then, various information predicted is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a pre-read command.

  Although the details will be described later, when the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the pre-reading command, the various information notified by the pre-reading command (estimated result of special symbol, predicted result of stop type, fluctuation pattern type Based on the prediction result), the information stored in the RAM 223a, and the like, the determination of the start of the continuous advance notice effect and the setting of the mode of the continuous advance notice effect are performed. As described above, in main controller 110, various information obtained by lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning from the respective counter values acquired according to the start winning is selected (appropriate of special symbol, stop type, variation pattern type Do you start processing to predict (estimate) mainly, and start continuous notice effect based on the various information (the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure, the prediction result of the stop type, the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type)? The voice lamp control device 113 performs complex processing such as processing for determining whether or not it is not. Thereby, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing for drawing the gaming state to be transitioned based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 64, which is the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10 On the other hand, if the MPU 221 with high processing capability is used as the sound lamp control device 113, it is possible to set the execution condition of the continuous advance notice effect in various modes.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The payout control device 111 is equipped with an MPU 211 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 211 has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34), (Variation display) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a specific effect, a special effect, and a continuous notice effect.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the voice lamp control device is used for complex processing such as determination of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 so that the main control device 110 can concentrate on main control regarding the game such as lottery of special symbols. The control is made at 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to instruct the display control device 114.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is equipped with an MPU 221 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 221 has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a special effect end determination table 222a, a special effect resumption determination table 222b, an effect pattern table 222c, and a continuous notice determination table 222d. Also, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a game state flag 223c, a change start flag 223d, a special effect in progress flag 223e, Continuous count counter 223f, Small hit after flag 223g, Small hit after count change counter 223h, Special effect lottery counter 223i, Preread information storage area 223j, Continuous notice lottery counter 223k, Continuous notice number counter 223l, A jackpot flag 223 m is at least provided after the advance notice.

  For convenience of explanation, the description of the special effect end determination table 222a of the ROM 222 and the special effect resumption determination table 222b will be made after the special effect lottery counter 223i of the RAM 223 is described. Also, the description of the effect pattern table 222c of the ROM 222 will be made after the explanation of the probability continuous number counter 223f of the RAM 223. The description of the continuous notice determination table 222d of the ROM 222 will be made after the continuous notice lottery counter 223k of the RAM 223 is described.

  The special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is an area in which the stop type of the special symbol notified from the main control device 110 and the variation pattern type are stored. As described above, in the main controller 110, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination), a lottery of a special symbol is performed using it as a trigger, and a stop type command indicating the lottery result of the special symbol And the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the stop type command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command. In addition, as a stop type which shows a lottery result, "15R probability variation big hit", "15R normal big hit", "very accurate hit", "small hit", "completely out of place", "back and forth out of reach", Any one of "reach other than back and forth" is extracted. Also, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern type is extracted. As variation pattern types, "special reach (120 seconds)", "super reach (90 seconds)", "normal reach (20 seconds)", "long out (11 seconds)", "short out (5 seconds) "" Is extracted. The special symbol lottery result storage area 223a stores the stop type extracted from the stop type command and the variation pattern type extracted from the variation pattern command.

  The stop type and fluctuation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a are the display control in the third symbol display device 81, the output control of sound in the sound output device 226, the lighting in the lamp display device 227 It is used to control the turn-off and turn-off (see FIGS. 36, 40 and 41).

  Although details will be described later, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the stop type and the change pattern type are stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, the change effect according to the stop type and the change pattern type is the third Control is performed to be executed in the symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

  In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the variation effect under execution ends, the big hit of 15 rounds in the third symbol display device 81 according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a (first A display (big hit effect) showing that it is in the special gaming state) and a display (specific effect) showing that it is in the second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state in the third symbol display device 81 Control is done as it is.

  Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the jackpot effect under execution ends or the specific effect under execution ends, the third symbol display according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. Control is performed such that the rear view image displayed on the device 81 is changed. As described above, in the present embodiment, “rear image for high probability”, “rear image for short time”, “rear image for special effect”, and “low probability” as the type of rear image Four types of “rear image for time” are provided, and any one type of rear image is set as the rear image of the third symbol display device 81. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is also performed according to the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a even when the variable effect under execution is finished. There is a case where control is performed so that the back image being displayed is changed.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of balls (waiting number) of the change production of the special symbol held in the main control unit 110 up to four times. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display of the special symbol is incremented by 1 by entering the first entrance 64 of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition A pending ball number command indicating a value is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1609 in FIG. 38).

  Further, in the main control unit 110, when the variation display of the special symbol is newly started in the first symbol display device 37, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is subtracted, and further, in the third symbol display device 81. A fluctuation pattern command indicating an aspect of fluctuation display to be started is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 and sets the variation display mode in the third symbol display device 81 in response to the reception, the special symbol holding ball number counter of the RAM 233 The value of 223b is decremented by 1 (see S1823 in FIG. 40).

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 or the variation pattern command. The value can be updated while being synchronized with the symbol holding ball number counter 203c.

  In addition, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-balls symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls for which the variable display of the special symbol is suspended.

  The gaming state flag 223c is a flag indicating the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and is configured in the same manner as the gaming state flag 203e of the main control device 110. That is, the gaming state flag 223c is configured by 1 byte (8 bits), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is indicated by the lower 3 bits (bit 0 to bit 2). The other bits (bits 3 to 7) are not used.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the lower 3 bits are "000", it indicates that the "special symbol low probability state" is present, and when the lower 3 bits are "010", "special symbol" The lower 3 bits are "100" to indicate that it is the "special symbol high probability state B". That is, when the lower 3 bits are "010", as a result of becoming "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol", it becomes "high probability state of special symbol", and further, time saving state of regular symbol (hit probability is up) Indicates that it is In addition, when the lower 3 bits are "100", as a result of becoming "a hit of a special symbol", it becomes "a high probability state of a special symbol" and indicates that the hit probability of a regular symbol is a normal state. .

  In this gaming state flag 223c, all bits are set to "0" by the initial setting process (see S1310 of FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If the "15R probability variation big hit", the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 223c is set to "010" (see S1912 in FIG. 41), if "15R normal big hit", the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 223c Is set to "000" (see S1913 in FIG. 41).

  Further, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is finished, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If is "immediately hit", the lower 3 bits of the gaming state flag 223c is set to "100" (see S1904 in FIG. 41). In the case where the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is "small hit" or "displacement (completely disjoined, completely out, back and forth outreach, reach other than back and forth out) reach", the gaming state flag 223c is not changed .

  Although the details will be described later, the gaming state flag 223c is used to perform display control in the third symbol display device 81, voice output control in the voice output device 226, and control of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device 227. (See FIGS. 36, 40 and 41).

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is a flag indicating whether or not the fluctuation effect should be started in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and is fluctuated when the fluctuation start flag 223d is on. It shows that it is in the state which should start production. On the other hand, in the case of the off state, it indicates that it is not in a state to start the fluctuation production.

  The change start flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command corresponding to the change type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1602 in FIG. 38), and the setting of the change display in the third symbol display device 81 is When it is turned off (see S1802 in FIG. 40). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command. When the fluctuation pattern type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the fluctuation start flag 223d may be set to ON.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The special effect in progress flag 223 e is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. If special effect in progress flag 223e is on, it indicates that the special effect is being executed in third symbol display device 81, voice output device 226, and lamp display device 227, and if special effect in progress flag 223e is off Indicates that the special effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227.

  The special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to off by the initial setting process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is ended, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to ON (FIG. 41) See S1908). Furthermore, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to off (FIG. 41) See S1918). In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to OFF, but it may be set to OFF at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 (that is, the special effect flag 223e). Is on, and further, when the variable effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the special effect being executed is ended (see S1920, S1925, S1926 in FIG. 41). ). Here, when it is determined that the special effect being executed is ended, the special effect in progress flag 223e is set to OFF (see S1918 in FIG. 41), and the special effect is ended.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special effect in progress is ended, if the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the change is Every time the effect ends, it is determined whether or not the special effect that has once ended is resumed (see S1920 to S1924 in FIG. 41). Here, when it is determined that the special effect that has once ended is resumed, the special effect in progress flag 223e is set to ON (see S1908 in FIG. 41), and the special effect is resumed.

  Although the details will be described later, this special effect flag 223e is for performing display control in the third symbol display device 81, audio output control in the audio output device 226, and control of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device 227. (See FIGS. 36, 40 and 41).

  In order to count the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "special symbol hit" in the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" Is a counter. The probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared by the initialization process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is “a sudden hit”, 1 is added to the probability continuous number counter 223f (see S1812 in FIG. 40). ). Further, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared (S1914 in FIG. 41). reference). That is, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "crash of special symbol" is counted by the probability continuous number counter 223f in the period from the previous "big symbol of special symbol" to the current "big character of special symbol". Be done.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  The probability continuous number counter 223 f is used to determine the display mode of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the big hit of the special symbol among the fluctuation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. More specifically, the probability continuous number counter 223f is used in combination with the variation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a described above and the effect pattern table 222c described next.

  Here, the effect pattern table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a), 10 (b) and 11. FIG. 10 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect pattern table 222c used when the special symbol is hit, and FIG. 10 (b) shows the contents of the effect pattern table 222c used when the special symbol is removed. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. Moreover, FIG. 11 is the table | surface which showed an example of the content of "Janken production AE".

  The effect pattern table 222c is a table for determining the display mode of the variable effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and is a table for the jackpot of the special symbol, There are two tables with a special symbol table.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, the game state flag 223c is "special symbol when performing variation effect corresponding to the big hit of the special symbol If “high probability state A or B” is indicated, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the effect pattern table 222 c for the jackpot of the special symbol. Also, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state", if the value of the after-small variation counter 223h described later exceeds 100, or, during the special effect flag 223e is off Also in the case of, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c for the jackpot of the special symbol (see S1808 and S1809 in FIG. 40).

  Further, in the sound lamp control device 113, when the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 execute the fluctuation effect corresponding to the removal of the special symbol, the counter for the number of continuous notices described later If the value of 223l is less than 2, the display mode of the variable effect is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c for removal of the special symbol (see S1818 and S1819 in FIG. 40). In addition, about the case where the change production corresponding to the sudden hit of the special symbol and the change production corresponding to the small hit of the special symbol are executed, the presentation pattern table 222c is not referred to, and the display mode of the change production is a specific effect The corresponding one is determined (see S1816 in FIG. 40).

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), in the effect pattern table 222c for the jackpot of the special symbol and the effect pattern table 222c for the removal of the special symbol, both are notified from the main control device 110 The display mode of the change effect to be executed is defined in association with the change pattern type to be performed and the value of the above-mentioned probability continuous number counter 223f. In the present embodiment, when the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined based on the effect pattern table 222c, the display mode is “no Janken effect”, “Janken effect A”, “Janken effect B”, “Junken effect A” It is determined to be any one of "Janken production C" and "Janken production D". Note that whether or not to execute the "Junken effect E" is determined based on another condition described later.

  “Janken effects A to E” are characters on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 representing the player (your side) (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) and the opponent who is the opponent. The character and the character are displayed, and the Janken game between the characters is started, and the final determination is made. In "Junken Effects A to C", whether or not the character representing the player (own side) wins or loses to Janken is determined according to the lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)", the character representing the player (your side) wins Janken and the lottery of the special symbol If the result is "deletion of a special symbol", "a small hit of a special symbol", or "a sudden hit of a special symbol", the character representing the player (self side) loses to Janken. On the other hand, "Junken Effects D to E" is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", and the character representing the player (self side) always wins over the character on the other side.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in "Junken Effects A to E", after the fluctuation effects corresponding to "Normal reach (20 seconds)" are executed, they develop into "Super reach" or "Special reach", After that, an effect is performed that the character representing the player (the player's side) issues Janken. Then, in "Janken production A", the character representing the player (own side) produces "goo", and similarly, "Janken production B" produces "Joki" and "Janken production C" with "par" put out.

  Also, in "Junken Production D", "Almighty (Gucho Kipa)" is released. The almighty means a hand that always wins against the opponent character regardless of the hand of the opponent character. Further, in "Junken effect E", the character representing the player (own side) issues "goo", while the character on the other side produces "par". Then, although the player loses to Janken, the character representing the player (self side) punches the character on the other side while remaining "GOO" and wins.

  In addition, when "Junken effects A to E" is executed, it is decided according to the variation pattern type notified from main controller 110 whether to develop into "super reach" or "special reach". Be done. This is common to each Janken rendition A to E, and if "Super reach (90 seconds)" is notified as the variation pattern type, it will develop into "Super reach" after "Normal reach (20 seconds)" Do. On the other hand, if "special reach (120 seconds)" is notified as the fluctuation pattern type, it will develop into "special reach" after "normal reach (20 seconds)".

  Moreover, in "no Janken effect", the above-mentioned "Janken effects A to E" are not performed, and normal fluctuation effects (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) are performed. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is "normal reach (20 seconds)", the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is determined as "no Janken effect". Because the fluctuation time is only 20 seconds, it is because a sufficient effect can not be performed. However, even when the variation pattern type is “normal reach”, “Junken effect” having a short effect time may be separately provided and executed.

  Here, the description returns to the effect pattern table 222c. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the effect pattern table 222c for the big hit of the special symbol, for example, when the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is "normal reach (20 seconds)", the probability continuous number counter Regardless of the value of 223f, the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is defined as "no Janken effect".

  In addition, when the variation pattern type is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", if the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is It is defined as "Janken production A". Likewise, if the variation pattern type is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display of the variation effect to be performed if the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 1. If the mode is defined as "Janken effect B" and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is defined as "Janken effect C", and the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f is In the case of 3, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is defined as "Junken effect D".

  In addition, in the production pattern table 222c for the jackpot of the special symbol, only the three variation pattern types of “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “super reach (90 seconds)”, and “special reach (120 seconds)” are defined. No other variation pattern type is specified. This is because, in the case of the jackpot of the special symbol, any one of “normal reach”, “super reach” and “special reach” is always selected as the variation pattern type in the main control unit 110 and notified. is there. On the other hand, in the case of special symbol disconnection, the main controller 110 "short out (5 seconds)", "long out (11 seconds)", "normal reach (20 seconds)", and "super reach (90 seconds) "] Is always selected as the variation pattern type and notified.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), in the effect pattern table 222c for removal of the special symbol, for example, the variation pattern type notified from the main control device 110 is "short out (5 seconds)", "long out In the case of (11 seconds) or “normal reach (20 seconds)”, the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is defined as “no Janken effect” regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Further, even when the variation pattern type is "Super reach (90 seconds)", the display mode of the variation effect to be executed is defined as "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The small hit after flag 223g, after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of a special symbol becomes "a 15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or a "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" It is a flag indicating whether or not it is within the period up to.

  The after small hit flag 223g is set to OFF by the initialization setting process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is ended, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a If is the "small hit", the small hit after flag 223g is set to ON (S1905 in FIG. 41). Furthermore, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the small hit after flag 223g is set to off (FIG. 41) See S1915). The small hitting after flag 223g is used by the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h, which will be described next, to count the number of fluctuation effects to be executed within a predetermined period.

  After the small hit variation number counter 223h does not include the case where the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", from then on, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R definite variation jackpot of a special symbol" or " It is a counter for counting the number of fluctuation effects (special symbol lottery) executed within the period until the special symbol 15R usually wins.

  The small hitting post fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared by the initialization processing (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the after small hitting flag 223g is on, 1 is added to the small hitting after change number counter 223h (see S1815 in FIG. 40). ). Also, when the big hit effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the big hit effect is finished, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared (FIG. 41) See S1914).

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect is ended, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  This small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is used in order to decide the indicatory feature of the fluctuation production which corresponds to the big hit of the special design among the fluctuation production which is executed in the 3rd symbol display 81. More specifically, in the state where the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol low probability state", the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and during special effects When the flag 223e is on, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined to be "Junken effect E" (see S1805 to S1810 in FIG. 40).

  In the present embodiment, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state", the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and the special effect When the middle flag 223e is on, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined to be "Junken effect E". On the other hand, even if the special effect flag 223e is off, the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 1 to 100, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state". If it is within the range, the display mode of the change effect to be executed may be determined as "Junken effect E".

  Further, although the details will be described later, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is referred to before it is judged whether or not to resume the special effect once ended. More specifically, when it is determined that the special effect in progress is ended, and the change effect corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is performed after the special effect is temporarily ended, the change after small hit is performed first. The value of the number counter 223h is referred to. Here, if the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is within the range of 1 to 100, it is determined whether or not to resume the special effect once it has ended, and if it is outside the range, the special effect is restarted The determination as to whether or not is skipped. In addition, although the details will be described later, even if the value of the small hitting after fluctuation counter 223h exceeds 100, in the case where the gaming state flag 223c described above indicates the "special symbol high probability state B", It is determined whether to resume the special effect once it has ended.

  The special effect lottery counter 223i is a counter used for the determination of the end of the special effect being executed or the determination of the resumption of the special effect that has once ended. The special effect lottery counter 223i is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. The special effect lottery counter 223i is updated, for example, sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 149, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 149).

  In this embodiment, in the state where the special effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, when the variable effect is executed, the variable effect is ended. , It is controlled so that the special effect under execution ends with a predetermined probability. However, within the period from when the special effect is controlled to the end of the special symbol, when the variable effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the variable effect is ended, It is controlled such that the special effect once ended is resumed with a predetermined probability.

  The value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is compared with the special effect end determination table 222a described below when determining whether or not the special effect in progress is to be ended, and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is It is determined whether it is within a predetermined range in the special effect end determination table 222a. Then, if the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is within a predetermined range, control is performed to end the special effect being executed, otherwise the special effect is continued.

  Here, the details of the special effect end determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect end determination table 222a. The special effect end determination table 222a is a table for determining whether or not the special effect is to be ended when the special effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the special effect end determination table 222a, three random number values for determining the end of the special effect are defined, and the range is “0 to 2”. In addition, the range of the random number value does not change regardless of the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  As described above, the total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which the end of the special effect is determined is three. The probability that the special effect being executed ends is “1/50”.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is compared with the special effect resumption determination table 222b described next, when it is determined whether to resume the special effect that has once ended, and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i Is determined in the special effect resumption determination table 222b. Then, if the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is within a predetermined range, control is performed so that the special effect once ended is resumed, otherwise the special effect is ended.

  Here, the details of the special effect resumption determination table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special effect resumption determination table 222b. The special effect resumption determination table 222b is a table for determining whether or not to resume the special effect once it has ended. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the special effect resumption determination table 222b, five random number values for determining restart of the special effect are defined, and the range is “50 to 54”. The range of the random number does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol.

  As described above, the total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which restart of special effects is determined is five. The probability of resuming a special effect once terminated is "1/30".

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The pre-reading information storage area 223 j is for storing various information (prediction result of special symbol's success or failure, prediction result of stop type, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) notified from the main control device 110 by the above-mentioned pre-reading command It is an area.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223 j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the pre-reading information storage area 223 j. The prefetch information storage area 223 j has five areas: one execution area and four reserve areas (preserve first area to reserve fourth area). In each of these areas, at least a special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 and a variation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 are provided.

  The special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the special symbol and the prediction result of the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 is a fluctuation pattern It is an area for storing information indicating the prediction result of the type. Each area of the pre-read information storage area 223 j is initialized in the process of setting the initial value of the RAM (refer to S 1310 in FIG. 35) executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the prefetch information storage area 223 j is cleared to 0.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command transmitted from the main control device 110, various information from the pre-reading command (prediction result of the special symbol, prediction result of stop type, prediction result of fluctuation pattern type) Are extracted as prefetching information, and the extracted prefetching information is stored in the prefetching information storage area 223 j.

  When the extracted prefetch information is stored in the hold area, the area numbers (first to fourth) of the vacant areas of the four hold areas (first to fourth hold areas) are stored. Data is stored in order from the small area. That is, as the area number decreases, data corresponding to the start winning combination that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data that corresponds to the oldest starting winning combination in time is stored.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it shifts (moves) each data stored in the reserved first area of the prefetch information storage area 223j to the execution area. . Specifically, the data stored in the special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the special symbol lottery prediction result storage area 223j1 of the execution area. Similarly, the data stored in the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 of the reserved first area is shifted to the fluctuation pattern type prediction result storage area 223j2 of the execution area.

  Then, when the shift of data to the execution area is completed, the hold first area becomes empty, so the data stored in the other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is the area number of the area number. 1 Shift processing is performed to pack in a small reserved area (pending first area to pending third area). In the present embodiment, in the prefetch information storage area 223j, data shift is performed only for the reserve areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift process is not performed for the holding area (hold third area to hold fourth area) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. Control burdens can be reduced.

  In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the hold area (hold second area to hold fourth area) may be configured to be shifted to a hold area with a smaller area number, respectively. In that case, since the determination as to whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (the holding second area to the holding fourth area) is unnecessary, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the program can be reduced, and the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. The continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is a counter used to determine the start of the continuous advance presentation effect, and is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113 is performed. The update of the consecutive notice lottery counter 223k is performed, for example, by sequentially adding one by one within the range of 0 to 127, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a pre-reading command from the main control device 110, it is based on the prediction result of the current pre-reading, the jackpot type of the special symbol held, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k, etc. The start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined (see FIG. 39).

  The value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is compared with the continuous notice determination table 222d (see FIGS. 13A and 13B) described next, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is the continuous notice determination table 222d. It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined range. Then, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is within a predetermined range, the start of the continuous notice effect is determined (see S1715 and S1716 in FIG. 39).

  When the advance notice command is received from main controller 110, continuous notice determination table 222d satisfies a predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see the continuous notice determination process in FIG. 39)). If it is, it is a table for setting "the continuous notice determination probability". Here, the continuous advance notice determination probability is a probability to determine to cause the third symbol display device 81 to start the continuous advance notice effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the details of the continuous notice determination table 222d will be described. FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222 d. As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), the continuous notice determination table 222d includes two of a continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol and a continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol. Have one table. The voice lamp control device 113 is a special symbol of the special symbol when the prediction result of the special symbol extracted from the pre-reading command received from the main control unit 110 is "big hit of the special symbol (15 R probability variation big hit, 15 normal big hit)". When the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "reach out of back and forth", the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol is selected. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is “a collision or a small hit”, the continuous notice determination table 222 d is not selected.

  The special symbol jackpot determination table 222d for the special symbol and the continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of the special symbol are both the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in the voice lamp control device 113 N) Define the range (hereinafter referred to as the “continuous notice determination range”) of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k that determines the start of the continuous notice effect in association with each value “1” to “4” that can be taken. doing.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13, the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol is associated with the value “1” of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range The special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is associated with the value "2" to define "0 to 15" as the continuous advance notice determination range, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is associated with the value "3" to continuously notice "0 to 39" is defined as the determination range, and "0 to 63" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "4" of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b.

  Further, the continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of the special symbol is associated with the value “1” of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b to define “0” as the continuous notice determination range, and the special symbol holding ball number counter "0 to 9" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "2" of 223b, and "0 to 0" as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. "25" is defined, and "0 to 39" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range in association with the value "4" of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 satisfies the predetermined condition (any one of conditions 1 to 3 described later (see continuous notice determination process in FIG. 39)). If so, as a table for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability, any one of the continuous advance notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol and the continuous advance notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol is selected. Then, from the selected continuous notice determination table, the continuous notice determination range corresponding to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b at that time is specified, and the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k at that time is continuous notice When included in the range, determine the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

  By the way, as the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b becomes larger, the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol and the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol in the example of FIG. It is specified that the continuous notice determination range is wide, but if the continuous notice determination range is wide, it becomes easy to be determined to perform the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice determination probability becomes high, so the jackpot for the special symbol In both the continuous notice determination table 222d and the continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of the special symbol, the larger the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b (the number N of holdings of variable display), the continuous notice determination probability is It means that it is defined to be high. Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over all the fluctuation effects that are being held when the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it is possible to set the continuous advance notice determination probability higher as the number of holding times is larger. There is a high possibility that the number of fluctuation effects included in the continuous advance notice effects of will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the effect different from the normal effect is performed as the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous fluctuation effects, so that the player is made special. It can give you a sense of expectation. In addition, since the number of holding times of the variable display generally has a small value in many cases, when the number of holding times is small, it can be suppressed so that continuous advance presentation effects are not performed frequently, while the number of holding times is small. When it becomes large, it can be made easy to perform continuous notice production.

  In addition, when the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol in the example of FIG. 13 is compared with the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol, it corresponds to the value of the same special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. The attached continuous notice determination range is defined so that the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222d for the special symbol is equal to or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222d for the removal of the special symbol. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability in the case where the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot)" is that the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect is "off the special symbol , It is set to be equal to or higher than the probability of continuous advance notice determination in the case of "special symbol small hit, special symbol hit". Thereby, when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the gaming state will become "big hit of special symbol (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)" after the continuous advance notice effect is over is high. Can be suggested to the player, so that the player can have a high sense of expectation. Also, normally, the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect end (ie, the result of the lottery performed at the time of the ball winning to the first entrance 64), "big hit of special symbol (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)" The probability of becoming is set smaller than the probability of becoming “off of special symbol, small hit of special symbol, exact hit of special symbol”, so the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect is “off of special symbol, In the case of small hit of special symbol, the hit of special symbol, it can be controlled so that continuous notice effect is not performed frequently, while "big hit of special symbol (15R positive variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)" In the case of, it is possible to make it easy to perform continuous advance notice effects.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, the prediction result of the special symbol extracted from the pre-read command received from the main control device 110 is not only the case of "special symbol big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)", Also in the case where the prediction result of the stop type is "reach out of back and forth (out)", the permission judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect is performed. In the present embodiment, when the prediction result of the stop type is "immediately hit or small hit", the permission judgment of the continuous advance presentation effect is not performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even when the prediction result of the stop type is “reach out of back and forth”, etc. Can be performed under various conditions. Therefore, when continuous advance notice effects are performed, it is possible to give the player various expectations. Also, as a result of the lottery, even when the special symbol is continuously removed, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player can have a high expectation and the player becomes bored. Can be prevented.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. The continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is a counter that counts the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed. The initial value of the continuous notice number counter 2231 is set to 0, and when the start of the continuous notice effect is determined when the prefetch command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the number of special symbol holding balls at that time is determined. The value of the counter 223b is stored (see S1717 in FIG. 39).

  The value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation type command transmitted from the main control device 110 and a stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation type command. At this time, first, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command. Then, if the extracted stop type is “off (complete out, reach back, reach back except out), if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is a value of 2 or more, the extracted stop type Instead of the above, the chance is set as the stop type (see S1820 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Further, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is decremented by 1 when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation type command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 (see S1826 in FIG. 40).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command. In this way, the stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. In addition, when the chance eye is set as the stop type, for example, on the effective line L1 shown in FIG. 4, the combination of the main symbols stops in sequence from the left symbol row Z1 to “3” “4” “1” The symbol is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is "even if the stop type is" displacement (complete out, front out, back out, reach back other than back out) ". If it is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (see S1822 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. Even when the variation type command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 are received, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 0, the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is maintained at 0. (See S1825: No in FIG. 40). The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Also, when the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 1, it is the last fluctuation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, so as a stop type As in the case where the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 0, the extracted stop type is set as it is (no reference to S1817 in FIG. 40), and the set stop type is not set. The display control device 114 is notified by the display stop type command. However, in this case, the value of the consecutive notice number counter 2231 is decremented by 1 (see S1826 in FIG. 40).

  As described above, while the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 2 or more, the variation type command transmitted from the main control device 110 and the stop type command corresponding to the variation type command are received and the suspension is performed. When the stop type is extracted from the type command, if the stop type is "displacement (complete out, out-front reach, out-front outreach reach)", a chance eye is set as the stop type and the exit type is set. A display stop type command indicating the stop type is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, in the display control device 114, when the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 ends, a stop symbol as a chance is displayed.

  Here, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b at that time is stored, and thereafter, the variation type command and Whenever the stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation type command is received, if the value is 1 or more, the value is decremented by one. Therefore, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the stop symbol serving as the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for all the fluctuation effects reserved in the main control device 110. That is, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye is displayed continuously.

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the change effect which is most closely watched during the game. In addition, even if the stop symbol according to the big hit is not shown as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, and the player has a feeling of expectation that the big hit will be obtained after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. You can

  Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command, the value of the continuous notice number counter 2231 is referred to in order to determine whether the execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set (FIG. 39). See S1705). Then, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 0 (see S1706: Yes in FIG. 39), the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in all the fluctuation effects reserved in the main control unit 110, Of the predetermined conditions, it is determined that the condition (condition 1 described later) is satisfied, and the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the processing relating to the continuous advance presentation effect, the main control device 110 does not determine whether to start the continuous advance presentation effect or not, and the winning of the first ball entrance 64 Based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired according to (start winning), the lottery result of the special symbol is read ahead, and various information (presence or absence of the special symbol) obtained by the prefetching is predicted As a result, the prediction result of the stop type and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type are included in the prefetch command and notified to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information from the pre-reading command, stores them as pre-reading information in the pre-reading information storage area 223j, and decides the start of continuous notice effect start according to the contents of the pre-reading information storage area 223j. to decide. Then, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the setting of the stop type is also performed for each of the fluctuation effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Therefore, by causing the sound lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

  After the notice, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored in the continuous notice frequency counter 223l for the big hit flag 223m, so that all continuous notice effects set for a plurality of fluctuation effects are executed. It is a flag which shows the game state after the next fluctuation production. If the value of the jackpot flag 223m after this notice is on, then the gaming state after the fluctuation effect after the execution of all the successive notice effects is “the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) If the value of jackpot flag 223m after OFF notice is OFF, then the gaming state after the change effect after execution of all continuous advance notice effects is “off special symbol, special symbol Indicates that it will be in the "small hit, or a special symbol of the hit" state. Incidentally, the fluctuation effect after the execution after all the continuous notices is the fluctuation effect performed when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is one.

  When the start of continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the pre-reading command received from the main control unit 110 in the voice lamp control device 113, the after-notification jackpot flag 223 m predicts the success or failure of the special symbol extracted from the pre-reading command If the result is "big hit of special symbol", ON is set (see S1719 in Fig. 39), and the prediction result of the special symbol extracted from the pre-reading command is "out of special symbol, small hit of special symbol or If the special symbol of the special symbol "is hit" is set off (see S1720 in FIG. 39). Then, the value is held until the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 refers to the after-notification jackpot flag 223 m when it is determined that the continuous advance presentation effect is being executed when the prefetch command is received (see S1707 in FIG. 39). Then, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is on (see S1707 in FIG. 39: Yes), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set Since the state is "the jackpot of a special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)", further, the variable staging (holding ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the execution of the continuous advance staging are set. Whether or not two or more fluctuation effects (holding balls) exist between the last fluctuation effect (holding balls) (ie, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice number counter 223l It is determined whether the difference is 3 or more), and it is determined whether (condition 2 described later) of the predetermined conditions is satisfied (see S1709 in FIG. 39).

  On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off (see S1707 in FIG. 39: No), the game after the change effect after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the change effects for which the continuous notice effect is set. Since the state is "off special symbol, small hit for special symbol, or exact hit for special symbol", the prediction result of the special symbol newly notified by the look-ahead command is "big hit for special symbol". It is determined whether or not (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) is satisfied, and it is determined whether or not (condition 3 described later) of the predetermined conditions is satisfied (see S1711 in FIG. 39). .

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 38) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing is performed according to the command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 causes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to start at the timing of the new starting winning. Each value of is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the reservation area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110. After that, when the data stored in the reserved area is shifted to the execution area in the main control device 110, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the shifted data.

  In main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in first symbol display device 37, and the lottery is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 120 seconds, etc.) has elapsed. The special symbol according to the result is displayed stopped. In addition, when a special symbol lottery is performed, the main control device is a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern type of variation effect executed according to the special symbol lottery, and a stop type command indicating a special symbol lottery result. The signal is sent to the audio lamp control unit 113 from 110. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, it extracts the variation pattern type from the variation pattern command, and when the stop type command is received, it extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command. .

  When the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the variation pattern type and the stop type corresponding to the variation pattern type, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the extracted variation pattern type and the stop type in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. . Also, a command is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation display and stop display of the third symbol according to the extracted change pattern type and stop type. Send. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display and the stop display of the third symbol are executed in synchronization with the variation display and the stop display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 37.

  In addition, as above-mentioned, as a stop classification which shows a lottery result of a special symbol, "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "rapid hit", "small hit", "completely out of place", " Front and back out of reach (out), "front and back out of reach (out)" is provided. In addition, as fluctuation pattern classification, “special reach (120 seconds)”, “super reach (90 seconds)”, “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “long out (11 seconds)”, “short out (5 seconds) "Is provided.

  More specifically, in the case of the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" or "the special symbol 15R regular jackpot". The variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, and the stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol", "15R of the special symbol It is possible to recognize which is usually a "big hit". In addition, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the first special gaming state ends, according to the lottery result.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot of the 15th round (the first special gaming state). In this case, the sound lamp control device 113 is a display control device such that a display (big hit effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Send various commands to 114. In the first special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 so that the above-mentioned "first opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  The "first opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" is a predetermined opening period after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (in the present embodiment, "the ball is 10 balls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a It is an opening and closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a when one of the conditions of “winning” and “30 seconds from opening” has elapsed, and this opening and closing operation is repeated 15 times continuously It is.

  And when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot", when the first special gaming state is over, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state A". Here, the sound lamp control device 113 is a back image showing the back image to be displayed to the display control device 114 so that the “rear image for high probability” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Send change command. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  When the display control device 114 receives the rear surface image change command, the display control device 114 extracts the type of the rear surface image from the rear surface image change command. When the type of the back image is extracted, the display control device 114 displays the back image corresponding to the extracted type as the back image of the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the first special gaming state ends when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol" and "ordinary symbol" Transition to "time saving state". Here, the audio lamp control device transmits a rear surface image change command to the display control device 114 so that the “rear surface image for time saving” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  In this manner, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R of the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R of the special symbol usually wins", according to the lottery result of the special symbol The third symbol display device 81 displays the rear image for high probability and the rear image for short time. Therefore, the player can recognize the lottery result of the special symbol by paying attention to the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the player can recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol with a big hit" or "a small symbol with a special symbol". A variable display is made at 81, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display showing the lottery result of the special symbol is made. However, among the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol indicating the abutment of the special symbol and the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol are similar. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol of the big hit" or "the small symbol of the special symbol", in the third symbol display device 81, a similar third symbol (that is, reach) The generated "off special symbol" is stopped and displayed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit" or "a small special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize if it is a hit. The reason why the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result of the special symbol will be described later.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 is a display control device such that a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Send various commands to 114. In the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  Note that "the second opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" means that a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds has elapsed from opening") has elapsed after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the opening and closing operation is to close the specific winning opening 65a, and this operation is repeated 15 times.

  Then, when the second special game state is ended when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state B". Here, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a rear surface image change command to the display control device 114 so that the “rear surface image for special effect” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at the current state even if the second special gaming state being executed is ended. . However, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a back image change command to the sound lamp display control device 114 so that “the back image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, according to the back image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, select lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and voice (music) output from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) , Lights up and flashes, and performs audio output.

  Hereinafter, in the state where the “rear image for special effect” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, lighting and blinking of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 according to the “rear image for special effect” The fact that voice (music) output of the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) is being executed is described as "special effect" being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display and the stop display are made in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol The rear image of the display device 81 may be changed.

  Although the details will be described later, for example, in a state where the special effect is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the out of special symbol”, and the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 When the stop display is made, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether to end the special effect under execution. Here, when it is determined that the special rendering in progress is to be ended, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display “the back image at the time of low probability” in the third symbol display device 81. The rear image change command is sent.

  After that, when the special effect under execution is once ended, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "off of the special symbol", and the variable display and the stop display are performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. If done, the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to resume the special effect once it has ended. Here, when it is determined that the special effect is to be resumed, the third lamp display device 81 causes the sound lamp control device 113 to display the rear surface with respect to the display control device 114. An image change command is sent.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, an example of the flow of the specific effect performed in the pachinko machine 10 and the special effect will be described. In addition, as described above, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “certain hit of the special symbol” or the “small hit of the special symbol”. In addition, the special effect may be that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state B", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 may be in an advantageous state for the player. It is an effect for notifying a player that there is a

  FIG. 14 is a drawing (specific presentation effect) executed in the pachinko machine 10 when the lottery of the special symbol is made, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a sudden hit of the special symbol” or “a small hit of the special symbol”. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a), and FIG. 15 is a drawing of a special symbol after a specific effect is given, and the drawing result of the special symbol It is the schematic for demonstrating an example of the flow of the presentation performed in the pachinko machine 10, when it becomes "or 15 R usual big hit of a special symbol".

  As described above, in the main control device 110, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination), a lottery of a special symbol is performed using it as a trigger. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14, the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  And, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a collision of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol”, the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 (variation effect When the) is completed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is subsequently shifted to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. Then, a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, during the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed. Note that "the second opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" means that a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds has elapsed from opening") has elapsed after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the opening and closing operation is to close the specific winning opening 65a, and this operation is repeated 15 times.

  Then, when the second special game state is ended when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state B". On the other hand, when the second special game state ends when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Further, the “rear image for special effect” is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, and the special effect is started.

  Here, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, in the state where the special effect is being executed, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variable display according to the lottery is started Be done. In the present embodiment, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to another one during special effects and other than special effects. In addition, during special effects and other than during special effects, the lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the sound (music) output from the sound output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (see FIG. 5) Also change to something else.

  Therefore, the player may be in special effects by paying attention to the back image of the third symbol display device 81, the lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, and the sound of the sound output device 226, or special effects It can recognize if it is not inside. However, as described above, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", regardless of the lottery result, the special effect is similarly executed in the pachinko machine 10 Ru. Therefore, even if the player can recognize whether the special effect is being performed or not, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a sudden hit of the special symbol” and the special effect is executed, or the special symbol It can not be grasped whether the lottery result is "a small hit of a special symbol" and the special effect has been executed.

  As a result, as to the player, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "a high probability state B of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol However, it becomes difficult to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed, and it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of a special symbol”, the player can recognize the lottery result. Also, the player can grasp the gaming state after the end of the jackpot according to the lottery result. Therefore, even when the special effect is executed and the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, then, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R of the special symbol, big hit" or "15R of the special symbol" Then, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a case will be described where the special symbol lottery is performed during the special effect, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit). As shown in FIG. 15, the first symbol display device 37, or the first symbol display device 37, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot” or “special symbol 15R regular jackpot” during special rendition. When the fluctuation display (variation effect) in the three symbol display device 81 is ended, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is subsequently shifted to the first special gaming state. The special effect being executed is ended here. Then, a display (big hit effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the first special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  The jackpot effect is divided into three periods: a period in which the fanfare effect is performed, a period in which the round effect is performed, and a period in which the ending effect is performed. The fanfare production is a production for notifying the player that the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened when the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big hit from now on, and enhances the player's sense of expectation. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on while blessing the jackpot. Further, the ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the jackpot ends.

  During the jackpot effect, according to each effect period, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lighting and blinking patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33, and an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226 (FIG. 5) The voice (music) output from the reference is updated, and it is notified that the jackpot is in progress.

  Further, in the first special game state (during execution of the jackpot effect), control is performed in the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "first opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is performed. The "first opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" is a predetermined opening period after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a (in the present embodiment, "the ball is 10 balls to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a It is an opening and closing operation for closing the specific winning opening 65a when one of the conditions of “winning” and “30 seconds from opening” has elapsed, and this opening and closing operation is repeated 15 times continuously It is.

  And when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol 15R probability variation jackpot", when the first special gaming state is over, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol high probability state A". On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", when the first special gaming state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "special symbol low probability state".

  Here, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and variable display according to the lottery is started. This is the end of the description of an example of the flow of the specific effect and the special effect performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, the same specific effects are similarly obtained when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. It is configured to be run. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific effect or the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". Become.

  Here, the reason why the player has difficulty in recognizing whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “a sudden hit of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol” will be described.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, as a lottery result of the special symbol, only three of the above-mentioned "certain jackpot of special symbol", the above-mentioned "normal jackpot of special symbol" and the above-mentioned "off of special symbol" are provided. It was not. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", it was easy for the game to be monotonous.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the gaming state of the pachinko machine does not change only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol jackpot" or "the special symbol big hit". Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player can easily grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine has not changed. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "out of the special symbol", it is easy for the player to continue the low probability of winning To understand.

  In a pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the jackpot of the special symbol is made with a probability of 1/300, for example The winning probability is set such that the jackpot, the normal jackpot of special symbols). On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the high probability state of special symbol", if the lottery of the special symbol is done, for example the probability of 1/30 "the big hit of the special symbol (special variation oddity big hit, special symbol The winning probability is set to be "usually a big hit of Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", when the drawing of the special symbol is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is often "off of the special symbol".

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the player is the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol , I could not have a strong sense of expectation that it would be a special jackpot). Therefore, the game was easy to become monotonous.

  So, in this pachinko machine 10, as a lottery result of a special symbol, "a special hit of a special symbol" and "a small hit of a special symbol" are provided. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, to the player, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol (the probability variation of the special symbol It has become possible to have a strong expectation that it will be a "big hit, usually a big hit with a special symbol".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first symbol display device 37 or 37 even when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform similar stop display. Also, the same specific effects are configured to be performed in the same manner. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display, the specific effect, or the operation of the specific winning hole 65a, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol of a sudden hit" or "a small symbol of a special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize the

  In addition, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol high probability state B", but the special symbol When the lottery result is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Also, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state B", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is as in the case of the "special symbol high probability state A". , "Normal pattern short time" will not be. Therefore, in this state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is made and the hit of the normal symbol is achieved, in the case of the electric role, as in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state of the special symbol. Control is performed such that the second opening / closing operation of the motorized part is performed. That is, even when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also the "low probability state of the special symbol", the electric winning combination attached to the first ball entry Works the same way.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player can grasp the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or when it comes to "small hit of special symbol", then the player plays the pachinko game 10 until the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15R normal hit of special symbol". It becomes difficult to grasp whether the state is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state".

  Thereby, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol", the player can not grasp it, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol Thus, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the probability of winning is high. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the lottery of the special symbol is more It has become possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the result will be "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R positive variation jackpot of the special symbol, the 15R regular jackpot of the special symbol)". Therefore, with the present pachinko machine 10, unlike conventional pachinko machines, it has become possible to enhance the interest of gaming.

  However, as described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the player is provided with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 by providing the "special hit of the special symbol" and the "small hit of the special symbol" as the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes impossible to grasp, and as a result, the following problems occur.

  First, the case where it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described more specifically. For example, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player is grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" Or suppose that it became "a small hit of a special symbol".

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "perception of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol", the first symbol display device 37 is similar regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. The first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the similar third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" or If it becomes "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol", and whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become "a high probability state B of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the lottery result is “a small hit of a special symbol” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol whose lottery result indicates (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, while the third symbol indicating the lottery result (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the jackpot effect, the specific effect, the special effect and the like are not performed. Therefore, the player can recognize "disappearance of the special symbol" if he pays attention to the presence of the stop indication of the first symbol, the stop indication of the third symbol, and the execution of the effect. And, since the lottery result of the special symbol is "the out of special symbol", the player can also grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. However, since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the "special symbol is removed", the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  In addition, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", for example, the lottery result of the special symbol Is assumed to have become "a special design hit" or "a special design hit". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the similar first symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the stop display of the similar third symbol is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision with a special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "a high probability state B of a special symbol", the lottery result of a special symbol is "a small symbol of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed. In addition, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the lottery of the special symbol in the first place. Therefore, the player can not keep track of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  On the other hand, in the state where the player has difficulty grasping whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", the lottery result of the special symbol It is assumed that “15R of the special symbol big hit” or “15R of the special symbol usually hit”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot effect is performed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display car of the first symbol and the stop display of the third symbol, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "the 15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol" or "the special symbol It can be recognized whether it is 15R usually a big hit. In addition, if it pays attention to the jackpot effect, it can be recognized that it became a jackpot of a special symbol.

  And, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the player, after the jackpot of the 15th round (the first special game state), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol of It can be grasped that it becomes the high probability state A ". In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot", the player, after the 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol low probability state" Know what to do.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set after the jackpot (first special gaming state) ends in the 15th round, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been grasped so far. Therefore, with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 being "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or even if it becomes "a small hit of a special symbol" and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, then, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R definite variation big hit of a special symbol" or "special symbol of If it becomes “15R normal jackpot”, then the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, even if the player's lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” and it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, this is The game state of the pachinko machine 10 up to is still difficult to grasp.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine provided with "a special pattern hit" and "a small hit of a special symbol" as a lottery result of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot of 15 rounds (first special game) Even if a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal state, the first special game state is obtained by the process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). The jackpot of the special symbol ends without knowing whether the payout has been made. That is, although the player has won the jackpot of the special symbol, the circumstances of the win remain unknown.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may be questioned by what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol". If the player is asked a question, the player will continue playing the game without solving the question, and hence the player may continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  In particular, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol once "a sudden hit of the special symbol". Or, after the player has become unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after becoming a "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) In the case of a jackpot of a symbol, there is a high possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol" in the drawing of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) Including the case that the player can not grasp the game state of 10, among the lottery of the special symbol up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol" It is highly likely that the player has doubts as to whether it has been.

  That is, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol high probability state B” and the winning probability is high, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 several times (for example, When the third lottery of special symbols is made, it is highly likely that the player may have doubts that the lottery result of the special symbols has become "the jackpot of special symbols".

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any of the special symbols in the lottery of the special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time) The player can not know whether or not the "special symbol hit" has been reached. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  In addition, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability (for example, Even though 1/300) is low, the player doubts that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of about 100 special symbols is made. There is a risk of having

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols among the special symbol lottery up to about 100 times is “special symbol The player can not know whether or not it has become a sudden hit. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the circumstances have caused the jackpot of the special symbol of this time. Although the reason will be described later, this makes it possible to make the player feel comfortable and to enhance the interest of the game. When the variation pattern type is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “Junken effects A to E” is not performed, and normal variation display (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) is performed.

  As described above, “Junken effects A to E” is a character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) representing a player (self side) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and an opponent The character on the other end side is displayed, and the Janken game between the respective characters is started, and the final determination is made.

  In the present embodiment, when the “Junken effect” is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the character representing the player (self side) wins the Janken (or Finally, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", if "Junken effect" is executed, the character representing the player (your side) lose. In addition, "Junken effect A" is also executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" even when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". However, the "Junken effect B to E" is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can recognize that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol" when the "Junken effect B to E" is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the effect for the big hit of the special symbol According to the pattern table 222c and the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f, any one of "no Janken effect, Janken effect A to D" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1808 in FIG. 40).

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the change pattern type of the variable display is "Super reach (90 Second) or “special reach (120 seconds)”, and further, if the value of the probability continuous counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be “Junken effect A”, and the player ( Determine the display mode so that the character representing your side wins Janken. Similarly, if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be "Junken effect B", and if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variation effect is If the "Junken effect C" is determined, and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (own side) is Janken respectively. Determine the display mode to win the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special reach" (120 seconds) and if all the following three conditions are satisfied, "Janken effect E" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1805 to S1807 in FIG. 40).

  The first condition is that the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the second condition is that the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 100 or less It is. The third condition is that the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on. Here, when all three conditions are satisfied, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of "the low probability state of the special symbol", and once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the small hit of the special symbol", Thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become the "certain hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the "big hit of the special symbol".

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode (the type of Janken effect type) of the variable effect is determined by the value of the estimated continuous number counter 223f.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player pays attention to the type of "Junken effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81. From the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol", it is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "rapid hit of special symbol". Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player then displays the change effect when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Depending on the mode (ie, the type of the Janken effect), it can be grasped in which gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) was made.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" If there is, it is configured to execute "Junken effect A" in the variable display. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect.

  Therefore, the player can not recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "rapid hit of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player can not grasp what kind of gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the removal of the special symbol) is made. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the special event from the next time onward It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the lottery result of the symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Next, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, an example of the contents that can be grasped by the player, and the reason why the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. An example will be specifically described.

  When the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect A", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "big hit" special symbol It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" even once between the present and the "big hit of the special symbol". In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the player When the character representing the side wins the Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) has been made in the latest gaming state where it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Then, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when a special symbol of about 100 times is drawn, luckily, it may be doubtful that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol". is there.

  In addition, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Although it has become), there is a possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" at last, when the lottery of the special symbol is not made. .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Junken. Although the player is in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lucky result of this special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" It can be understood that Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct. Also, the player can have a satisfaction that he is lucky to be elected with a low probability of winning.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" and the "special symbol big hit" of this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect B", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and among the special symbol lotterys up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbols is “special symbol There is a high possibility of doubting that it was a sudden hit of That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Because it had become, there is a high possibility of doubting that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become twice in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect C," and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has been twice in the "special symbol hit" during the last "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". . In addition, the player is twice due to the “rapid hit of the special symbol” in each of the specific effects executed within the difficult-to-understand period, including when it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It can be understood that the rest was due to the "special symbol small hit".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, Because it has become 1/30), if the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility of doubting that the special symbol lottery result has become "the special symbol jackpot".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol," including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time) It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the hit of the special symbol" twice among the lottery of.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". On the other hand, the probability of being "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot" is "1/3", and the probability of being the "special symbol of 15R regular jackpot" is "1/2". Thus, when it comes to "big hit of special symbol", "15 R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15 R usually big hit of special symbol", rather than being judged as "striking hit of special symbol" The probability of being judged as “is higher.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, of the special symbol lottery up to a few times (for example, the third time), I am a little disappointed at the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol was "the special symbol's hit" twice. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become three or more times in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect D", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player grasps that the lottery result of the special symbol has been three or more times in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". it can. In addition, the player is at least three times among the specific effects performed within the difficult-to-understand period, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by the “rapid hit of the special symbol”. It can be understood that it was something, and others were by "small hit of a special symbol".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the fourth time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the fourth time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that "the jackpot of the special symbol" is immediately obtained after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth time) It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol hit" more than three times among the lottery.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". That is, the probability of being determined as "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" is higher than being determined as "a special symbol's striking hit".

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, the lottery of the special symbol up to the first time (for example, the fourth time) I am also very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol was "a hit of a special symbol" more than three times. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the character on the other side, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" from the "big hit of the special symbol" to the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way. Furthermore, it means that the lottery of the special symbol has not exceeded 100 times since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the player When the character representing the side wins the character on the other side, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in the “low probability state of the special symbol”. In addition, the player, once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", and thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become a "falling hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times. , It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Then, as described above, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then a lottery of about 100 special symbols is made, it is lucky that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbols", There is a possibility of having a question.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, although it has become 1/30), it has not been won very much, and it is doubtful that the lottery result of the special symbol finally becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol is made this time. There is a risk of having

  In such a case, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins over the character on the other side. Although the player is in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol of It can be understood that it has become a jackpot. Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct.

  In addition, the player can grasp that "the jackpot of the special symbol" has been made by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he is elected with a low probability of winning or a satisfaction that he is lucky.

  Also, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Then, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second time (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The player is very different from the forecast, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is " It can be grasped that it became a jackpot of special symbols.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the drawing of the special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped. In the situation, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very lucky and he was very fortunate to have won the prize in a very rare situation, although the idea of the player was largely out of place.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation as described above occurs, the player can not grasp the situation. Therefore, the player, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special symbol high probability state B", the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), so the lottery result of the special symbol is " I thought that it would be a jackpot of a special symbol, and it might end with it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “when the lottery result of the special symbol is“ big hit of the special symbol ”. If it is a super reach (90 seconds) or a "special reach (120 seconds)", it is comprised so that either of "Junken production AE" will be performed in the fluctuation display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the current situation of the special symbol has become a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", When the lottery result is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player is in what gaming state the lottery of the special symbol (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made according to the type of "Janken production". I can understand. Therefore, even if the player is asked to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery). You can solve the question. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. As a result, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is If the player is determined to be a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol hit", it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the exact hit of the special symbol" The player does not have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player wins the "small hit of special symbol".

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state A" state, and even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "jumping", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high in special symbol It becomes "high probability state B of special symbol" from probability state A ". On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as the "special symbol high probability state A".

  Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is "certain hit of the special symbol" Or, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because it becomes a small hit of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of the special symbol or "B" can be understood. Therefore, in this case, there is little possibility of causing the player to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery).

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", any one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured as follows. And, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified to what kind of circumstances the jackpot of the special symbol this time has become, but during the jackpot effect "Janken Effects A ~ E" is executed It is good. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effect, rear face image displayed in the main display area Dm, and continuous advance notice effect are controlled. As described above, in the present embodiment, “rear image for high probability”, “rear image for short time”, “rear image for special effect”, and “low probability” as the type of rear image Four types of “rear image for time” are provided, and any one type of rear image is set as the rear image of the third symbol display device 81. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 30) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ("back image for high probability time", "back image for time reduction", "special effect time" And a “rear image for low probability” are connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 42) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 42) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 44B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and buffers when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. The image data stored in the RAM 237a is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2003 and S2004 in FIG. 42).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 17 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" is shown at the lower right position on the display screen of the main image at power-on, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 17 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of the special symbol”, and in FIG. 17 (c) when “out of special symbol”. The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 17 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19, the range of the back surface image stored in the back surface image area 235c among the back surface image and the back surface image will be described. FIGS. 18 and 19 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, and FIG. 18 (b) shows the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", while FIG. 19 shows the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". Are shown respectively.

  Of the back faces A to C, the back face images corresponding to the back faces A and B are, as shown in FIG. 18, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "image for scrolling") are configured such that the back surface images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and the third symbol display device 81 is smoothed. The back image is scrolled by a series of connections.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to "at-the-city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 sets the initial position of the display area between position a and position a 'of the corresponding back image first. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image of the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image as time passes, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the position a to the position c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left direction.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, the back image on the back C is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... Of FIG. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, in the back surface C, the image of the mountain that soars on the island, the image of the sandy beach that spreads to the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island, the third pattern It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the image of the sky that spreads over the mountain changes its color tone over time.

  When the player changes the stage to the “island stage” by operating the frame button 22, a rear surface image shown in FIG. 19A is displayed as an initial rear surface image of the rear surface C. In the back image shown in FIG. 19A, an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time passes, the back image shown in FIG. 19B is displayed. In the back image shown in FIG. 19 (b), a bright blue sky indicating day is displayed. Next, as the time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time passes, the rear image shown in FIG. 19C is displayed. In the rear surface image shown in FIG. 19C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and gradually to orange. And after predetermined time progress, it returns to the back surface image shown to Fig.19 (a), and the back surface image of Fig.19 (a)-(c) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 again.

  Next, in each rear surface image, the range of the rear surface image stored in the rear surface image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 18A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire surface of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the stage in the city, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data of the back A corresponding to the stage in the city displayed frequently is the back image area By being resident on 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage is a partial area of the rear surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is the resident video RAM 235 Is stored in the rear image area 235c of Also, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 19 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 19 (a) and FIG. 19 (b) excluding FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process of FIG.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at any timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at any timing. In order to change the back image instantly, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all back images, but in such a case, it becomes very useful as the resident video RAM 235. A large amount of RAM must be used, which may lead to increased costs.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear surface image to be displayed first when the stage is changed is in the range from the position a to the position a 'or in the range of FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (b). The image data between the position a and the position b including the initial position and the image corresponding to the image between FIG. 19 (a) and FIG. 19 (b) are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 is changed when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range image is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, the back surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 after the image at the initial position is displayed. In the meantime, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, the image data from position b 'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay is used to scroll the range from the position b ′ to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image of the initial position is displayed, the rear surface C displays the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 19 (a) so that transfer of the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to 19 (a) can be completed from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of ~ (b) is set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 19A and 19B are displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 19B to 19C and FIGS. 19C to 19A are for normal use. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images of FIGS. 19A to 19B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 19 (b) to 19 (c) and 19 (c) to 19 (a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes, using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

  In the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236 a (see FIG. 16) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, since the rear image data stored in the rear image dedicated sub area is not overwritten by other image data, the rear image can be reliably displayed.

  Further, on the back surface B, an image corresponding to an image between the position b ′ and the position b in the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

  Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 as the display area, then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as the display area. Do. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection so that the image between the position a to the position c flows in the left direction.

  Referring back to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character with a rear symbol, a flannel, a helmet, etc. as a main symbol without the numbers “0” to “9” Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a fanfare data transfer flag 223 i, at least a stored image data determination flag 233 j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233 k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, a specific effect Display data tables corresponding to special effects, fanfare effects, round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change production is started, the stop type of the change production is either “off (full out, front or back reach, reach other than back and forth) reach”, “certain hit”, or “small hit” If there is, while the stop design that indicates "deletion of the special symbol" is finally stopped and displayed, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is either "15R probability variation jackpot", and "15R normal jackpot", The stop symbol indicating each jackpot type is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  As described above, the specific effect is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a special symbol's exact hit" or "a special symbol's small hit". In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 When the (variation effect) ends, subsequently, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state. Then, a display (specific effect) indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, during the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed. Note that "the second opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a" means that a predetermined opening period (in the present embodiment, "0.2 seconds has elapsed from opening") has elapsed after the opening of the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the opening and closing operation is to close the specific winning opening 65a, and this operation is repeated 15 times. Then, when the second special game state ends, the “rear image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the special effect is started.

  As described above, the special effect may be that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol high probability state B”, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in an advantageous state for the player It is an effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility of being present. In the present embodiment, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set as the “back image for special effect” during the period in which the special effect is continued (during special effect) On the other hand, a period other than during special rendering is set to another back image (a back image for high probability, a back image for time reduction, a back image for low probability). Furthermore, the lighting and blinking patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33 and the sound (music) output from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 5) are different during special effects and other than special effects. Is changed to Thereafter, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation effect is further executed while the special effect is being executed.

  The fanfare effect is an effect for notifying the player that the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed at a normal time, is shifted to the jackpot of the special symbol, and the round effect It is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on, blessing the jackpot of the special symbol. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the jackpot of the special symbol is ended.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the specific effect, the special effect, the fanfare effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 20) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 21 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 21).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 22) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 21, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  Referring back to FIG. 16, the description will be continued. The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 42). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 53 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 44B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 44B) so that the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 44 (b) (see S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 45 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are performed.

  Further, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 of FIG. 53A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 53B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A drawing list (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, describes the contents of the instruction for drawing the image for the image. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 22) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 22) described later (see FIG. 22) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. In step S2303), the pointer updating process (see S3205 in FIG. 50) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 22), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 22, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3207 in FIG. 50). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by the initial setting process (see S 2002 in FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3717 in FIG. 54). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3718 in FIG. 54). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 55).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 44B) is performed, the process is performed (see S3802 of FIG. 55).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 23 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated with power on and a main process executed after the start-up process, and activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. As the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be performed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interruption process, first, a reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information). Further, based on the winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, when the external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed, the award ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per random number counter C4, and those counter values are When the maximum value (in this embodiment, 899, 119, 99, 198, 239, respectively) is reached, each value is cleared to 0. When the value of the first random number counter C1 reaches the maximum value (one rotation), the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is set as the first value of the first random number counter C1. When the value of the second random number counter C4 reaches the maximum value (one revolution), the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is set as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing is performed to set display processing in the first symbol display device 37 or the variation pattern type of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (S104), and then the first symbol A start-up winning process accompanying the winning on the entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, and the details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, when the start winning process is executed, it is determined whether there is a ball entry to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and if there is a start winning, the ball is excluded If the number of holding balls is less than the maximum value (four balls), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing of the start winning, and are stored in the holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Then, when the start winning process is finished, next, the normal symbol variation process is executed to set the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time and the number of times of the electric combination (S106). , Through gate passage processing accompanied by passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and the details of the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, launch control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the Then, when the ball firing is on, the information of the ball firing signal is set in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball firing signal to the firing control device 112. Thus, when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed, a ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The start winning process determines the presence or absence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and when there is a starting winning, each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 is a special symbol holding ball storage area Prefetching process (described later) to execute the process of storing (holding) in 203a and further prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol drawing for the held data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) Execute S207).

  In the start winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S201). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has won in the first ball entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (fluctuation effect pending in the main controller 110 The number of holding balls N) is acquired (S202), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S203).

  Then, whether there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 4 If it is above (S203: No), the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S203: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number Add 1 to the value of the counter 203c (holding ball number N) (S204), and send the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) after addition to the voice lamp control device 113 In order to do this, the holding ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S205). As a result, when the external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed, the ball holding ball number command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer and provided in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. The first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 and the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the areas corresponding to the value (N) indicated by the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c among the held first area to the held fourth area The suspension pattern selection counter 203b3 and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are respectively reserved (stored) (S206).

  Specifically, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after the addition in the process of S204 is "1", each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in each of the storage areas 203b1 to 203b4 of the first holding area Hold the value Moreover, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "2", the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "3" in each storage area 203b1 to 203b4 of the holding second area If it is, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition is "4" in each storing area 203b1 to 203b4 of the holding third area, it is stored in each storing area 203b1 to 203b4 of the holding fourth area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are suspended.

  Although the details will be described later, when the MPU 201 detects that the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect has come, each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. The value is shifted to the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, lottery of the special symbol, determination of the variation pattern type, etc. are executed. As described above, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) is the drawing of the special symbol performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect, the determination of the variation pattern type, etc. Used in

  Next, the preread process is executed (S207), and the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) of the special symbol is newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a by the above-mentioned start winning process. Look ahead to the lottery results. That is, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are also used for prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The details of the prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the pre-reading process (S207) is finished, the start winning process is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the prefetch process (S207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S207) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 24). This pre-reading process is a process executed when data (each value of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1) associated with the detection of the start winning is newly obtained in the above-mentioned start winning process (see FIG. 24). The prefetching result of the special symbol is read using the newly acquired data.

  In this pre-reading process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a finally Read out (S301). In addition, the data (each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1) finally stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are specified based on the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c. Specifically, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 1, the data stored in the first holding area is identified as the data finally stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 2, the data stored in the holding second area is stored in the holding third area when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a is 3. When the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 4, the data stored in the holding fourth area is specified as the data finally stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  Next, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203 e indicates “high probability state A of special symbol” or “high probability state B of special symbol” (S 302). In the process of S302, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" (S302: Yes), the high probability among the special symbol big hit random number table 202a prepared in two types The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for time is acquired (S303), and the process proceeds to the processing of S305. On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol low probability state" (S302: No), the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability is acquired (S304) , Shift to the process of S305.

  In the process of S305, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a obtained in the process of S303 or S304 and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 are compared to predict the success or failure (S305). As described above, three random number values "7, 307, 582" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a big hit of the special symbol at low probability ing. In addition, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a jackpot at high probability 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored. There is. In the process of S305, the random number value (hit value) stored in the obtained special symbol big hit random number table 202a is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S301, and when they match To predict that it is a jackpot of special symbols.

  Next, as a result of comparison by the processing of S305, it is determined whether or not it is predicted to be a jackpot of a special symbol (S306), and in the process of S306, if it is predicted to be a jackpot of a special symbol (S306) : Yes), the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern type at the time of jackpot are predicted (S307). In the process of S307, first, the special symbol big hit type table 202b is compared with the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 to predict a jackpot type. Next, the variation pattern type is predicted by comparing the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for jackpot and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301. Then, when the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S313.

  On the other hand, in the process of S306, when it is predicted that it is not the jackpot of the special symbol (S306: No), the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c is acquired (S308). And the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c which is acquired, and the value of the 1st hitting random number counter C1 which is acquired with the processing of S301 are compared, it predicts the lottery result whether or not it is the small hitting of special symbol (S309) .

  Next, as a result of performing the process of S309, it is determined whether it is predicted that it is a small hit of the special symbol (S310). And in the process of S310, when it is predicted that it is a small hit of a special symbol (S310: Yes), the stop type at the time of a small hit of a special symbol and the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol It predicts (S311).

  In the process of S311, first, the stop type at the time of small hitting is predicted to be "small hitting". Next, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for removing the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. In addition, when the game state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" and the case where the regular symbol is short (in the hour symbol of the regular symbol), the special symbol is out (probable variation) The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is "the special symbol low probability state" and "the normal symbol normal state", the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (normal) of the special symbol is compared Used for And if the process of S311 is complete | finished, it will transfer to the process of S313.

  On the other hand, in the process of S310, when it is predicted that it is not a small hit of the special symbol (S310: No), it predicts the stop type at the time of the special symbol out and the variation pattern type at the time of the special symbol out (S312). In the process of S312, first, the stop type selection table (not shown) is compared with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol. .

  Next, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for removing the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S301 to predict the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. In addition, when the game state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" and the case where the regular symbol is short (in the hour symbol of the regular symbol), the special symbol is out (probable variation) The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is "the special symbol low probability state" and "the normal symbol normal state", the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (normal) of the special symbol is compared Used for Then, when the process of S312 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S313.

  In the process of S313, the ring for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is a prefetch command indicating the predicted success or failure of the special symbol, the predicted stop type (big hit type in the case of the special symbol), and the predicted variation pattern type It sets to a buffer (S313). As a result, when an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process to be described later is executed, a prefetch command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Then, when the process of S313 is completed, this pre-reading process is ended, and the process returns to the start winning process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). The special symbol variation process (S104) is to control variation effects performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S401). During the jackpot, during the jackpot during the first special gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37, and during the predetermined time after the end of the first special gaming state And are included.

  As a result of the determination in S401, if the jackpot is currently in progress (S401: Yes), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot currently (S401: No), it is determined whether a specific effect is currently being performed (S419). During the specific effect, during the specific effect, during the second special gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37, and a predetermined time after the end of the second special gaming state The middle part is included.

  If, as a result of the determination in S419, the specific effect is currently in progress (S419: Yes), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if the specific effect is not currently underway (S419: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S402), and the display manner of the first symbol display device 37 If it is not during fluctuation (S402: No), it is then determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 (S403). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S403: No), the present processing ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S403, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S403: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the holding ball number of the fluctuation display being held in the main control device 110) N) is acquired (S404), and it is determined whether the value (N) of the acquired special symbol holding ball number counter 203c exceeds 0 (S405). As a result, if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) exceeds 0 (S405: Yes), it is judged that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuation effect, first, the special symbol holding ball number The value of the counter 203c (the number of holding balls N) is decremented by 1 (S406). This is because one of the pending variable effects is started by the special symbol variation start process (S408) to be described later, and as a result, the number of holding balls decreases by one.

  Next, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S407). The data shift process performed in the process of S407 is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a toward the area with a smaller area number 1 is there. Specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data

  When the process of S407 is finished, next, special symbol variation start processing for starting variable display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S405, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) is 0 (S405: No), a state in which the demonstration effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is determined whether or not the demonstration is under way (S409). In the process of S409, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding ball number N) is greater than 0 It is judged that the time between is being demonstrated.

  Then, if the demo is not underway (S409: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S410), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if the demo is underway (S409: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process as it is. The demonstration command set in the process of S410 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an external output process (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main process described later is executed. It is transmitted to the control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with this demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demonstration command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop. Therefore, after the fluctuation stop, if the fluctuation display is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined in the process of S402 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S411). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S411: No), the process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S411: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set to the first symbol display device 37 (S412). The stop symbol is preset by a special symbol variation start process (S408) described later with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the special symbol variation start process, it is determined whether or not the big hit of the special symbol according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. If the special symbol jackpot, stop symbol (special symbol jackpot type) is determined according to the value of the first hit classification counter C2. Specifically, the stop symbol (big hit type) or the special symbol 15R usually becomes the 15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol (the maximum round number changes to the high probability state after the 15 hit round). It is determined whether or not the stop symbol (jackpot type) that is the jackpot (the jackpot that the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds) is determined.

  And in this embodiment, when it comes to the 15R positive variation of special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol, the blue LED is turned on, and when it comes to the 15R normal big indicator of the special symbol after the big hit of the special symbol, the red LED is turned on. Turn on. In addition, the red LED and the blue LED are turned on in the case of the special symbol bumping and in the case of the small symbol of the special symbol. Also, when the special symbol is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, about the case where it is a hit of a special symbol, and the case where it is a small hit of a special symbol, each LED is lighted only for several seconds after the stop of fluctuation. On the other hand, in the other cases, after lighting each LED, when the next variable display is started, the lighting is canceled. In addition, it may be decided arbitrarily whether to turn on each LED only for a few seconds after the stop of the fluctuation or to cancel the turn-on when the next fluctuation display is started after turning on each LED.

  When the process of S412 is finished, next, the lottery result corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37, that is, the lottery result corresponding to the variable display of this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R It is determined whether the normal jackpot) or the special symbol of the special symbol (S413). In the process of S413, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the big hit of the special symbol or the sudden hit of the special symbol (S413: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e is "the low probability state of the special symbol" To indicate the game state flag 203e (S414), the process proceeds to S415.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, the drawing of the special symbol is not performed, but the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “special symbol low probability state”. That is, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol is set such that the game state flag 203 e indicates “the low probability state of the special symbol”. On the other hand, in the process of S413, if the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the omission of the special symbol or the small hit of the special symbol (S413: No), the process of S414 is skipped and the process proceeds to S415. Transition.

In the process of S415, it is determined whether the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415).
In the process of S415, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set ( S416), returns to the timer interrupt process. Here, when the start of the jackpot is set, if the jackpot control process (see FIG. 33) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot effect is started.

  On the other hand, in the process of S415, when the lottery result corresponding to the current fluctuation display is not the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) (S415: No), it corresponds to the current fluctuation display It is determined whether the lottery result is the special symbol or the small symbol of the special symbol (S417). In the process of S417, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is a collision of a special symbol or a small collision of a special symbol (S417: Yes), the start of a specific effect is set (S418) ), Return to timer interrupt processing. Here, when the start of the specific effect is set, if the specific effect control process (see FIG. 34) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed, the process branches to S1201: Yes. As a result, the specific effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S417, when the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display is not the exact hit of the special symbol or the small hit of the special symbol (S417: No), the lottery result corresponding to the current variable display , Is the case of the removal of a special symbol. In this case, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S408) executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26). In this special symbol variation start process (S408), based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is performed Further, the effect pattern (variation pattern type) or the like of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of is acquired (S501). Next, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the special symbol high probability state A or B" (S502), and the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol high probability state A or B" For example (S502: Yes), among the special symbol big hit random number table 202a prepared two types, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for high probability is acquired (S503). On the other hand, if the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol" (S502: No), among the special symbol big hit random number table 202a prepared two types, the special symbol big hit random number for low probability The table 202a is acquired (S504).

  Then, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a obtained in the processing of S503 or S504 is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S501 (S505). As described above, three random number values "7, 307, 582" are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a big hit of the special symbol at low probability ing. In addition, in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability time, 30 random number values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178 as a random number value (hit value) which becomes a jackpot of the special symbol at high probability. , 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ". It is stored. In the process of S505, the random number value (hit value) stored in the obtained special symbol big hit random number table 202a is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 obtained in the processing of S501, and when they match It is determined that it is a jackpot of a special symbol.

  And the result of the comparison by processing of S505 judges whether it was a big hit of a special symbol (S506), and when it is a big hit of a special symbol (S506: Yes), the display mode at the time of a big hit is determined (S507) . In the process of S507, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S501 is compared with the special symbol jackpot type table 202b, and the jackpot type associated with the first hit type counter C2, that is, It is determined whether it is the 15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol, the 15R normal jackpot of the special symbol, or the collision of the special symbol. And the display mode (lighting state of LED37a) at the time of the big hit in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is set based on the big hit classification of the determined special symbol.

  In addition, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type of the special symbol, the jackpot type of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, bump hit) is decided as the stop type as it is By doing this, the display mode at the time of the jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is set. That is, if the jackpot type is "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot", the stop type is determined as "15R probability variation jackpot". In addition, if the jackpot type is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", the stop type is set as "15R normal jackpot", and if the jackpot type is "crash hit of special symbol", the stop type is "rapid hit" It is decided.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501 and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table 202d for the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S508). In the process of S508, among the various types of normal reach, super reach, and special reach, the special corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the process of S507 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S501. The variation pattern type at the time of the jackpot of the symbol is determined. When the variation pattern type is set in the process of S508, the variation time in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The relationship between the variation pattern type and the variation time is previously defined by a table or the like. When the process of S508 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  In the process of S506, when it is not the jackpot of the special symbol (S506: No), the special symbol small hitting random number table 202c is acquired (S509). Then, the acquired special symbol small hitting random number table 202c is compared with the value of the first hitting random number counter C1 obtained by the processing of S501 (S510). And the comparison result by processing of S510 judges whether it is a small hit of a special symbol (S511), and when it is a small hit of a special symbol (S511: Yes), stop classification at the time of a small hit of a special symbol Is determined (S512). In the process of S512, the stop type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol is determined as "small hit".

  Next, the variation pattern type at the time of the small hit of the special symbol is determined (S513). In the process of S513, the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal of the special symbol is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S501 to determine the variation pattern type at the time of a small hit of the special symbol. . In the case where the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" and the case where the regular symbol is short (in the hour symbol of the ordinary symbol), the special symbol is out (probability) The special symbol variation pattern table 202d for is used for comparison. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e is "the special symbol low probability state" and is the "ordinary symbol normal state", the special symbol variation pattern table 202d for the removal (ordinary) of the special symbol is compared Used for In addition, the fluctuation time in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern type. When the process of S513 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is not a small hit of the special symbol (S511: No), the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol is determined (S514). In the process of S514, the stop type selection table (not shown) is compared with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S501 to determine the stop type at the time of removal of the special symbol. Here, the type of stop is determined to be "completely out of place", "reach in front / back out of reach", or "reach other than in front / back out of reach". And if the process of S514 is complete | finished, next, the fluctuation pattern classification at the time of removal of a special symbol will be determined (S515). Since the process of S515 is the same process as the process of S513, the description thereof will be omitted. Then, when the process of S515 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S516.

  In the process of S516, a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern type determined by the process of S508, S513 or S515 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S516). Next, a stop type command indicating the stop type determined in the process of S507, S512 or S514 is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S517). And if processing of S517 is completed, this processing will be ended and it will return to special symbol variation processing (refer to Drawing 26).

  The commands set in the processing of S516 and S517 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 when the external output processing (see S1001 in FIG. 32) of the main processing described later is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the variation pattern command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based thereon, to the display control device 114. Send. As a result, variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and stop display of the third symbol are performed.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the through gate passing process (S107) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). This through gate passage processing (S107) judges the presence or absence of passage of the ball in the 2nd ball entrance 67, and when there is passage of the ball, the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored as a normal symbol holding ball storage area It is a process for storing (holding) in 203 b.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the second entry hole 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second ball entry port 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S602) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  And, in the process of S601, whether the ball has not passed through the second entrance 67 (S601: No), or in the process of S603, even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the normal symbol If the value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (S603: No), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second entrance 67 in the process of S601 (S601: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 in the process of S603 ( S603: Yes) The value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604).

  Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 Is stored in the area (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. Then, when the process of S605 is completed, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S701). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. In the process of S701, when it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit in the process of S701 (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702) If the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is a normal symbol short time state (normal symbol time shorting) (S708). If the current time is a normal symbol time short state (S708: Yes), S710 Move to the process of On the other hand, if the current time is not the time saving state of the normal symbol (S 708: No), it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203 e indicates the “special symbol high probability state A” (S 709). In the process of S709, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol high probability state A" (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S710. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state A" (S709: No), the process proceeds to S711.

  In the process of S710, the random pattern per random symbol table 202e for high probability is compared with the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 to determine the lottery result of the normal symbol (S710). It transfers to the process of S712. As described above, when the comparison is performed using the normal symbol per random symbol table 202e for high probability, if the value of the second type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", the symbol of the normal symbol is used. If it is determined that it is a hit and it is in the range of “0 to 4, 205 to 239”, it is determined that the symbol is normally out (see FIG. 7C).

  Moreover, in the process of S711, the lottery result of the normal symbol is determined by comparing the random number per table symbol 202e for low probability with the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 (S711) (S711 And the process of S712. As described above, when the comparison is performed using the normal symbol per random symbol table 202e for low probability time, if the value of the second category counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", the symbol of the normal symbol is If it is determined that it is a hit and it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", it is determined that the symbol is normally out (see FIG. 7C).

  In the process of S712, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol determined in the process of S710 or S711 is the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S712), and if it is the disconnection of the normal symbol (S712) : No), The display mode at the time of detachment of a normal symbol is set (S721). In the process of S 721, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal of the normal symbol is completed, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, in the process of S712, when it is a hit of a normal symbol (S712: Yes), the display mode when the normal symbol is hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol of "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S714). When it is determined in the process of S714 that the jackpot of the special symbol is being played (S714: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S719. In this embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol is hit, the process proceeds to S 719, and the number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time are set as in the case where the normal symbol is removed. Be done. As a result, the electric combination does not block the ball heading in the direction of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the ball enters the specific winning opening (large opening) more than the first ball entrance 64. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time are set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S714, if the present is not currently in the jackpot of the special symbol (S714: No), it is determined whether the current is the time symbol of the normal symbol If the current time is a time symbol of a normal symbol (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. On the other hand, if the present time is not the time saving state of the normal symbol (S715: No), it is determined whether the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the high probability state A of the special symbol" (S716). In the process of S716, when the gaming state flag 203e indicates the "special symbol high probability state A" (S716: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 203e does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state A" (S716: No), the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S717, the opening period of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S717). Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S 718), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). In the process of S719, the opening period of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S719). And the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the 2nd symbol display 83 is set to 30 seconds (S720), this processing is ended, and it returns to timer interruption processing (refer to Drawing 23).

  As described above, in this embodiment, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, the time of the variable display is very "30 seconds → 3 seconds" at the high probability of the normal symbol as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. As it becomes short and the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as "0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 It becomes a state.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S722). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S718 or the processing of S720.

  In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23). On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "o" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol turns out of the normal symbol, and the display mode is set by the processing of S721, the "x" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). When the stop display is set by the processing of S723, the second symbol display updating process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S713 or S721.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S724). If the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is a hit (S 724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized role associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S 725), this processing is ended, and timer interruption Return to processing (see FIG. 23). When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized combination is set by the process of S725, the opening / closing control of the electrically operated combination is executed when the motorized combination opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed next. Is started, and the open / close control of the motorized part is continued until the open time and the open number set in the process of S717 or S719 end. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the lottery result of the normal symbol this time is the deviation of the normal symbol (S724: No), the processing of S725 is skipped, the present processing is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) Return to).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (the sub controller such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, the wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S912. As described later in the process of S1015 in FIG. 32, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub control device (sub control device) (S912). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S913, S914), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (sub control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power-off (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls. In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 (S910), and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S911), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34, main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start processing of the main control apparatus 110 is completed will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing of main controller 110. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1011 and S1012 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, while the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the prize ball command set in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pre-reading command set in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, in the last 4 ms cycle, a fanfare command, a round number command, and an ending command set by the jackpot control processing described later are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1002), and then the jackpot control processing is executed (S1003). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, but the jackpot control process executes the jackpot effect, and the opening time and number of times of the specified winning opening (large opening port) 65a opened and closed during the jackpot. It is a process for setting. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Then, when the jackpot control process (S1003) is finished, next, the specific effect control process is executed (S1004). The details of the specific effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. However, the specific effect control process includes the execution of the specific effect and the opening time of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that opens and closes during the specific effect. It is a process for setting the number of times of release. In the present embodiment, the specific effect control process is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Then, when the specific effect control process (S1004) is finished, next, the large opening opening and closing process is executed (S1005). In the large opening opening and closing process, it becomes "big hit of special symbol (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit)", "a special hit of a special symbol" or "small hit of a special symbol", etc., special winning opening (large opening When the opening time and opening number of the mouth 65a are set, the specified winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed according to the set opening time and opening number.

  Then, when the large opening opening and closing process (S1005) is finished, next, the electric combination is opened and closed (S1006). In the motorized part opening and closing process, when the opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized part accompanying the first ball entrance 64 have been set by hitting a normal symbol (the second symbol), it is set. Open and close the motorized part according to the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  Then, when the large opening opening / closing process (S1006) is finished, next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern type is set by the process of S508 of the special symbol variation start process (refer to FIG. 27), the process of S513, or the process of S515, it corresponds to the variation pattern type The variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern type set by the process of S508 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the process of S513, or the process of S515 ends. As a result, when the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is set by the process of S412 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 26), the change display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, In the display mode set by the process of S507, the process of S512, or the process of S514 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the stop symbol (the first symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 ( Turn on).

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display updating process, when the second symbol lottery is executed and the variation time of the second symbol is set, the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is displayed in the second symbol display mode in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the second symbol lottery. The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 83.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No) SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1010: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main processing (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1011, S1012).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1012). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 ( That is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1009, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 30 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (a sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 or the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  In addition, the processing of S1009 is the timing when the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or the timing when one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  In this embodiment, in the main processing, winning ball counting signal, payout abnormal signal reading processing (S1002), jackpot control processing (S1003), specific effect control processing (S1004), large opening opening and closing processing (S1005), motorized role thing Opening and closing processing (S1006), first symbol control processing (S1007), and second symbol control processing (S1008) are executed, but some or all of these processings are not main processing but timer interrupt processing It may be configured to execute inside.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1003) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) of the main control device 110. In this jackpot control process (S1003), when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol, 15R normal jackpot of a special symbol), It is a process for setting the opening time and the number of times of opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that opens and closes during the jackpot.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S416 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the opening time and the opening number of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a are set (S1102).

  In the process of S1102, as the opening time of the specific winning a prize opening (large opening) 65a per round, "10 balls are won by 10 balls to the special winning opening (large opening) 65a" and "30 seconds after opening" Set until one of the conditions is met. Further, the specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to be opened 15 times (15 times).

  Next, the start of the open / close control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S1103). Here, when the start of the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set, the large opening opening / closing process (see S1005) of the above-described main process (see FIG. 32) is executed. The specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed under the conditions set in the above.

  Next, a fanfare command is set (S1104), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 32). The fanfare command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process described above (see FIG. 32). Sent towards. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, it transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is currently being played (S1105). During the jackpot of the special symbol, during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol, and during the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over And are included.

  In the process of S1105, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not in progress (S1105: No), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1105: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1106). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1106: Yes), a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1107). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the present process ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the above-described main process (see FIG. 32), the voice lamp control device 113 Sent towards.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1106, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1106: No), it is determined whether or not opening and closing of the 15 specified winning combinations (large opening) 65a has ended (S1108). In the process of S1108, when the opening and closing of 15 times of the specific winning a prize opening (large opening) is finished (S1108: Yes), it is the start timing of the ending effect, so the ending command is set (S1109). The process ends and returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 32). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 32) described above. Sent towards.

  When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When a display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when the opening and closing of the 15-specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is not finished (S1108: No), it is the timing to finish the big hit of the special symbol under execution It is determined (S1110). In the process of S1110, when it is the timing to end the jackpot of the special symbol under execution (S1110: Yes), the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S1111) and the lottery result of the special symbol this time It is determined whether or not it is "15R probability variation jackpot" of the special symbol (S1112).

  In the process of S1112, if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" (S1112: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e indicates "high probability state A of special symbol" Then, the game state flag 203e is set (S1113), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate "the high probability state A of the special symbol", if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "the 15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the special At the end of the jackpot of the symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol high probability state A".

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" (S1112: No), since the lottery result of this special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", the gaming state flag A game state flag 203e is set to indicate 203e as "the low probability state of the special symbol" (S1114). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate "the low probability state of the special symbol", when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol", the special symbol At the end of the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol low probability state".

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is "15R normal jackpot of special symbol", as the gaming state flag 203e indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol", the gaming state flag 203e Is set, but since the gaming state flag 203e is set to the “low probability state of special symbol” during the jackpot of the special symbol, the gaming state flag 203e is not set (does nothing) It is good.

  When the jackpot of the special symbol is started by the jackpot control processing shown in FIG. 33 above, the opening and closing conditions of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a per round can be set, and the specific winning opening (large opening) The opening and closing of the 65a can be set to be performed 15 times (15 times).

  Next, the specific effect control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the specific effect control process (S1004) executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) of the main control device 110. In the specific effect control process (S1004), when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", the specific winning combination, the specific winning combination that opens and closes during the specific effect The opening (large opening) 65a is a process for setting the opening time and the number of times of opening.

  In the specific control process, first, it is determined whether a specific effect is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S418 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the specific effect is set, it is determined that the specific effect is started. In the process of S1201, when the specific effect is started (S1201: Yes), the opening time and the opening number of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are set (S1202).

  In the process of S1202, "until 0.2 seconds have elapsed from opening" is set as the opening time of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a per round (around 1 time). Further, the specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is set to be opened 15 times (15 times). Next, the start of the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set (S1203), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the above-mentioned main processing (see FIG. 32). Here, when the start of the opening / closing control of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is set, the large opening opening / closing process (see S1005) of the above-described main process (see FIG. 32) is executed. The specific winning combination opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened and closed under the conditions set in the above.

  On the other hand, when the specific effect is not started in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the specific effect is currently performed (S1204). Here, “during specific effect” is a period during which specific effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. In the process of S1204, when the specific effect is not being performed (S1204: No), this process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, in the process of S1204, when the specific effect is being performed (S1204: Yes), it is determined whether the opening / closing of the fifteen specific winning opening (large opening) 65a has ended (S1205).

  In the process of S1205, when the opening / closing of the 15-specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is not finished (S1205: No), this process is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 32). On the other hand, when the opening and closing of the 15 specific winning a prize opening (large opening) 65a is finished (S1205: Yes), the end of the specific effect is set (S1206), the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "special It is determined whether or not it is a "pattern hit" (S1207).

  In the process of S1207, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "a sudden hit of a special symbol" (S1207: Yes), the gaming state flag 203e indicates "a high probability state B of a special symbol" The game state flag 203e is set (S1208), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing described above (see FIG. 32). Here, by setting the gaming state flag 203e so as to indicate "the high probability state B of the special symbol", when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "the hit of the special symbol", the specific effect At the end of the game, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B".

  On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol this time is not "the exact symbol of the special symbol" (S1207: No), since the lottery result of the special symbol this time is "the small hit of the special symbol" Without changing, the process ends and returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 32).

  When the specific effect is started by the specific effect control process shown in FIG. 34, the opening and closing conditions of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a per round can be set, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a Can be set to open and close for 15 rounds (15 times).

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 35, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the current start-up process is a main process to be described later (see FIG. 36) due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary stoppage”). It is determined whether it is started during the execution of the power-off process (S1420) (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 36, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1417 in FIG. 36), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1420. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1420 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1420 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. (From S1303), judging that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process shifts to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1420 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If the start of the program is started, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1420, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S1420 is performed (see S1419 in FIG. 36). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1420 is performed, the process of S1308 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1420 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310). The permission is set (S1311), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1310, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1310), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1311), it shifts to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the above-described startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 is completed will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing main processing of the audio lamp control device 113. When this main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous S1401 process was executed (S1401). If the millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the processing proceeds to S1412 without performing the processing of S1402 to S1411. In the process of S1401, it is the process concerning execution of display (rendering) to determine whether 1 millisecond has passed or not, although it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the variable display setting process of S1412, the special effect setting process of S1413, and the command determination process of S1414 in a short cycle. By performing the process of S1412 in a short cycle, it is possible to perform the setting relating to the variable performance without delay based on the command received by the command determination process. In addition, since the process of S1414 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  If one millisecond or more has passed in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), the various commands set in the process of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 in the previous 1 ms cycle (S1402) . Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1404) . The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1405 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1405, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting the hold lamp in accordance with the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high speed fluctuation period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and the rear surface image change for the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1407 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process ends, a vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1408). The vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring an input signal from a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13 to detect whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is vibrated.

  Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408), first, an output value (vibration level) is read from a vibration sensor (not shown) (S1501), and it is determined from the read output value whether the vibration level is a predetermined level or more. (S1502). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1502: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is ended, and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than the predetermined level (S1502: Yes), it is determined that vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10, and setting is made to output an alarm sound from the audio output device 226 (S1503) An error command for notifying the control device 114 of the occurrence of the vibration error is set (S1504), and the process returns to the main processing (FIG. 36). Thereby, in the display control device 31, a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image notifying of a vibration error is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 36, the description of the main processing is continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1408) is ended, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S1409), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1410). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting. Also, when the output of the alarm sound is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 37) (see S1503), the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output process, and the alarm sound is a voice It is output from the output device 226.

  After the process of S1410, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1409 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1410 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1412, the fluctuation display setting process is performed to set the fluctuation effect such as the display mode of the fluctuation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode of the stop display at the end of the fluctuation (S1412). The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display setting process, the special effect is set in the third symbol display device 81, or the special effect in progress is ended, and the special effect setting process is performed to set the special effect (S1413) ). The details of the special effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the special effect setting process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1414). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1414 is finished, the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is updated (S1415), and the process of updating the special effect lottery counter 223i is executed (S1416). The update of the successive announcement lottery counter 223k is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 127 each time the update processing is performed, and is performed so as to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 127). In addition, the special effect lottery counter 223i is updated by one each in the range of 0 to 149 each time the updating process is performed, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 149). Then, the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is referred to by the continuous advance notice determination process (see FIG. 39) described later, and is used to determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i is referred to by the special effect setting process (see FIG. 41) described later, and it is judged whether the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect which is once ended is restarted. Used for

  When the process of S1416 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1417). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1417 (S1417: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1419), and the power-off process is executed (S1420). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1421), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S1417 (S1417: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1418). If not (S1418: No), the process returns to S1401 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1418: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the main processing is not executed when the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1414) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, this command determination process (S1414) executes the process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110. In this process, when the stop type command is received from the main control device 110, the change start flag 223d is set to ON so that setting of the change effect to be executed is started. Further, when the prefetch command is received from the main control device 110, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110 It is determined whether or not (S1601). If the variation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1602), and the extracted variation pattern type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a of the RAM 223. It stores in fluctuation pattern classification storage area 223a2 (S1603). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). In the process of S1602, any one of “special reach”, “super reach”, “normal reach”, “long out”, and “short out” is extracted as the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type stored here is referred to when the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set up the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to indicatory control control equipment 114.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1601: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1604). When the stop type command is received (S1604: Yes), the change start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1605). Then, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1606), and the extracted stop type is stored in the stop type storage area 223a1 in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a of the RAM 223 (S1607). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). In addition, in the process of S1606, other than "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", "very accurate hit", "small hit", "completely out (out)", "back and forth out of reach" (outside) Any one of reach (disengagement) is extracted as the stop type. The stop type extracted here is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 40) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1604: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1608). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1608: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110 (variation display The number of holding times N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609). Further, in the process of S1609, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1609 ends, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entry slot 64, the voice in the process of S1609 every time the starting winning is detected. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110.

  In the process of S1608, if the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1608: No), it is next determined whether or not the pre-read command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1610). Then, when the pre-reading command is received (S1610: Yes), from the received pre-reading command, the prediction result of the lottery of the special symbol (prediction result of success or failure and prediction result of stop type) and its fluctuation pattern type The prediction results are extracted, and they are stored as prefetching information in the hold area of the prefetching information storage area 223j (S1611). Then, the continuous advance notice determination process is executed (S1612), this process is ended, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins to the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), the main controller 110 acquires the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, and the values are acquired. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. And when data (each value of each counter C1-C3, CS1) is stored in the reserve area of special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a in main control 110, separately from the lottery of the original special symbol, the reserve area From the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the above, various information (appropriate, stop type, variation pattern type) obtained when the lottery of the original special symbol is performed is read (predicted).

  Then, when the pre-reading ends in the main control unit 110, a pre-reading command indicating various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern type) obtained by pre-reading is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pre-reading command, it extracts from the pre-reading command the prediction result of the lottery of the special symbol (the prediction result of the pass / fail and the prediction result of the stop type) and the prediction result of the fluctuation pattern type Then, they are stored as prefetching information in the reserve area of the prefetching information storage area 223j.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, in the continuous notice determination process, the prefetch information stored in the prefetch information storage area 223j last, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, and the continuous notice lottery counter Based on the value of 223 k, it is determined whether or not to perform a series of continuous advance notice effects with respect to the fluctuation effects pending at that time.

  In the process of S1610, when the prefetch command is not received (S1610: No), it is next determined whether the fanfare command is received from the main control device 110 (S1613). When the fanfare command is received (S1613: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 sets a display fanfare command for starting the jackpot effect (S1614), and this processing ends, and the main processing described above Return to (see FIG. 36).

  The display fanfare command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the display control device 114 is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described above. Sent towards. When the display control device 114 receives the display fanfare command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a fanfare effect.

  On the other hand, if the fanfare command has not been received in the process of S1613 (S1613: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1615). When the round number command is received (S1615: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1616), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1617), end this processing, and return to the main processing described above (see FIG. 36).

  The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the display control device is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) described above. Sent towards 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1618). When the ending command is received (S1618: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 sets a display ending command to start ending effect (S1619).

  The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1618, when the ending command is not received (S1618: No), it is determined whether or not other commands are received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S1620) ), Return to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice determination process (S1612) executed in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 36). As described above, the continuous advance notice determination process (S1612) determines whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect when the prefetch command is received.

  In this continuous advance notice determination process, first, it is determined whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) which is a predetermined condition to be described later is satisfied, and any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, next, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect. If it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is started here, the continuous advance notice effect is started. S1702 to S1710 described later are processes for determining whether any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, and S1711 to S1716 described later start continuous notice effects. It is the process for determining whether to do.

  In addition, (condition 1) is that execution of continuous advance notice production is not set, and (condition 2) is a "big hit of the special symbol (15 R probability variation big hit when all set continuous advance notice effects are finished Or, 15R normal jackpot) and, furthermore, between the fluctuation effect (holding ball) corresponding to the newly received prefetch command and the last fluctuation effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set , There are two or more fluctuation effects (holding balls) (ie, the difference between the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 3 or more) (condition 3) ) Is “out of special symbol” when all set continuous announcement effects are finished, and further, among the prefetching information extracted from the newly received prefetch command, the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is “ Special figure Jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, or, 15R usually jackpot) is to be. "

  In the continuous advance notice determination process, first, the prefetching information stored in the prefetching information storage area 223 j (that is, the prediction result of the drawing of the special symbol and the prediction result of the variation pattern type) is read (S 1701). In addition, the pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223 j is specified based on the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b. That is, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 1, the pre-reading information stored in the holding first area is specified as the pre-reading information finally stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223j. Similarly, when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 2, the pre-reading information stored in the holding second area is stored in the holding third area when the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 3. If the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 4, the prefetching information stored in the reserved fourth area is specified as the prefetching information finally stored in the prefetching information storage area 223j.

  Next, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1701, it is determined whether the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1702), When the prediction result of the design success or failure is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1702: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S1704. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is “slip off the special symbol, a small hit on the special symbol, or a collision on the special symbol” (S1702: No), the stop type read in the process of S1701 It is determined whether the prediction result is "long reach out" (S1703). In the process of S1703, when the prediction result of the stop type is "reach before and after (reach)" (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, if the prediction result of the type of stop is not “back and forth out of reach (out)” but other types of stop (S1703: No), this processing ends and the command determination processing described above (see FIG. 38) Return to).

  In the process of S1704, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is substituted into a variable A (S1704), and then the value of the continuous notice number counter 2231 is substituted into a variable B (S1705). Then, it is judged whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 2231) is 0 (S1706). If the value of the variable B is 0 (S1706: Yes), the continuous notice effect is executed. Since the setting is not made and the above (condition 1) is satisfied, the process proceeds to the process of S1711, and it is determined by the processes after S1711 whether to start the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1706, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice number counter 2231) is not 0, ie, 1 or more (S1706: No), the execution of the continuous notice effect is already set. Therefore, it is next determined whether or not the value of the jackpot flag 223m after advance notification is on (S1707). As described above, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is ON, the gaming state after the change presentation after the continuous notice presentation is performed in all the change indications for which the continuous notice effect is set is “special Indicates that the jackpot of the pattern (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) will be in the state, and if the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off, continuous in all the fluctuation effects for which the continuous notice effect is set It indicates that the game state after the change effect after the advance effect is performed is in the “special symbol out” state.

  And, in the process of S1707, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is on (S1707: Yes), when all the continuous notice effects set have ended, the "special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, Or, because it becomes 15R normal big hit) ”, furthermore, the difference between the value of variable A (ie special symbol holding ball number counter 223b) and the value of variable B (ie consecutive notice number counter 2231) is calculated, The difference is substituted into a variable C (S1708). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1709). As a result, when the variable C is 3 or more (S1709: Yes), the fluctuation effect corresponding to the received prefetch command (pending It can be determined that two or more variable effects (held balls) exist between the ball) and the last variable effects (held balls) for which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is currently set. Therefore, it can be determined that the above (condition 2) is satisfied from the results of the processing of S1706, the processing of S1707, and the processing of S1709, so the processing shifts to the processing of S1711 and continuous notice effect starts by the processing of S1711 and later. Decide whether to

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1709, when the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) (S1709: No), the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command is continuous at this time Since two or more variable effects (held balls) do not exist between the final changed effects (held balls) for which the execution of the preliminary effects is set, the processing of S1706, the processing of S1707, and the processing of S1709 From the results, it can be determined that none of the above (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect.

  In the process of S1707, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the advance notice is on (S1707: Yes), when all the continuous advance notice effects set have ended, the special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, or Because the 15R normal jackpot), the “special jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” temporarily interrupts the sense of expectation of the continuous preview effect held by the player. However, if (condition 2) is satisfied, that is, between the fluctuation effect (hold ball) corresponding to the received prefetch command and the last fluctuation effect (hold ball) for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set If two or more variable effects (holding balls) exist, it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notification effect. Therefore, only in such a case, if it is determined that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, in two or more change effects to be performed after the "special symbol jackpot (15R positive variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" Be sure to display the chance eye as a stop symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous advance notice effect, and to strengthen the expectation which the player feels to the continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1707, when the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off (S1707: No), it becomes "out of the special symbol" when all the continuous notice effects set are finished. Therefore, it is further determined, among the pre-read information read out in the process of S1701, whether the predicted result of the special symbol's success or failure is "the special symbol jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1710). And when the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1710: Yes), the special reading information read out in the process of S1701 Since the prediction result of the design success or failure is “big hit of the special symbol (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)”, the condition of the condition 3 is described above from the results of the process of S1706, the process of S1707, and the process of S1709. It can be judged to be satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1711, and it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect by the process after S1711.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1710, when the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol, the small hit of the special symbol, or the collision of the special symbol" (S1710: No), the processing of S1707 From the results of the process of S1708 and the process of S1711, it can be determined that none of the above (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the process ends without determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect, and the process returns to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). Here, if the value of the jackpot flag 223m after the notice is off (S1707: No), it becomes "out of the special symbol" when all the set continuous notice effect is finished. In such a situation, among the prefetching information extracted from the newly received prefetching command, the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "big hit of the special symbol (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)" Since the start of continuous notice production is determined with a predetermined probability, the continuous notice production in progress is finished and it becomes "out of special symbol", and the continuous notice production is continued and "special symbol is performed again. Can be prevented. Therefore, it can suppress that the state which becomes "off of a special symbol" generate | occur | produces continuously after completion | finish of continuous advance notice production. In addition, it is expected that the player will be "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" when the continuous advance announcement effect is "off of the special symbol" and the continuous advance announcement effect is subsequently performed. The feeling can be made strong, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

  As described above, in the processing of S1702 to S1710, it is determined whether or not any one of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) described above is satisfied, and any of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is If not satisfied, the continuous advance notice determination process is ended, and the process returns to the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 38). Thus, when none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the processing after S1711 for determining the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is not executed, and therefore, the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is reliably and easily performed. It is possible not to be Moreover, since the process after S1711 is abbreviate | omitted, the increase in the processing load in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 can be suppressed.

  Next, in the process of S1711 to S1713, continuous notice is made from among two continuous notice determination tables 222d (continuous notice determination table 222d for jackpot of special symbol or continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of special symbol). The continuous advance notice determination table (see FIG. 13) used to determine the start of the effect is selected.

  First, in the process of S1711, it is determined whether the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol (15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)" among the prefetched information read in the process of S1701 ( S1711). And, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "the special symbol jackpot (15R positive variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" (S1711: Yes), as a continuous notice determination table used to determine the start of continuous notice effect start , And selects the continuous notice determination table 222d for the jackpot of the special symbol (S1712). On the other hand, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "out of the special symbol, a small hit of the special symbol, or a sudden hit of the special symbol" (S1711: No), continuous notice used to determine start of continuous notice effect start As a determination table, a continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of a special symbol is selected (S1713).

  When the continuous notice determination table is selected by the process of S1711 to S1713, next, the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is acquired (S1714). Then, the continuous notice determination table (continuous notice determination table 222d for big hit of special symbol or continuous notice determination table 222d for removal of special symbol) selected in the process of S 1712 or the process of S 1713, and the special symbol holding ball The continuous advance notice determination range is specified based on the value of the number counter 223b (the number N of holdings of variable display), and the continuous advance notice determination range is compared with the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k (S1715).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, and it is determined whether to start the continuous advance notice effect (S1716). If it is determined in the process of S1716 that the value of the continuous advance notice lottery counter 223k is not included in the continuous advance notice determination range and the continuous advance notice effect is not started (S1716: No), the process after S1717 is skipped and the command described above It returns to the determination process (see FIG. 38). That is, the setting of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is held as it is. Therefore, if there is a holding ball for which the setting for performing the fluctuation production advance notice is present, the continuous advance notice effect is performed on the holding ball, and if such a retention ball does not exist, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. Absent.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1716, when the value of the continuous notice lottery counter 223k is included in the continuous notice determination range and it is determined to start the continuous notice effect (S1716: Yes), the number of special symbol holding balls in the continuous notice frequency counter 223l. The value of the counter 223b is set (S1717). Here, by setting the value of the holding ball number counter 223b in the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 by the process of S1717, all the fluctuation effects previously held before the fluctuation effect corresponding to the prefetch command received this time are continuously performed. The execution of the notice effect is set. In other words, it is possible to display the chance symbol on the third symbol display device 81 over all the fluctuation effects corresponding to the holding balls held before the holding balls corresponding to the prefetch command received this time.

  Next, it is judged whether the prediction result of the success or failure of the special symbol is “the jackpot of the special symbol (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)” among the prefetched information read out in the process of S1701 (S1718). And, if the prediction result of the special symbol is "big hit (15 probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit)" (S1718: Yes), set the jack hit flag 223m after advance notice (S1719), this processing And return to the command determination process described above (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, if the prediction result of the special symbol's success or failure is "off special symbol, small hit of special symbol, or special symbol hit" (S1718: No), set the jackpot flag 223m to OFF after notice (S1720) This process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 38) described above.

  When all the set continuous announcement effects are finished by the processing of S1719 or S1720, "is the jackpot of the special symbol (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" or "special symbol of It is possible to set the jackpot flag 223 m after notice as to whether it is out, the small symbol of the special symbol, or the collision of the special symbol. As a result, when the continuous advance notice determination process is executed again and the process of S1707 is executed, the above-described (condition 2) or (condition 3) is performed using the value of the after-announce jackpot flag 223m set here. It can be judged whether or not it is satisfied.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing variation display setting processing (S1412) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113. The fluctuation display setting process (S1412) is a process for setting the fluctuation effect such as the display mode of the fluctuation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 or the display mode of the stop display at the end of the fluctuation.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (ie, off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are received from the main control device 110 Since the process is not performed, the present process is ended, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is stopped from the type and fluctuation The pattern type is acquired (S1803).

  Next, it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot” (S1804), and the stop type acquired in the processing of S1803 is “15R probability variation jackpot”, Alternatively, in the case of "15R normal big hit" (S1804: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol low probability state" (S1805).

  In the process of S1805, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the high probability state A or B of the special symbol" (S1805: No), the process proceeds to S1808. On the other hand, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates other than the “special symbol low probability state” (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the small hitting after number fluctuation counter 223h is 100 or less (S1806) .

  In the process of S1806, when the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h exceeds 100 (S1806: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1808. On the other hand, if the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 100 or less (S1806: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1807).

  In the process of S1807, when the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1807: Yes), the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed is determined as "Junken effect E" (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1818. Do. In addition, when the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to be “Janken effect E” in S1810, in the fluctuation effect, although the character representing the player (the player side) loses to Junken, an effect to be won is finally performed. . On the other hand, when the special effect in-progress flag 223e is off (S1807: No), the process proceeds to S1808. In the process of S1808, the effect pattern table 222c (see FIG. 10A) for the jackpot of the special symbol is compared with the variation pattern type acquired in the process of the probability continuous number counter 223f and S1803 (S1808).

  And the display mode corresponding to the condition of the variation pattern type acquired by the processing of the probability continuous number counter 223f and S1803 among the display modes defined in the special design jackpot effect pattern table 222c, the variation to be executed It determines as a display mode of an effect (S1809), and transfers to the process of S1818. In the process of S1809, for example, when the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is normal reach (20 seconds), “no Janken rendition” is to be executed as a variation effect regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. decide. If the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1 and the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is super reach (90 seconds), “Junken effect B” is determined as the variation effect to be executed. . If the display mode of the variable effect is determined to be “Janken effect A to D” in S1809, in the variable effect, an effect is produced in which the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Janken.

  Further, in the process of S1804, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S1804: No), the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is "probable" It is determined whether it is a hit (S1811). In the process of S1811, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "probable hit" (S1811: Yes), 1 is converted to the probability continuous count counter 223f (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1815. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S1811, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is not "accurate" (S1811: No), it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1803 is "small hit" S1813). In the process of S1813, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "small hit" (S1813: Yes), the process proceeds to S1815.

  In the process of S1813, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is not "small hit" (S1813: No), the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "out (complete out It is the case of "other reach". In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive notice number counter 2231 is 2 or more (S1814). In the process of S1814, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is 2 or more (S1814: Yes), since the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the change effect, the display of the change effect to be executed The mode is set to "chance eye effect" (S1817), and the process proceeds to the process of S1818.

  When the process of S1818 is executed, in the process of S1821 to be described later, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110. The symbol on the middle line L2 is set to "3" "4" "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1. Thereby, the stop symbol which becomes a chance eye can be displayed at the time of a stop of change production in the third symbol display device 81 as a continuous advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1814, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 223l is less than 2 (S1814: No), when the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is executed is executed (the continuous notice frequency counter 223l If the value is 1) or the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set (the value of the continuous advance frequency counter 223l is 0). In this case, the process proceeds to the process of S1815.

  In the process of S1815, the effect pattern table 222c (see FIG. 10B) for removal of the special symbol is compared with the fluctuation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 (S1815). Then, among the display modes specified in the effect pattern table 222c for removal of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the condition of the fluctuation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed. (S1816), the process proceeds to S1818. In the process of S1816, for example, when the fluctuation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is short (5 seconds), the fluctuation effect “Janken no effect” should be executed regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Decide as. If the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S1803 is super reach (90 seconds), “Junken effect A” is determined as the variation effect to be executed regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. In addition, even if the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to be "Junken effect A" in S1816, since the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the character representing the player (self side) in the fluctuation effect. There will be a production that loses to Janken.

  In addition, when the process of S1816 is executed, the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 in the process of S1821 described later. Instead, it is set to “reach where reach occurs (reach before or after reach or reach other than before and after)”.

  In the process of S1818, it is determined whether the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1818), and if the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1818: Yes), 1 is added to the small hitting after fluctuation counter 223h. Then (S1819), the process proceeds to S1820. On the other hand, if the after small hit flag 223g is off (S1818: No), the process of S1819 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1820.

  In the process of S1820, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the display mode of the variation display determined in the process of S1809, S1810, S1816 or S1817, and the command is displayed It sets to transmit to the control device 114 (S1820). When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the third symbol display device 81 executes the third symbol variation display in the display pattern of the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Control the display.

  Next, based on the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1821). . In the case where the process of S1816 is executed and the "Junken effect A" is determined as the change effect to be executed, the stop type is replaced with the display stop type command indicating the stop type acquired in the process of S1803. A display stop type command is generated to indicate that "reach is out of reach (reach before or after reach or reach other than back and forth)". In addition, when the process of S1817 is executed, instead of the display stop type command indicating the stop type acquired in the process of S1803, a display stop type command indicating that the stop type is a chance eye is generated. . When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the change design is stopped so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Control the display.

  When the process of S1821 ends, next, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1 (S1822), and the data stored in the pre-reading information storage area 223j is shifted (S1823). In the process of S1823, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223j is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted (moved) in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, etc. ).

  When the process of S1823 is finished, it is next determined whether the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 1 or more (S1824), and if the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 1 or more (S1824: Yes), the value of the consecutive notice number counter 2231 is decremented by 1 (S1825), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36) described above. On the other hand, when the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 0 (S1824: No), the process of S1825 is skipped, the process is ended, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36).

  When the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" by the variation display setting process shown in FIG. 40 above and the variation display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f Regardless of the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display, any one of “no Janken effect, Janken effect A” can be determined as the display mode of the fluctuation display.

  More specifically, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" For example, "Junken effect A" can be executed in the variable display. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Can be determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect.

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" Although it is a counter which counts the number, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined irrespective of the probability continuous number counter 223f.

  Therefore, the player can not recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "rapid hit of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player can not grasp what kind of gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the removal of the special symbol) is made. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the special event from the next time onward It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the lottery result of the symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Moreover, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol (15 probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" by the variable display setting process shown in FIG. 40 described above, and the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 When it is performed, any one of "no Janken effect, Janken effect A to E" can be determined as the display mode of the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern type of the variable display and the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f. .

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot)" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation If the display variation type is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)" and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variation display is "Junken Effect A Furthermore, the display mode can be determined such that the character representing the player (own side) wins over Janken. Similarly, if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be "Junken effect B", and if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variation effect is If the "Junken effect C" is determined, and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (own side) is Janken respectively. You can decide the display mode to win the game.

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode of the variable display (type of Janken effect) is determined by the value of the estimated continuous number of times counter 223f.

  Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", if the player pays attention to the type of "Junken effect" to be executed in the third symbol display device 81, the previous "special" It is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the special symbol hit" from the jackpot of the symbol to the current "big hit of the special symbol". Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player then displays the change effect when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Depending on the mode (ie, the type of the Janken effect), it can be grasped in which gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) was made.

  Hereinafter, an example of contents that the player can grasp will be specifically described. As described above, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect A", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous time. It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has not become "the hit of special symbol" even once from "the jackpot of the special symbol" to the present "big hit of the special symbol". In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the player When the character representing the side wins the Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) has been made in the latest gaming state where it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Then, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when a special symbol of about 100 times is drawn, luckily, it may be doubtful that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol". is there.

  In addition, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Although it has become), there is a possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" at last, when the lottery of the special symbol is not made. .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Junken. Although the player is in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lucky result of this special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" It can be understood that Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct. Also, the player can have a satisfaction that he is lucky to be elected with a low probability of winning.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" and the "special symbol big hit" of this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect B", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and among the special symbol lotterys up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbols is “special symbol There is a high possibility of doubting that it was a sudden hit of That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Because it had become, there is a high possibility of doubting that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become twice in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect C," and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has been twice in the "special symbol hit" during the last "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". . In addition, the player is twice due to the “rapid hit of the special symbol” in each of the specific effects executed within the difficult-to-understand period, including when it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It can be understood that the rest was due to the "special symbol small hit".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, Because it has become 1/30), if the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility of doubting that the special symbol lottery result has become "the special symbol jackpot".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol," including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time) It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the hit of the special symbol" twice among the lottery of.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". On the other hand, the probability of being "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot" is "1/3", and the probability of being the "special symbol of 15R regular jackpot" is "1/2". Thus, when it comes to "big hit of special symbol", "15 R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15 R usually big hit of special symbol", rather than being judged as "striking hit of special symbol" The probability of being judged as “is higher.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, of the special symbol lottery up to a few times (for example, the third time), I am a little disappointed at the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol was "the special symbol's hit" twice. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become three or more times in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect D", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player grasps that the lottery result of the special symbol has been three or more times in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". it can. In addition, the player is at least three times among the specific effects performed within the difficult-to-understand period, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by the “rapid hit of the special symbol”. It can be understood that it was something, and others were by "small hit of a special symbol".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the fourth time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the fourth time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that "the jackpot of the special symbol" is immediately obtained after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth time) It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol hit" more than three times among the lottery.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". That is, the probability of being determined as "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" is higher than being determined as "a special symbol's striking hit".

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, the lottery of the special symbol up to the first time (for example, the fourth time) I am also very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol was "a hit of a special symbol" more than three times. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the character on the other side, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" from the "big hit of the special symbol" to the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way. Furthermore, it means that the lottery of the special symbol has not exceeded 100 times since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the player When the character representing the side wins the character on the other side, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in the “low probability state of the special symbol”. In addition, the player, once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", and thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become a "falling hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times. , It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Then, as described above, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then a lottery of about 100 special symbols is made, it is lucky that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbols", There is a possibility of having a question.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, although it has become 1/30), it has not been won very much, and it is doubtful that the lottery result of the special symbol finally becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol is made this time. There is a risk of having

  In such a case, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins over the character on the other side. Although the player is in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol of It can be understood that it has become a jackpot. Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct.

  In addition, the player can grasp that "the jackpot of the special symbol" has been made by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he is elected with a low probability of winning or a satisfaction that he is lucky.

  Also, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Then, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second time (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The player is very different from the forecast, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is " It can be grasped that it became a jackpot of special symbols.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the drawing of the special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped. In the situation, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very lucky and he was very fortunate to have won the prize in a very rare situation, although the idea of the player was largely out of place.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation as described above occurs, the player can not grasp the situation. Therefore, the player, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special symbol high probability state B", the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), so the lottery result of the special symbol is " I thought that it would be a jackpot of a special symbol, and it might end with it.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is a reach (90 seconds) or a "special reach (120 seconds)", it is comprised so that either of "Junken presentation A-E" may be performed in the fluctuation display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the current situation of the special symbol has become a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", When the lottery result is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player is in what gaming state the lottery of the special symbol (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made according to the type of "Janken production". I can understand. Therefore, even if the player is asked to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery). You can solve the question. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. As a result, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is If the player is determined to be a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol hit", it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the exact hit of the special symbol" The player does not have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player wins the "small hit of special symbol".

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state A" state, and even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "jumping", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high in special symbol It becomes "high probability state B of special symbol" from probability state A ". On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as the "special symbol high probability state A".

  Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is "certain hit of the special symbol" Or, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because it becomes a small hit of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of the special symbol or "B" can be understood. Therefore, in this case, there is little possibility of causing the player to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery).

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", any one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured as follows. And, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified to what kind of circumstances the jackpot of the special symbol this time has become, but during the jackpot effect "Janken Effects A ~ E" is executed It is good. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special effect setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1413) executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) of the audio lamp control device 113. The special effect setting process (S1413) is a process for setting a special effect, such as executing a special effect in the third symbol display device 81 or ending the special effect being executed.

  In the special effect setting process, first, the type of stop is acquired from the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a (S1901). Next, it is determined whether the specific effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and it is the end timing of the specific effect (S1902). In the process of S1902, if it is the end timing of the specific effect (S1902: Yes), it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is "probable hit" (S1903).

  In the process of S1903, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "immediate hit" (S1903: Yes), the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the high probability state B of the special symbol", the gaming state flag The setting 223 c is set (S 1904), and the process shifts to the processing of S 1906.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1903, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is not "probable hit" (S1903: No), the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is "small hit". In this case, the after small hit flag 223g is set to ON (S1905), and the process proceeds to S1906.

  In addition, in the process of S1902, when it is not the end timing of the specific effect (S1902: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81 and it is the end timing of the fluctuation effect (S1909).

  In the process of S1909, when it is not the end timing of the fluctuation effect (S1909: No), the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 are in the jackpot effect and the jackpot effect It is determined whether it is the end timing (S1910). In the process of S1910, when it is not the end timing of the jackpot effect (S1910: No), this process ends without doing anything, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, in the process of S1910, if it is the end timing of the jackpot effect (S1910: Yes), it is determined whether the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1911).

  In the process of S1911, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1911: Yes), the game state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol high probability state A", the game The status flag 223c is set (S1912). And "the back image for high probability" is applied as a back image which should be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81 (S1913), and it shifts to processing of S1916.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1911, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" (S1911: No), the stop type is "15R normal jackpot". In this case, the game state flag 223c is set so that the game state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol low probability state" (S1914). Then, the "time-lapse back image" is applied as the back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1915), and the process proceeds to S1916.

  In the process of S1916, the probability continuous number counter 223f and the small hitting post variation counter 223h are cleared (S1916). Next, the after small hit flag 223g is set to OFF (S1917), and the process proceeds to S1919. Then, in the process of S1909, if it is the end timing of the fluctuation effect (S1909: Yes), the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "out (complete out, reach back and forth, reach other than back and forth)" It is determined whether or not (S1921).

  In the process of S1921, when the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is not "displacement (complete removal, reach before out-of-front reach, reach other than out-of-front out)" (S1919: No), the stop type obtained in the process of S1901 is It is determined whether it is a hit or a "small hit" (S1931). In the process of S1931, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is "perspective or small hit" (S1931: Yes), a specific effect start command is set (S1932), and this process is ended. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  The specific effect start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives this specific effect start command, the third symbol display device 81 executes display (specific effect) indicating that the second special gaming state is in progress.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1931, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1901 is not “certain hit or small hit” (S1931: No), this process is ended and the main process described above (see FIG. 36). Return to).

  In the process of S1921, if the stop type acquired in the process of S1901 is "disengagement (complete disengaging, reach before out-of-back reach, reach other than out-of-front out of reach)" (S1921: Yes), whether to end the special effect under execution This is a case where it is determined whether or not to resume the special effect once it has been terminated.

  In this case, first, it is determined whether the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1922). In the process of S1922, if the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on (S1922: Yes), the special effect is currently being executed. In this case, the special effect end determination table 222a (see FIG. 12A) is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i (S1929) to determine whether or not the special effect being executed is to be ended. .

  As described above, the special effect end determination table 222a is a table for determining whether or not the special effect is to be ended when the special effect is being executed. In the special effect end determination table 222a, three random number values for determining the end of the special effect are defined, and the range is “0 to 2”. In addition, the range of the random number value does not change regardless of the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol. The total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which the end of the special effect is determined is three, so the specials currently being executed The probability that the effect ends is “1/50”.

  In the process of S1929, the random number value determined in the special effect end determination table 222a is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i, and when they match, it is determined that the custom effect under execution is ended. Then, as a result of comparison by the processing of S1929, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the special effect being executed is ended (S1930). In the process of S1930, when it is not determined to end the special effect in progress (S1930: No), it is a case where the special effect in progress is continued. In this case, the present process ends, and the process returns to the main process described above (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1930 that the special effect in progress is to be ended (S1930: Yes), the process proceeds to S1918.

  Further, in the process of S1922, when the special effect in-progress flag 223e is off (S1922: No), in order to determine whether the special effect is temporarily ended, the value of the after-small variation counter 223h Or, check the game state flag 223c. First, it is determined whether the value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923), and if the value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923: Yes), shift to the processing of S1925. On the other hand, in the process of S1923, if the value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is not 1 or more and 100 or less (S1923: No), does the gaming status flag 223c indicate "high probability status B of special symbol"? Is determined (S1924).

  In the process of S1924, when the gaming state flag 223c does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state B" (S1924: No), the process proceeds to S1927. On the other hand, in the process of S1924, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol high probability state B" (S1924: Yes), the process proceeds to S1925. In the process of S1925, the special effect resumption judgment table 222b (refer to FIG. 12B) and the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i are compared (S1925), and it is judged whether or not the special effect once ended is resumed. Do.

  As described above, the special effect resumption determination table 222 b is a table for determining whether or not the special effect once ended is resumed after the special effect is temporarily ended. In the special effect resumption determination table 222b, five random number values for determining restart of the special effect are defined, and the range is “50 to 54”. The range of the random number does not change regardless of the high probability state or low probability state of the special symbol. The total number of random numbers that can be acquired by the special effect lottery counter 223i is 150 of “0 to 149”, and among them, the total number of random values for which restart of the special effect is determined is five, so the special once ended The probability of resuming the effect is "1/30".

  In the process of S1925, the random number value determined in the special effect resumption determination table 222b is compared with the value of the special effect lottery counter 223i, and when they match, it is determined that the special effect once ended is resumed. Then, as a result of the comparison in the process of S1925, it is determined whether it is determined to resume the special effect that has once ended (S1926). In the process of S1926, if it is not determined that the special effect which has once ended is to be resumed (S1926: No), the state where the special effect is ended is continued. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1927.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1926, when it is determined that the special effect which has once ended is to be resumed (S1926: Yes), the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, "back image for special effect" is applied as the back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1906), and the back image change indicating the type of the applied back image The command is set (S1907).

  The back image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives this back surface image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to “the back surface image for special effect”.

  Here, when the “rear image for special effect” is applied, the lighting and blinking patterns of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the audio output device (speaker not shown, etc.) 226 (see FIG. 5). The sound (music) output from) is also changed to one corresponding to the "rear image for special effect". As a result, it is different from the case where the “rear image for high probability”, the “rear image for short time”, and the “rear image for low probability” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A presentation is performed. Then, when the process of S1907 ends, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to ON (S1908), this process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36).

  Then, in the process of S1927, it is determined whether the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the high probability state B of the special symbol" or whether the after small hit flag 223g is on (S1927). In the process of S1927, when the gaming state flag 223c indicates the "special symbol high probability state B", or when the small hitting after flag 223g is on (S1927: Yes), this process is ended. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36) described above.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1927, when the gaming state flag 223c does not indicate the "special symbol high probability state B" and the small hitting after flag 223g is off (S1927: No), the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether "the time saving state of the normal symbol" has ended because the predetermined number of times of fluctuation has ended in (S1928). In the process of S1928, when "the time saving state of the normal symbol" is not finished because the predetermined number of times of variation is finished (S1928: No), this process is finished and the main process described above (see FIG. 36) Return to

  On the other hand, in the process of S1928, when the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is finished because the predetermined number of times of variation is finished (S1928: Yes), the process proceeds to S1918. In the process of S1918, "a back image for low probability" is applied as a back image to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S1918), and the process shifts to the process of S1919. In the process of S1919, a back image change command indicating the type of the back image applied in the process of S1913, the process of S1915, or the process of S1918 is set (S1919).

  The back image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1402) of the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives this back surface image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the back surface image of the type indicated by the back surface image change command.

  For example, if the “rear image for high probability” is applied in the process of S1913, the lighting and blinking patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33, an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226 (along with that) The sound (music) output from (see FIG. 5) is also changed to one corresponding to the “rear image for high probability”. As a result, an effect different from that when the “rear image for special effect” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. The same applies to “rear image for time reduction” and “rear image for low probability” as well as “rear image for high probability”. Then, when the process of S1919 ends, the special effect in-progress flag 223e is set to OFF (S1920), this process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36).

  When the special effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 by the special effect setting process shown in FIG. 41 described above, and the specific effect is ended, the third symbol display In the device 81, the audio output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, special effects can be started subsequently. That is, the “rear image for special effect” can be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, if the jackpot effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 in the state where the special effect is being executed, the special effect which is being executed is ended there. Do.

  In the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, when the jackpot effect is finished, the rear image according to the jackpot type is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 it can. Specifically, if the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “high-probability back image” can be displayed. Also, if the jackpot type is “15R normal jackpot”, “time-saving short-time back image” can be displayed.

  In addition, in the state where the special effect is being executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, when the fluctuation effect is finished, the special effect with a probability of 1/50. Can be ended once. That is, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed from "back image for special effect" to "back image for low probability". In addition, after the special effect is ended once, when the fluctuation effect is ended in the third symbol display device 81, the value of the after-small change counter 223h is 1 or more and 100 or less, or the game state flag 223c is If the "special symbol high probability state B" is shown, the special effect can be resumed with the probability of "1/30". That is, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed from "back image for low probability" to "back image for special effect".

  In addition, when the special effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227, and the special effect is not ended once, the fluctuation effect is ended, If the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is ended because the predetermined number of times of variation has ended, the back image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to "low" from the "back image for time saving" It can be changed to "Rear Image for Probability". As described above, in the present embodiment, the effects (including the display of the rear image) performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 can be made various. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect not to make the player get bored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special effect in progress is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed at the timing when the fluctuation effect ends, but the special effect in progress is performed within the period of the fluctuation effect. It may be ended, or the special effect once ended may be resumed. That is, if the special effect in progress is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed in the execution unit of the fluctuation effect, it may be ended at any time, or may be restarted at any time.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 55. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2001 in FIG. 42). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 42) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 43, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after the processing is repeated a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a at power on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, next, the power on change image is generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. (S2005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 53A) described later. The resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3502 of FIG. 53A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Accordingly, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the simplified command is drawn so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and simplified display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 44B) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2005, the interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 44 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 44 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 22) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49.

  In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15 probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, exact hit, small hit, front and back out of reach, front and back The stop type table and stop type counter corresponding to the non-outreach reach, complete outlier, chance eye) are compared with each other, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 17 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2309) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 45, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2405), the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the process of S2501 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2503). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S 2503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2504) 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2506), the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2501. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display type-of-stop command (S2406: Yes), the type-of-stop command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden hit, small hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out reach, complete out, any chance eyes ) Is determined (S2601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 44 (b)) is executed. Then, the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It is set to off (S2603).

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2603 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  After the processing of S2603, next, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (15 probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, sudden hit, small hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, any chance eyes Determines whether the stop type of the jackpot (S2604), if it is the stop type of the jackpot (S2604: Yes), if it is in the ON state, the transfer start of the image data used in the fanfare effect is The fanfare data transfer flag 223i to be notified to the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) is set to ON (S2605), the termination type command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, when the stop type information is not the big hit stop type (S2604: No), the process of S2605 is skipped, the process of the stop type command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By turning on the fanfare data transfer flag 223i, while the fluctuation effect to be a big hit is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the video RAM 236 for normal use It can be transferred. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Since the display fanfare command instructing start of fanfare production is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in time with the end of the fluctuation production in the third symbol display device 81, the display fanfare command is received. From the above, if image data used in fanfare production is transferred from character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the fluctuation production to the start of the fanfare production, and the player There was a fear that they might not have stopped, or they might have a sense of discomfort.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, and the third symbol display device It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished until the fluctuation effect which becomes the big hit at 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. there were. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display fanfare command among the unprocessed commands (S2408), and display is performed. If there is a fanfare command for use (S2408: Yes), the fanfare command processing is executed (S2409), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the fanfare command process (S2409) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (a). FIG. 47 (a) is a flowchart showing fanfare command processing. The fanfare command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fanfare command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fanfare command process, first, the fanfare display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2701 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702).

  Then, based on the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ((0) S2704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2705), the fanfare command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the fanfare command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2704, from the fanfare display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2701, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S2702 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the image data of the necessary sprites in the set fanfare display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 2. From 4 to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the fanfare command processing is executed, the fanfare transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, while the fanfare effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, image data necessary for round effect and ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (fanfare effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the fanfare effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data required for the round effect has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 since the command for the number of rounds for display has been received, there will be a lot of waiting before the start of the round effect after the fanfare effect is completed. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, since the ending command for display instructing the start of ending effect is sent from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing at which all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) are finished, If image data required for ending effecting is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for ordinary use since the ending command for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effecting to the start of the ending effecting As a result, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display fanfare command is received, transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the big hit is finished in the third symbol display device 81 It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the fanfare effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds) The ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81 when it is finished, so that the player does not feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation is not stopped. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is started from there, It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is finished before the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is finished. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the fanfare effect, so the player may not be aware that the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 45, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2408 that there is no display fanfare command (S2408: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2410), and display is performed. If there is a round number command (S2410: YES), the round number command process is executed (S2411), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S2801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2805), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2410 that there is no display round number command (S2410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2412: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S2413), and the process returns to the process of S2401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S2413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of each ending effect, the data table determination flag corresponding to the ending display data table set by the process of S2901 is turned on, The data table determination flag corresponding to the other ending display data table is set to OFF (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2903, which ending effect display mode corresponds to the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Can be easily determined.

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2412 that there is no display ending command (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2414: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S2415), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2415) will be described. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3001) .

  Then, the back image type is extracted from the back image change command (S3002). In the process of S3002, four types of "rear image for high probability time", "rear image for short time", "rear image for special effect", and "rear image for low probability time" Among them, any one is extracted. Then, among the rear surface image determination flags provided for each rear surface image type (rear surface A to C), the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type extracted from the rear surface image change command is turned on. Is set to OFF (S3003), and this rear image change command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S3001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S3003. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  Further, in the task processing, when displaying any one of the back surfaces A to C is defined by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S3003 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3003, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2414 that there is no rear image change command (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2416). For example (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417), and the process returns to S2401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3101). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2418), and the process returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is judged again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), The processing of S2402 to S2418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2418 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 17, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 46 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 46 (b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 46A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S2502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S3201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3202). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of In the process of S3203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process (S3204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters. Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204), or when it is determined in the process of S3203 that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205. At S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205).

  Here, the details of the pointer update process (S3205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is the End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents acquired in the processing of S3206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3209: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d The setting is made (S3210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the finalized display flag is not on but is on (S3209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S3216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3217), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, after the finalized display effect is finished, the third symbol display device 81 automatically performs the demonstration effect when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect start or the fanfare command is not received. The drawing contents can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S2309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 44B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table that specifies to stop and display the image of ((b) or (c) in FIG. 17) is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53B, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 53 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3602). In the process of S3602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3602 (S3602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3603, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 44B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 44B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 44B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 45 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are performed, drawing of an image in normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) (see S3501: No in FIG. 53A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a normal image transfer setting process (S3503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed earlier is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702), and if it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233. The transfer start flag indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3702 (S3702: No), the process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3705: Yes), it is further determined based on the transfer instruction whether transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3706).

  In this processing of S3706, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is ended. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3706 (S3706: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the process of S3705, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3705: No), the process proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to S3717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), it is then determined whether the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709).

  When the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709: Yes), the display stop type command is processed in the command determination process (see FIG. 45), and as a result, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is It means that it was determined that it is a jackpot stop type. Therefore, in this case, control is performed so that the transfer of the image data used in the fanfare effect is completed until the third symbol display device 81 ends the variation effect which becomes a big hit. That is, if the fanfare data transfer flag is on (S3709: Yes), the fanfare data transfer flag is set to off (S3710), and the image data used in the fanfare effect is set as the transfer target image data (S3711). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data used in fanfare effect is stored, and the head address of the transfer destination (video RAM 236 for normal use) are acquired. (S3712), the process proceeds to S3717.

  In the process of S3709, if the fanfare data transfer flag is not on but is off (S3709: No), it is then determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3713). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S3713: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3714), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3715). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3716), and the process proceeds to S3717.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3715, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S3717, it is determined whether or not transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3717). The determination in the process of S3717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3717 (S3717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3717 (S3717: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3718). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3718, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S3719), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. If it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type for a big hit, it is possible to transfer the image data used in the fanfare effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 22 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) (S3801). That is, in the process of S3801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3802, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 44B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball newly wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), the main control unit 110 selects the counters C1 to C3 at the timing of the new starting winning. , And CS1 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in the main control unit 110. Then, after that, when the data stored in the reserved area is shifted to the execution area, the drawing of the special symbol is performed based on the shifted data.

  And, when the lottery of special symbol is done, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol”, the first symbol display device 37 and the first symbol display device 37 The variable display is performed in the three symbol display device 81, and the stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed after the predetermined time has elapsed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol", "15R of the special symbol It is possible to recognize which is usually a "big hit". In addition, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the first special gaming state ends, according to the lottery result.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the jackpot of the 15th round (first special gaming state), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the first special gaming state The display (big hit effect) to be shown is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Further, during the first special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "first opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  And, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol”, when the first special game state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to “the high probability state A of the special symbol”, In the third symbol display device 81, a "rear image for high probability" is displayed. On the other hand, when the first special gaming state ends when the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol" and "ordinary symbol" The display shifts to the time saving state, and the “rear image for time saving” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the lottery result of the special symbol by paying attention to the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, the player can recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, if the special symbol lottery is performed and the special symbol lottery result is "the special symbol jackpot" or "the special symbol small hit", the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol The variable display is performed on the display device 81, and the stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is performed after the predetermined time has elapsed. However, among the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol indicating the abutment of the special symbol and the special symbol indicating the small hit of the special symbol are similar. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol of the big hit" or "the small symbol of the special symbol", in the third symbol display device 81, a similar third symbol (that is, reach) The generated "off special symbol" is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit" or "a small special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize if it is a hit.

  Then, when the stop display is made, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the second special gaming state different from the first special gaming state, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the second special gaming state The display (specific effect) which shows that is performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81. Further, in the second special game state, control is performed by the main control device 110 such that the above-mentioned "second opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a" is executed.

  And, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “a sudden hit of the special symbol”, when the second special game state ends, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to “the high probability state B of the special symbol”, 3 “Back image for special effect” is displayed on the symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained at the current state even if the second special gaming state being executed is over, In the third symbol display device 81, “rear image for special effect” is displayed. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific effect, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, and the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it becomes difficult to recognize the lottery result of the special symbol, pachinko machine It becomes difficult to recognize 10 game states.

  In addition, when the special symbol lottery is performed and the special symbol lottery result is "out of the special symbol", the variable display is made in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the predetermined time is given. Is displayed, a stop display indicating the lottery result of the special symbol is made. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", after the stop display is performed, the jackpot effect or the specific effect described above is not performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  Therefore, if the player pays attention to stop display on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 or that the effect is not executed after the stop display, the lottery result of the special symbol is “special It can be recognized that it is a "detachment of a symbol". Also, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player can grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change.

  Therefore, in a state where the player can grasp the gaming state (high probability state, low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player It can be grasped that the gaming state being grasped is continuing. On the other hand, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a collision of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol”, and in a state where it is difficult to recognize the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery result of the special symbol is “off of the special symbol In the case of “1”, since the player can not first grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, he can not continue to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 either.

  As described above, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, the same specific effects are similarly obtained when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. It is configured to be run. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the specific effect or the operation of the specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". Become.

  Here, the reason why the player has difficulty in recognizing whether the lottery result of the special symbol is “a sudden hit of a special symbol” or “a small hit of a special symbol” will be described.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, as a lottery result of the special symbol, only three of the above-mentioned "certain jackpot of special symbol", the above-mentioned "normal jackpot of special symbol" and the above-mentioned "off of special symbol" are provided. It was not. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", it was easy for the game to be monotonous.

  That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the gaming state of the pachinko machine does not change only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol jackpot" or "the special symbol big hit". Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the player can easily grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine has not changed. Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "out of the special symbol", it is easy for the player to continue the low probability of winning To understand.

  In a pachinko machine, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the jackpot of the special symbol is made with a probability of 1/300, for example The winning probability is set such that the jackpot, the normal jackpot of special symbols). On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the high probability state of special symbol", if the lottery of the special symbol is done, for example the probability of 1/30 "the big hit of the special symbol (special variation oddity big hit, special symbol The winning probability is set to be "usually a big hit of Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", when the drawing of the special symbol is made, the lottery result of the special symbol is often "off of the special symbol".

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, the player is the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol , I could not have a strong sense of expectation that it would be a special jackpot). Therefore, the game was easy to become monotonous.

  So, in this pachinko machine 10, as a lottery result of a special symbol, "a special hit of a special symbol" and "a small hit of a special symbol" are provided. Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine is "the low probability state of the special symbol", even if the drawing of the special symbol is made, to the player, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol (the probability variation of the special symbol It has become possible to have a strong expectation that it will be a "big hit, usually a big hit with a special symbol".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first symbol display device 37 or 37 even when the lottery result of the special symbol is any of the “special symbol collision” and the “special symbol small hit”. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform similar stop display. Also, the same specific effects are configured to be performed in the same manner. In addition, the operation of the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed along with the specific effect is configured in the same manner. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display, the specific effect, or the operation of the specific winning hole 65a, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol of a sudden hit" or "a small symbol of a special symbol" It becomes difficult to recognize the

  In addition, as described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol high probability state B", but the special symbol When the lottery result is "a small hit of a special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. Also, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state B", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is as in the case of the "special symbol high probability state A". , "Normal pattern short time" will not be. Therefore, in this state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is made and the hit of the normal symbol is achieved, in the case of the electric role, as in the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the low probability state of the special symbol. Control is performed such that the second opening / closing operation of the motorized part is performed. That is, even when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also the "low probability state of the special symbol", the electric winning combination attached to the first ball entry Works the same way.

  Therefore, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player can grasp the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or when it comes to "small hit of special symbol", then the player plays the pachinko game 10 until the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "15R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15R normal hit of special symbol". It becomes difficult to grasp whether the state is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state".

  Thereby, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol", the player can not grasp it, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state B of the special symbol Thus, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the probability of winning is high. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the lottery of the special symbol is more It has become possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the result will be "the jackpot of the special symbol (15R positive variation jackpot of the special symbol, the 15R regular jackpot of the special symbol)". Therefore, with the present pachinko machine 10, unlike conventional pachinko machines, it has become possible to enhance the interest of gaming.

  However, as described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the player is provided with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 by providing the "special hit of the special symbol" and the "small hit of the special symbol" as the lottery result of the special symbol. It becomes impossible to grasp, and as a result, the following problems occur.

  First, the case where it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 will be described more specifically. For example, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player is grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" Or suppose that it became "a small hit of a special symbol".

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "perception of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol", the first symbol display device 37 is similar regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. The first symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the similar third symbol is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol" or If it becomes "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol", and whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become "a high probability state B of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the lottery result is “a small hit of a special symbol” and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed.

  Here, for example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol whose lottery result indicates (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, while the third symbol indicating the lottery result (the removal of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the jackpot effect, the specific effect, the special effect and the like are not performed. Therefore, the player can recognize "disappearance of the special symbol" if he pays attention to the presence of the stop indication of the first symbol, the stop indication of the third symbol, and the execution of the effect. And, since the lottery result of the special symbol is "the out of special symbol", the player can also grasp that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 does not change. However, since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the "special symbol is removed", the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  In addition, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", for example, the lottery result of the special symbol Is assumed to have become "a special design hit" or "a special design hit". In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the similar first symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the stop display of the similar third symbol is executed regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and further, the specific effect is executed similarly. Therefore, even if the player pays attention to the stop display of the first symbol, the stop display of the third symbol, or the specific effect, the lottery result of the special symbol may be "a special symbol's exact hit" or "special symbol It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a small hit.

  Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol is "a collision with a special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "a high probability state B of a special symbol", the lottery result of a special symbol is "a small symbol of a special symbol" The player can not grasp whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed. In addition, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 before the lottery of the special symbol in the first place. Therefore, the player can not keep track of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 continuously.

  On the other hand, in the state where the player has difficulty grasping whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "special symbol high probability state B" or the "special symbol low probability state", the lottery result of the special symbol It is assumed that “15R of the special symbol big hit” or “15R of the special symbol usually hit”. In this case, in the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol indicating the lottery result (big hit of the special symbol) is stopped and displayed, and then the jackpot effect is performed. Therefore, if the player pays attention to the stop display car of the first symbol and the stop display of the third symbol, whether the lottery result of the special symbol is "the 15R probability variation big hit of the special symbol" or "the special symbol It can be recognized whether it is 15R usually a big hit. In addition, if it pays attention to the jackpot effect, it can be recognized that it became a jackpot of a special symbol.

  And, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot of the special symbol", the player, after the jackpot of the 15th round (the first special game state), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol of It can be grasped that it becomes the high probability state A ". In addition, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R normal jackpot", the player, after the 15 round jackpot (first special game state) is finished, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol low probability state" Know what to do.

  Therefore, the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 set after the jackpot (first special gaming state) ends in the 15th round, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not been grasped so far. Therefore, with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 being "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasping the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the sudden hit of the special symbol". Or even if it becomes "a small hit of a special symbol" and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, then, the lottery result of the special symbol is "15R definite variation big hit of a special symbol" or "special symbol of If it becomes “15R normal jackpot”, then the player can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  However, even if the player's lottery result of the special symbol becomes “15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol” or “15R normal jackpot of special symbol” and it becomes possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, this is The game state of the pachinko machine 10 up to is still difficult to grasp.

  Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine provided with "a special pattern hit" and "a small hit of a special symbol" as a lottery result of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot of 15 rounds (first special game) Even if a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal state, the first special game state is obtained by the process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). The jackpot of the special symbol ends without knowing whether the payout has been made. That is, although the player has won the jackpot of the special symbol, the circumstances of the win remain unknown.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the player may be questioned by what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol". If the player is asked a question, the player will continue playing the game without solving the question, and hence the player may continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  In particular, in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol once "a sudden hit of the special symbol". Or, after the player has become unable to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after becoming a "small hit of a special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) In the case of a jackpot of a symbol, there is a high possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol" in the drawing of the special symbol of the second (for example, third) Including the case that the player can not grasp the game state of 10, among the lottery of the special symbol up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbol is "a certain hit of a special symbol" It is highly likely that the player has doubts as to whether it has been.

  That is, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the “special symbol high probability state B” and the winning probability is high, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 several times (for example, When the third lottery of special symbols is made, it is highly likely that the player may have doubts that the lottery result of the special symbols has become "the jackpot of special symbols".

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any of the special symbols in the lottery of the special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time) The player can not know whether or not the "special symbol hit" has been reached. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game is reduced.

  In addition, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 When the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability (for example, Even though 1/300) is low, the player doubts that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of about 100 special symbols is made. There is a risk of having

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, including the case where the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine, the lottery result of any one of the special symbols among the special symbol lottery up to about 100 times is “special symbol The player can not know whether or not it has become a sudden hit. Therefore, since the player continues playing the game without solving the question, there is a high possibility that the player will continue to feel uncomfortable after that. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the circumstances have caused the jackpot of the special symbol of this time. Although the reason will be described later, this makes it possible to make the player feel comfortable and to enhance the interest of the game. When the variation pattern type is “normal reach (20 seconds)”, “Junken effects A to E” is not performed, and normal variation display (variation display of the third symbol and stop display) is performed.

  As described above, “Junken effects A to E” is a character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) representing a player (self side) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and an opponent The character on the other end side is displayed, and the Janken game between the respective characters is started, and the final determination is made.

  In the present embodiment, when the “Junken effect” is executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the character representing the player (self side) wins the Janken (or Finally, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", if "Junken effect" is executed, the character representing the player (your side) lose. In addition, "Junken effect A" is also executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol" even when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". However, the "Junken effect B to E" is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can recognize that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol" when the "Junken effect B to E" is executed.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the effect for the big hit of the special symbol According to the pattern table 222c and the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f, any one of "no Janken effect, Janken effect A to D" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1808 in FIG. 40).

  More specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the change pattern type of the variable display is "Super reach (90 Second) or “special reach (120 seconds)”, and further, if the value of the probability continuous counter 223f is 0, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be “Junken effect A”, and the player ( Determine the display mode so that the character representing your side wins Janken. Similarly, if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 1, the display mode of the variable display is determined to be "Junken effect B", and if the value of the probability continuous count counter 223f is 2, the display mode of the variation effect is If the "Junken effect C" is determined, and the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f is 3 or more, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is determined to "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (own side) is Janken respectively. Determine the display mode to win the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special reach" (120 seconds) and if all the following three conditions are satisfied, "Janken effect E" is determined as the display mode of the variable effect (see S1805 to S1807 in FIG. 40).

  The first condition is that the gaming state flag 223c indicates "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the second condition is that the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 100 or less It is. The third condition is that the special effect in-progress flag 223e is on. Here, when all three conditions are satisfied, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the state of "the low probability state of the special symbol", and once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the small hit of the special symbol", Thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become the "certain hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times, and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the "big hit of the special symbol".

  As mentioned above, the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "probability hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" It is a counter that counts the number of times, and the display mode (the type of Janken effect type) of the variable effect is determined by the value of the estimated continuous number counter 223f.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player pays attention to the type of "Junken effect" executed in the third symbol display device 81. From the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol", it is possible to recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "rapid hit of special symbol". Therefore, even if it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the player then displays the change effect when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Depending on the mode (ie, the type of the Janken effect), it can be grasped in which gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) was made.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" If there is, it is configured to execute "Junken effect A" in the variable display. That is, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "off of the special symbol" and the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, "Junken effect A" regardless of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Is determined as the display mode of the fluctuation effect.

  Therefore, the player can not recognize the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "rapid hit of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the lottery of the special symbol this time. Therefore, the player can not grasp what kind of gaming state the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the removal of the special symbol) is made. Therefore, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is actually "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the special event from the next time onward It is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation that the lottery result of the symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Next, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, an example of the contents that can be grasped by the player, and the reason why the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. An example will be specifically described.

  When the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect A", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "big hit" special symbol It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" even once between the present and the "big hit of the special symbol". In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the player When the character representing the side wins the Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) has been made in the latest gaming state where it is difficult to grasp. In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol". Then, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also low (for example, 1 / 300) After that, when a special symbol of about 100 times is drawn, luckily, it may be doubtful that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol". is there.

  In addition, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Although it has become), there is a possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" at last, when the lottery of the special symbol is not made. .

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect A", and the character representing the player (the player's side) wins Junken. Although the player is in a state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), the lucky result of this special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" It can be understood that Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct. Also, the player can have a satisfaction that he is lucky to be elected with a low probability of winning.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" and the "special symbol big hit" of this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect B", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has become one in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". .

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and among the special symbol lotterys up to a few times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any of the special symbols is “special symbol There is a high possibility of doubting that it was a sudden hit of That is, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30) Because it had become, there is a high possibility of doubting that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbol".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect B", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (your side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become twice in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect C," and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player can grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol has been twice in the "special symbol hit" during the last "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". . In addition, the player is twice due to the “rapid hit of the special symbol” in each of the specific effects executed within the difficult-to-understand period, including when it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It can be understood that the rest was due to the "special symbol small hit".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high (for example, Because it has become 1/30), if the special symbol lottery is made this time, there is a high possibility of doubting that the special symbol lottery result has become "the special symbol jackpot".

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect C", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the third time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that the player has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” immediately after he can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol," including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time) It is possible to grasp that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the hit of the special symbol" twice among the lottery of.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". On the other hand, the probability of being "the special symbol of 15R probability variation jackpot" is "1/3", and the probability of being the "special symbol of 15R regular jackpot" is "1/2". Thus, when it comes to "big hit of special symbol", "15 R probability variation big hit of special symbol" or "15 R usually big hit of special symbol", rather than being judged as "striking hit of special symbol" The probability of being judged as “is higher.

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, of the special symbol lottery up to a few times (for example, the third time), I am a little disappointed at the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol was "the special symbol's hit" twice. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (the player side) wins the Janken, the previous "special symbol" It means that the lottery result of the special symbol has become three or more times in the "special symbol hit" between the "big hit" of this and the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the collision of the special symbol" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol", and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "special symbol High probability state B "means.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect D", and the player When the character representing “side” wins Janken, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in “the high probability state B of the special symbol”. In addition, the player grasps that the lottery result of the special symbol has been three or more times in the "special symbol hit" from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". it can. In addition, the player is at least three times among the specific effects performed within the difficult-to-understand period, including the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by the “rapid hit of the special symbol”. It can be understood that it was something, and others were by "small hit of a special symbol".

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Suppose that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the several times (for example, the fourth time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect D", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The person, as expected, including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, among the lottery of special symbols up to several times (for example, the fourth time), the lottery result of any special symbol is "special It can be understood that it was a "clash of symbols". Thus, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was true. In addition, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that "the jackpot of the special symbol" is immediately obtained after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the player, even though the lottery result of the special symbol became "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where it is not possible to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a special symbol up to several times (for example, the fourth time) It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol hit" more than three times among the lottery.

  As mentioned above, "the special symbol hit" is one of the special symbol jackpot types, but when it is determined to be "the special symbol hit", the probability that it will be the "special symbol hit" is , "1/6". That is, the probability of being determined as "15R probability variation jackpot of a special symbol" or "15R normal jackpot of a special symbol" is higher than being determined as "a special symbol's striking hit".

  Therefore, although the player is happy to become "the jackpot of the special symbol", including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped, the lottery of the special symbol up to the first time (for example, the fourth time) I am also very disappointed that the lottery result of the special symbol was "a hit of a special symbol" more than three times. As described above, by executing the "Junken effect" in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to make the player feel happy and to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the character on the other side, It means that the lottery result of the special symbol did not become "the hit of the special symbol" from the "big hit of the special symbol" to the "big hit of the special symbol" this time. In other words, the lottery result of the special symbol made between the previous "big hit of the special symbol" and the current "big hit of the special symbol" is "out of the special symbol" or "small hit of the special symbol" This means that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has not changed in any way. Furthermore, it means that the lottery of the special symbol has not exceeded 100 times since the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Therefore, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the player When the character representing the side wins the character on the other side, the player can grasp that the lottery of the special symbol of this time (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made in the “low probability state of the special symbol”. In addition, the player, once, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a small hit of a special symbol", and thereafter, the lottery result of the special symbol does not become a "falling hit" until the variable display is executed 100 times. , It can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". In addition, the player is aware that each specific effect executed within the difficult-to-understand period was all due to the "small hit of the special symbol", including the case where it became difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 it can.

  For example, after the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the special symbol low probability state" and the player grasps the gaming state, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 , In the special symbol lottery of about 100 times, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Then, as described above, although the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 remains unchanged as the "special symbol low probability state", and the winning probability is also If it is low (for example, 1/300) and then a lottery of about 100 special symbols is made, it is lucky that the lottery result of this special symbol has become "the jackpot of special symbols", There is a possibility of having a question.

  In addition, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, although it has become 1/30), it has not been won very much, and it is doubtful that the lottery result of the special symbol finally becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol is made this time. There is a risk of having

  In such a case, the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Junken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins over the character on the other side. Although the player is in the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol of It can be understood that it has become a jackpot. Therefore, when the prediction is correct, the player can have a sense of satisfaction that his / her idea was correct.

  In addition, the player can grasp that "the jackpot of the special symbol" has been made by the time the lottery of the special symbol is performed 100 times after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the player can have a surprise that he is elected with a low probability of winning or a satisfaction that he is lucky.

  Also, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol" and the player grasps the gaming state, the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Then, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in the lottery of the special symbol of the second time (for example, the third time).

  Then, as described above, after the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes the "special symbol high probability state B", and the winning probability is high ( For example, since it has been 1/30, there is a high possibility that it may be doubted that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" when the lottery of the special symbol this time is made.

  In such a case, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode is "Janken effect E", and the character representing the player (self side) wins the game, the game is played. The player is very different from the forecast, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "low probability state of special symbol", winning probability is low (for example, 1/300), but luckily, the lottery result of the special symbol is " It can be grasped that it became a jackpot of special symbols.

  In addition, the player has a low probability of winning (for example, 1/300) in the drawing of the special symbol up to several times (for example, the third time), including the case where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can not be grasped. In the situation, it can be grasped that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, the player can have a great satisfaction that he was very lucky and he was very fortunate to have won the prize in a very rare situation, although the idea of the player was largely out of place.

  As described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, even if such a situation or the situation as described above occurs, the player can not grasp the situation. Therefore, the player, for example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special symbol high probability state B", the winning probability is high (for example, 1/30), so the lottery result of the special symbol is " I thought that it would be a jackpot of a special symbol, and it might end with it.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, according to the type of the executed Junken effect, it is configured to inform the player as to how the current situation of the special symbol has become a big hit.

  Therefore, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", When the lottery result is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the player is in what gaming state the lottery of the special symbol (the jackpot of the special symbol) is made according to the type of "Janken production". I can understand. Therefore, even if the player is asked to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery). You can solve the question. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. As a result, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the low probability state of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is If the player is determined to be a "special symbol hit" or a "special symbol hit", it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, in the state where the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "the high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player grasps the gaming state, the lottery result of the special symbol is "the exact hit of the special symbol" The player does not have difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 when the player wins the "small hit of special symbol".

  That is, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "special symbol high probability state A" state, and even if the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "jumping", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high in special symbol It becomes "high probability state B of special symbol" from probability state A ". On the other hand, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit", the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as the "special symbol high probability state A".

  Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state A of the special symbol", and the player is grasping the gaming state, and once, the lottery result of the special symbol is "certain hit of the special symbol" Or, even if the player becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 because it becomes a small hit of the special symbol, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is “high probability state A of the special symbol or "B" can be understood. Therefore, in this case, there is little possibility of causing the player to question whether the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery).

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", any one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 It is configured as follows. And, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified to what kind of circumstances the jackpot of the special symbol this time has become, but during the jackpot effect "Janken Effects A ~ E" is executed It is good. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  The above is the description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", "Junken effect A ~ in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81 According to the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is notified of the process of the jackpot of the current special symbol according to the type of the executed E). However, the method of notification is not limited to "Janken effects A to E", and another notification may be performed to notify the player as to how the current situation has become a big hit with the special symbol. Also good.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, only parts different from the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as in the case of the first embodiment, the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit of the special symbol”. If the variation pattern type is "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variation display. In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a sudden hit of a special symbol" within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. And, it reports the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol is "a small hit of the special symbol" and the number of lottery of the special symbol made during the period when it is difficult to grasp.

  As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the portions different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment are only the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores programs for executing variable display setting processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) in the second embodiment to be described later and special effect setting processing (see FIG. 60) in the second embodiment. .

  FIG. 56 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In addition to the areas 223a and 223j, the counters 223b, 223f, 223h, 223i, 223k, and 223l, and the flags 223c to 223e, 223g, and 223m, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 performs the small hitting continuous number counter. 223n, a recognition impossible period flag 223o, and a recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p at least.

  The small hit continuous number counter 223n counts the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the "small hit of the special symbol" in the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol". Is a counter for The small hit consecutive number counter 223 n is cleared by the initialization processing (see S 1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the stop type of the fluctuation effect is “small hitting”, 1 is added to the small hitting continuous number counter 223f (S4001 in FIG. 57). reference). Also, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is cleared (FIG. 60 See S4103). That is, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the small hit of the special symbol" during the period from the previous "big hit of the special symbol" to the current "big hit of the special symbol" by the small hit continuous number counter 223n. It is counted.

  The value of the small hit continuous number counter 223 n is that the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “Super reach (90 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes“ big hit of the special symbol ” If it is "seconds" or "special reach (120 seconds)", it is informed in the variable display (see FIG. 58). When the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is notified, the value of the estimated continuous number counter 223f described in the first embodiment is also notified.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  The unrecognizable period flag 223o is a flag indicating whether or not the player is in a difficult period to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. When the unrecognizable period flag 223o is on, it indicates that it is a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. When the unrecognizable period flag 223o is off, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is Indicate that it is a period that can be

  The unrecognizable-period flag 223o is set to off by the initial setting process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the specific effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the specific effect is ended, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to ON (FIG. 60). See S4101).

  In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to off (FIG. 60). See S4102). This unrecognizable period flag 223o will be described later in order to count the number of fluctuation effects during a period in which the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 among the fluctuation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is used together with the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to OFF, but it may be set to OFF at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  The unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p is a period during which the player can not grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the period from the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol". It is a counter for counting the number of times. The unrecognized period fluctuation number counter 223p is cleared by the initialization process (see S1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Then, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, if the above-mentioned recognition impossible period flag 223o is on, 1 is added to the recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p (see S4004 in FIG. 58). ). In addition, when the jackpot effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 and the jackpot effect is ended, the recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p is cleared (FIG. 60) See S4103).

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the recognition impossible period fluctuation number counter 223p is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, the jackpot effect may be cleared at the start.

  That is, the period during which it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the period from the previous "big hit of special symbol" to the current "big hit of special symbol" by the unrecognizable period variation frequency counter 223p. The number of effects is counted.

  The value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p is informed in the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol" (see FIG. 59). .

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" or "special" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is "reach (120 seconds)", the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuous frequency counter 223n are displayed in the fluctuation display (FIG. 59) reference). As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The same reference numerals are given to steps for executing the same processes as those of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the variable display setting process (S1412) in the second embodiment.

  The variable display setting process in the second embodiment is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above. As in the case of the first embodiment, the fluctuation display setting process in the second embodiment also changes the display mode of the fluctuation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode of the stop display at the end of the fluctuation, etc. It is a process for setting the effect.

  In the variable display setting process, when the process of S1812 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S4002. In the process of S 1813, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S 1803 is “small hit” (S 1813: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S 4001. Then, in the process of S4001, 1 is added to the small hitting continuous number counter 223n (S4001). Then, the process proceeds to step S4002. In the process of S4002, the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to ON (S4002). Then, the process proceeds to step S1815.

  In the process of S1818, when the after small hit flag 223g is on (S1818: Yes), 1 is added to the after small change number counter 223h (S1819), and the process proceeds to S4003. On the other hand, in the process of S1818, when the after small hit flag 223g is off (S1818: No), the process of S1819 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4003.

  In the process of S4003, it is determined whether the unrecognized period flag 223o is on (S4003). In the process of S4003, when the unrecognized period flag 223o is on (S4003: Yes), 1 is added to the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4005. On the other hand, in the process of S4003, when the unrecognized period flag 223o is off (S4003: No), the process of S4004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4005.

  In the present embodiment, the unrecognized period flag 223o is provided, but it is not necessary to provide it. When the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to ON, either the process of S1812 or the process of S4001 is executed. Therefore, in the process of S4003, it may be determined whether one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more. If one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more, the processing proceeds to S4004, and the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f, If the values of the small hit consecutive number counter 223 n are both 0, the processing may be shifted to the processing of S4005.

  In the process of S4005, it is determined whether the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005). In the process of S4005, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005: Yes), the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p and the probability continuous number of times The value of the counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n are acquired respectively (S4006). And the display aspect of a fluctuation production is set so that each acquired value may be displayed in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81 during execution of a Janken production (S4007). Then, the process proceeds to step S1820.

  Here, when the processing of S4006 and S4007 is executed, when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the number of unrecognizable period variation counter 223p The value, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f, and the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n are displayed. As a result, the details such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period in which the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are informed.

  As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4005, when the type of stop acquired in the processing of S1803 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005: No), the processing of S4006 and S4007 described above is skipped and S1820 Move to the process of

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, the fluctuation pattern classification type of fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “big hit of the special symbol”. Is “super reach (90 seconds)” or “special reach (120 seconds)”, the value of the unrecognizable period change frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous time counter 223f, and the small hit continuous time in the variable display The display mode of the fluctuation effect can be set so that the value of the counter 223 n is displayed.

  In this embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "normal reach (20 seconds)" For example, the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuity frequency counter 223n are not displayed in the fluctuation display. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the symbol may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 59, an example of a display screen in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the jackpot of the special symbol” and the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 59 is a view showing an example of a display screen when variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds If it is "" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuous frequency counter 223n are displayed in the fluctuation display. Be done.

  In the present embodiment, of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds, the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p and the probability The value of the continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n are displayed. In addition, as long as it is in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 not only in the subdisplay area Ds, you may display it anywhere.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, “Special production rush to big hit” is displayed, and further, “all fluctuation counts →” is displayed, and the value of the unrecognized period fluctuation count counter 223 p is displayed. Be done. For example, "20 times" is displayed. Further, following the display of “the number of times of sudden hit →”, the value of the number of times of continuous consecutive count 223 f is displayed. For example, “1 time” is displayed. Further, following the display of “small hitting count →”, the value of the small hitting continuous count counter 223 n is displayed. For example, "five times" is displayed.

  By visually recognizing the display screen, the player can count the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the sudden hit of the special symbol” within a period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to recognize the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a small hit of the special symbol" and the number of times the lottery of the special symbol is performed. Therefore, the player can grasp the details such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In particular, since the number of times is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" in any circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). It is easy for the player to grasp intuitively.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol's exact hit" or "the special symbol's small hit", the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, after that, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). There is a possibility that the player may be asked the question as to whether the

  Even if the player is asked to question, by what circumstances, the result of the drawing of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the player It is possible to grasp the details such as what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the player's question can be resolved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to participate in the game from being lowered. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special effect setting process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1413) in the second embodiment.

  The special effect setting process in the second embodiment is executed instead of the special effect setting process (see FIG. 41) of the first embodiment described above. Also in the special effect setting process in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the special effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, or the special effect in progress is ended, etc. It is a process for setting.

  In the special effect setting process, when the process of S1917 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S4101. In the process of S4101, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to OFF (S4101). Next, the small hit continuous number counter 223 n and the unrecognized period fluctuation number counter 223 p are cleared (S 4102), and the process proceeds to S 1919.

  The above is the description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type is " If "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display.

  In addition to this, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a sudden hit of a special symbol" within a period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 The number of times, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol has become "a small hit of the special symbol", and the number of lottery times of the special symbol made during the period when it is difficult to grasp is notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the process such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period in which it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol's exact hit" or "the special symbol's small hit", the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, after that, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). There is a possibility that the player may be asked the question as to whether the

  Even if the player is asked to question, by what circumstances, the result of the drawing of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the player It is possible to grasp the details such as what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the player's question can be resolved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to participate in the game from being lowered. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the special symbol hit” within the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 The number of times that the lottery result of the symbol has become “a small hit of the special symbol” and the number of lottery of the special symbol made during the period when the grasp is difficult is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, only parts different from the second embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment described above, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “super reach (when the lottery result of the special symbol is“ big hit of the special symbol ”) If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" within a period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It was configured to notify the number of times, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol became "a small hit of the special symbol", and the number of lotterys of the special symbol made during the period when the grasp was difficult.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If reach (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", lottery results for a predetermined number of times from the most recent among lottery results of special symbols in the past are notified. As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10, the portions different between the second embodiment and the third embodiment are only the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores a program for executing the variable display setting process (see FIGS. 63 and 64) in the third embodiment described later.

  FIG. 61 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In addition to the areas 223a and 223j, the counters 223b, 223f, 223h, 223i, 223l, 223n, and 223p, and the flags 223c to 223e, 223g, 223m, and 223o in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. , Lottery result history storage area 223 q at least.

  The lottery result history storage area 223 q is an area for storing a lottery result for a predetermined number of times from the most recent among lottery results of special symbols in the past. Here, the details of the lottery result history storage area 223 q will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a schematic view schematically showing a configuration of the lottery result history storage area 223q. The lottery result history storage area 223 q has twenty areas from the first area to the twentieth area. In each of these areas, at least a stop type storage area 223p1 and a variation pattern type storage area 223q2 are provided. The stop type storage area 223p1 is an area for storing the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, and the change pattern type storage area 223q2 is a change pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. It is an area to store.

  Each area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is initialized by an initialization process (see S 1310 in FIG. 35) of the RAM 223 after the power is turned on. Specifically, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is cleared to 0. As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the stop type command, it extracts the stop type indicating the lottery result from the stop type command, and the extracted stop type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a. Store. Also, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation pattern type is extracted, and the extracted variation pattern type is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a.

  Thereafter, when setting the display mode of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 stops the type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, and the variation pattern type. Are stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q.

  When the stop type and the variation pattern type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a are stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q, first, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q A shift process is performed to pack the data stored in area 1 to area 19) into an area (area 2 to area 20) having a large area number. When this shift process is performed, the shift process is performed in order from the area with the largest area number. Specifically, first, 19 is set to the variable n, and the data of the nth area is shifted to the (n + 1) th area, respectively. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of n, and this shift processing and subtraction of the value of n are repeated until the value of the variable n becomes 0.

  In the lottery result history storage area 223q, of the data indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the older the data in time is stored in the area having the larger area number, and the oldest data is stored in the 20th area in time It will be In the present embodiment, although the first area to the twentieth area are provided, the number of areas to be provided may be determined arbitrarily.

  The data stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q is used to notify the lottery result of the past special symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol" (FIG. 64 of FIG. See S4201 and S4202).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64, the variable display setting process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The same steps as those in the second embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the variable display setting process (S1412) according to the third embodiment.

  The variable display setting process in the third embodiment is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 57 and FIG. 58) of the second embodiment described above. As in the case of the second embodiment, the change display setting process in the third embodiment also changes the display mode of the change effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display mode of the stop display at the end of the change, etc. It is a process for setting the effect.

  In the variable display setting process, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “15R normal jackpot” in the process of S4005 (S4005: Yes), the process proceeds to S4201. In the process of S4201, the history corresponding to the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation frequency counter 223p among the history of the lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired from the latest one S4201). For example, when the value of the unrecognizable period change frequency counter 223p is 1, the stop type stored in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired. When the value of the unrecognized period fluctuation number counter 223p is 5, the stop type stored in each of the first area to the fifth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is acquired.

  Then, the display mode of the fluctuation effect is set to display the history of the lottery result acquired in the process of S4201 in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the Janken effect (S4202). Then, the process proceeds to step S1820.

  Here, when the processing of S4201 and S4202 is executed, the lottery result of the special symbol in the past is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. In addition, the lottery result of the special symbol in the past is displayed for the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation frequency counter 223p from the latest one.

  As described above, the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p counts the number of fluctuation effects during a period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 among the fluctuation effects executed in the third symbol display device 81. Is a counter to Therefore, in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result (that is, the history) is displayed for the lottery of the special symbol made within the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 Be done. As a result, the details such as the contents of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period in which the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are informed.

  As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4005, when the type of stop acquired in the process of S1803 is not "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" (S4005: No), the processing of S4201 and S4202 described above is skipped and S1820 Move to the process of

  When the process of S1825 ends, the process proceeds to the process of S4203. When the value of the continuous notice frequency counter 2231 is 0 in the process of S1824 (S1824: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4203.

  In the process of S4203, the data of each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is shifted (S4203). The data shift process performed in the process of S4203 is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to nineteenth areas of the lottery result history storage area 223q toward the area having a larger area number. Specifically, the data in each area are as follows: 19th area → 20th area, 18th area → 19th area, 17th area → 18th area, ..., 1st area → 2nd area, etc. shift.

  Then, the stop type stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a is stored in the stop type storage area 223p1 in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, and is stored in the special symbol lottery result storage area 223a The variation pattern type is stored in the variation pattern type storage area 223q2 in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q (S4204). Then, the process ends, and the process returns to the above-described main process (see FIG. 36).

  According to the fluctuation display setting process shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 above, the fluctuation pattern classification type of fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “big hit of the special symbol”. Is “Super reach (90 seconds)” or “Special reach (120 seconds)”, the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q in its variable display is the third symbol The display mode of the fluctuation effect can be set so as to be displayed while the fluctuation display is being performed on the display device 81.

  In this embodiment, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "normal reach (20 seconds)" For example, the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q in the variable display is not displayed. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the symbol may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, an example of the display screen in the case where the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the big hit of the special symbol” will be described. FIG. 65 is a view showing an example of a display screen when variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds Or the “special reach (120 seconds)”, the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223 q is displayed in the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds, a lottery stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q in the sub display area Ds. The result (ie, the stop type) is displayed. In addition, as long as it is in the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 not only in the subdisplay area Ds, you may display it anywhere.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, first, "lottery history from special effect rush to jackpot" is displayed. Here, when the value of the unrecognizable period fluctuation number counter 223p is represented as n, the lottery result stored in the n-th area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is further displayed under the display of “at the time of entry” (stop Type is displayed. For example, "small hit" is displayed. In addition, here, the lottery result of the special symbol in the case where it becomes difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the state in which the player can grasp the gaming state is displayed.

  Further, under the display of “first time”, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the (n−1) area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is displayed. For example, "disengagement" is displayed. In the present embodiment, in the case where the stop type is “complete removal”, “front / rear outreach”, and “reach other than front / rear out”, all are displayed as “out”. In addition, here, after the player has become difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the first lottery result of the special symbol is displayed.

  Further, under the display of “second time”, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the (n−2) area of the lottery result history storage area 223 q is displayed. For example, it is displayed as "crash hit". In this case, after the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the second lottery result of the special symbol is displayed. Similarly, until the value of n (here, the value of the unrecognized period fluctuation frequency counter 223p) becomes 1, ie, the lottery result (stop type) stored in the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q. Until the is displayed, the lottery results of the past special symbols are displayed.

  The player visually recognizes this display screen, and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, etc. I can understand the process.

  In particular, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery results are displayed in chronological order for the lottery of the special symbol made within a period when the player is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 ( That is, the history of the lottery result is displayed). Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  Specifically, after "small symbols of special symbols" and "disappearance of special symbols" continue, it becomes "clash of special symbols" and then it becomes "big hit of special symbols" or "special" The player intuitively sees whether the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while after the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while, despite the fact that the symbol symbol became "probable". I can understand.

  For example, after "small hit of a special symbol" or "deletion of a special symbol" continues, the player becomes "a hit of a special symbol" and then immediately becomes a "big hit of a special symbol". It didn't quite get "big hit with special symbol", but at the end the situation changed completely (a big reversal) and it can be grasped that it became "big hit with special symbol" at a stretch. Therefore, by making the player recognize that the "special symbol jackpot" has been dramatically made, the player can be enhanced and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Also, the player can be satisfied with being lucky.

  Also, for example, in spite of having become "a certainty of special symbol", if "a small hit of a special symbol" or "a removal of a special symbol" continues for a while, and "a big hit of a special symbol", the player Is happy to be a "special symbol jackpot", but despite having a high probability of winning (for example, 1/30), it has not been "a special symbol jackpot", despite the long lasting condition. I am also disappointed. As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery made during the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in chronological order on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ( That is, by displaying the history of the lottery result), the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the special symbol's exact hit" or "the special symbol's small hit", the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, after that, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "the jackpot of the special symbol", the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol" in what process (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery). There is a possibility that the player may be asked the question as to whether the

  Even if the player is asked to question, by what circumstances, the result of the drawing of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the player It is possible to grasp the details such as what kind of contents the lottery result of the special symbol made within the period when it was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Thus, the player's question can be resolved. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable continuously, and it is possible to suppress the player's desire to participate in the game from being lowered. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery results for the special symbol lottery made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 are in chronological order (that is, the lottery results History) is displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  In particular, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the lottery results are displayed in chronological order for the lottery of the special symbol made within a period when the player is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 ( That is, the history of the lottery result is displayed). Therefore, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”.

  Specifically, after "small symbols of special symbols" and "disappearance of special symbols" continue, it becomes "clash of special symbols" and then it becomes "big hit of special symbols" or "special" The player intuitively sees whether the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while after the "special symbol jackpot" or the "special symbol jackpot" continued for a while, despite the fact that the symbol symbol became "probable". I can understand.

  For example, after "small hit of a special symbol" or "deletion of a special symbol" continues, the player becomes "a hit of a special symbol" and then immediately becomes a "big hit of a special symbol". It didn't quite get "big hit with special symbol", but at the end the situation changed completely (a big reversal) and it can be grasped that it became "big hit with special symbol" at a stretch. Therefore, the player can be boosted by having become "the jackpot of a special symbol" dramatically, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced. Also, the player can be satisfied with being lucky.

  Also, for example, in spite of having become "a certainty of special symbol", if "a small hit of a special symbol" or "a removal of a special symbol" continues for a while, and "a big hit of a special symbol", the player Is happy to be a "special symbol jackpot", but despite having a high probability of winning (for example, 1/30), it has not been "a special symbol jackpot", despite the long lasting condition. I am also disappointed. As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery made during the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in chronological order on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ( That is, by displaying the history of the lottery result), the player can be made to rejoice, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Although it is displayed, out of the areas from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, it is out as a lottery result (other than the stop type is “completely out”, “back and forth out of reach” and “out of back and forth” In the area where the reach is stored, the lottery result (stop type) may not be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  Also, in the first place, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is configured so as not to be stored as a lottery result (stop type is "complete out," "back and forth out of reach", "reach other than out of back and forth") It may be configured such that the detachment is not displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  The "high probability state of special symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first gaming state" described in the claims, and the "low probability state of special symbol" described in the above embodiment It corresponds to the "second game state" described in the claims. In addition, "15R probability variation jackpot of special symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to "first lottery result" described in the claims, and "15R normal jackpot of special symbol" described in the above embodiment This corresponds to the "second lottery result" described in the claims. In addition, the "special symbol collision hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third lottery result" described in the claims, and the "small symbol special symbol hit" described in the above embodiment is claimed. Corresponding to the "fourth lottery result" described in the range, "the removal of the special symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "fifth lottery result" described in the claims. In addition, the “Janken effects A to D” described in the above embodiment are selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means described in the claims, and the contents of the lottery result storage means The "Junken effect E" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "another aspect" described in the claims, corresponding to the aspect to be switched.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol within the period when the player was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable display. In order to report the number of times it has become a "certain hit", the number of times a lottery result of a special symbol has become "a small hit of a special symbol", and the number of lotterys of a special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp It is configured. Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 of the said 3rd Embodiment is a change pattern classification of the fluctuation display performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is "super reach", when the lottery result of a special symbol turns into "big hit of a special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", among the lottery results of the past special symbols in the variable display, it is configured to notify the lottery results for a predetermined number of times from the most recent. On the other hand, the screen of the stop display made on the third symbol display device 81 during the period when the player can not easily grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the work RAM 223 of the display control device 114 in chronological order Every time, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the image stored in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, in the sub display area Ds) You may arrange and display in order of a series. Note that the images may be displayed one by one or a plurality of each in chronological order. The player visually recognizes this display screen, and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, etc. I can understand the process. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Even if the player is asked to wonder if the special symbol lottery result "the special symbol's jackpot" in any case, the player may Can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from holding the unpleasant feeling continuously, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol". If it is (90 seconds) or "special reach (120 seconds)", the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol within the period when the player was difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the variable display. In order to report the number of times it has become a "certain hit", the number of times a lottery result of a special symbol has become "a small hit of a special symbol", and the number of lotterys of a special symbol made during the period when it was difficult to grasp It is configured. On the other hand, with the combination of the third symbol in the stop display in the third symbol display device 81, the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" The number of times it became "small hit" and the number of times the drawing of the special symbol made during the period when it is difficult to grasp may be notified. For example, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 of the left symbol row Z1. The third symbol has the same number as the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol has become "the special symbol hit". Then, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2 with the same number as the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit of the special symbol". Then, on the effective line L1 of the right symbol row Z3, the number of drawing times of the special symbol made during the period in which the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed. The player visually recognizes this display screen, and the content of the lottery result of the special symbol made during the period when the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, etc. I can understand the process. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 When the player wins the game, even if the player is asked to wonder why the drawing result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol", by the circumstances. I can solve the question. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from holding the unpleasant feeling continuously, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" or In the case of "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display. Then, depending on the type of the executed Janken effect, the player is informed of the circumstances with which the jackpot of the special symbol of this time has become a big hit. However, "Junken effects A to E" may be executed during the jackpot effect. Further, the effects to be executed may not be “Junken effects A to E” as long as the player can distinguish the display mode. In this case, each effect to be executed instead of "Junken effects A to E" is associated with the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f in the effect pattern table 222c.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the special effect being executed is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed at the timing when the fluctuation effect is ended, but it is being executed within the period when the fluctuation effect is being executed. The special effect of may be ended, or the special effect once ended may be resumed. That is, if the special effect in progress is ended or the special effect once ended is resumed in the execution unit of the fluctuation effect, it may be ended at any time, or may be restarted at any time.

  Moreover, although the recognition impossible period flag 223 o is provided in the second and third embodiments, it is not necessary to provide it. When the unrecognized period flag 223o is set to ON, either the process of S1812 or the process of S4001 is executed (see FIGS. 57 and 63). Therefore, in the process of S4003, it may be determined whether one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more. If one of the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is 1 or more, the processing proceeds to S4004, and the value of the probable continuous number counter 223f, If the values of the small hit consecutive number counter 223 n are both 0, the processing may be shifted to the processing of S4005.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "deletion of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach", the number of accus Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, "Junken effect A" is selected as the display mode of the variable display. Therefore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" or "special reach", the variation display As the display mode, “Janken effect A” may not be selected, and any one of “Janken effect B to E” may be selected. Thereby, when the display mode of the variable display is "Junken effects B to E", it is possible to make the player recognize that the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol". Therefore, every time when the variable display is performed, the player can be attracted to the variable display, and the player can be made to rejoice by the display mode of the variable display. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "deletion of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach", the number of accus Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, "Junken effect A" is selected as the display mode of the variable display. On the other hand, not only the "Junken effect A" but also other "Janken effects B to E" may be selected. However, since the effect is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the character representing the player (the player's side) always loses to the character of the other party. Then, when "Junken effects A to E" is selected, "Junken no effect" and "Junken effects A to D" based on, for example, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f or the value of the small hitting after number fluctuation number counter 223h. Select one from "E". Further, for example, one of "Junken effects A to E" may be selected with reference to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f or the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h (that is, always the Janken effect You may choose In addition, a random number counter may be provided to select an effect at the time of disconnection, and one of “no Janken effect” and “Janken effect A to E” may be selected according to the random number counter. One of "Junken effects A to E" may be selected according to the random number counter.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "deletion of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach", the number of accus Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, "Junken effect A" is selected as the display mode of the variable display. On the other hand, even when the lottery result of the special symbol is "outside of the special symbol", if the variation pattern type of the variable display is "super reach", the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol" Similarly to the case, “Junken effects A to D” may be selected according to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223 f. Also, "Junken effect E" may be selected. However, since the effect is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the character representing the player (the player's side) always loses to the character of the other party. As a result, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "out of the special symbol", the display mode of the variable display is determined according to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. If the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is "high probability state B of special symbol" or if the lottery result of the special symbol is "clash of special symbols" It can be suggested to the player.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds)" or If it is "special reach (120 seconds)", one of "Junken effects A to E" is executed in the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the contents of the effects performed in "Junken effects A to E" You may change it. For example, when the variation pattern type of the variation display is "super reach (90 seconds)", the character representing the player (self side) and the small character as the other party character are made to appear and the Janken confrontation is performed. You may comprise so that an effect may be performed. Then, when the variation pattern type of the variation display is "special reach", a character representing the player (self side) and a large character (boss) character as the other party character are made to appear, and the effect of performing the Janken confrontation It may be configured to perform.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, it does not include the case where the lottery result of a special symbol turns into "a small hit of a special symbol", and after that, within the period until the lottery result of a special symbol turns into "a big hit of a special symbol". In order to determine whether or not the number of variable display (lottery of special symbol) executed on the is 100 or less, a post-small change counter 223 h is provided. Specifically, when the initial value of the small hitting post variation counter 223h is set to 0, and the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hitting of a special symbol", if the variation effect is executed thereafter, then 1 is set. It is adding. In addition, after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the jackpot of the special symbol” and the jackpot effect is executed, the jackpot is cleared to 0 when the jackpot effect is finished. And, if the value of the small hitting post fluctuation number counter 223h is 100 or more, it does not include the case where the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “a small hit of the special symbol”, and after that, the lottery result of the special symbol is “ It is determined that the number of variable displays (lottery of special symbols) executed within the period until the jackpot of the special symbol is “100 times or less (S1806 in FIG. 40, S1921 in FIG. 41, etc.). On the other hand, if the initial value of the small hit post variation counter 223h is 100, and the lottery result of the special symbol is "small hit of the special symbol", then 1 is subtracted if the variable display is executed. You may. And, in this case, after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes “the jackpot of the special symbol” and the jackpot effect is executed, it is set to 100 when the jackpot effect is ended. And, if the value of the small hitting post fluctuation number counter 223h is 0 or less, it does not include the case that the drawing result of the special symbol becomes “the small hitting of the special symbol”, and from that point on, the drawing result of the special symbol is “ It may be determined that the number of variation effects (lottery of special symbols) executed within the period until the jackpot of the special symbol is “100 or less”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "a special symbol hit" or "a small symbol of a special symbol", the variable display of the third symbol is started in the third symbol display device 81. After the predetermined time has elapsed, a similar third symbol (i.e., "the special symbol is removed" at which reach occurs) is displayed to be stopped. However, the stop display of the third symbol does not have to be limited to this. For example, it is a combination of the 3rd designs which does not become reach, and the same main symbols (10 kinds of character symbols corresponding to the numbers of "0" to "9") to upper, middle and lower each symbol row Z1 to Z3 You may stop display so that one) is included. In addition, it is the combination of the 3rd symbol which becomes reach, but does not become a hit, and it corresponds to the specified main symbol (the number of "4" or "7" as the 3rd symbol displayed in the middle of middle symbol row Z2 Character pattern) may be stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, the display mode of the fluctuation display in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is determined to either "Junken no effect" and "Junken effects A-E". doing. In addition, the execution of special effects, the end of special effects, and the restart of special effects are determined. However, the main control device 110 may be configured to determine the display mode of the variable display, the execution of the special effect, the end of the special effect, and the determination of resumption of the special effect, or the display control device 114 It may be configured to perform in In that case, a program for executing the variation display setting process shown in FIG. 40 and the special effect setting process shown in FIG. 41, the special effect end determination table 222a, the special effect resumption determination table 222b, and the effect pattern The table 222 c is stored in the ROM of the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Also, a special symbol lottery result storage area 223a, a gaming state flag 223c, a special effect in progress flag 223e, a probability continuous number counter 223f, a small after hit flag 223g, a small after hit fluctuation counter 223h, and a special effect drawing The memories such as the counter 223i are provided in the RAM of the main control unit 110 and the display control unit 114.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “normal reach (20 when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes“ big hit of the special symbol ” If it is "seconds", the value of the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous frequency counter 223f, and the value of the small hitting continuity frequency counter 223n are not displayed in the fluctuation display. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", it may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of unrecognizable period fluctuations in the sub display area Ds of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds. Although the value of the counter 223p, the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f, and the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n are displayed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the sub display region Ds. If so, it may be displayed anywhere.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the first to twentieth areas are provided in the lottery result history storage area 223q, but the number of the provided areas may be arbitrarily determined.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "normal reach (20 If it is "seconds", the lottery result (that is, the type of stop) stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q in the variable display is not displayed. However, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the jackpot of the special symbol", the symbol may be displayed regardless of the variation pattern type of the variation display.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, of the main display area Dm constituting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display area Ds, the lottery result history storage area in the sub display area Ds. Although the lottery result (that is, the stop type) stored in 223 q is displayed, it may be displayed anywhere within the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, not limited to the sub display area Ds. .

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery result (ie, the stop type) is stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q, but instead of the lottery result, the lottery of the special symbol is a line The gaming state set in the pachinko machine 10 may be stored when being hit. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the history of the gaming state stored in the lottery result history storage area 223q may be notified. As a result, the player can grasp the process such as what gaming state or the like the drawing of the special symbol made in the period in which it is difficult to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol", and the lottery result of the special symbol is "special symbol" in a state where the player has difficulty grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Even if the player is asked to wonder if the special symbol lottery result "the special symbol's jackpot" in any case, the player may Can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from holding the unpleasant feeling continuously, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game. Therefore, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol". If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n in the fluctuation display It is displayed on. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to produce an effect indicating the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hit continuous number counter 223n. For example, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the number indicated by the probability continuous number of times counter 223f is represented by the number of characters (characters on the friend side) belonging to the player (self side) The number indicated by the small hit consecutive number counter 223 n may be represented by the number of characters (characters on the enemy side) belonging to That is, the character on the ally side is made to appear (displayed) the same number as the number indicated by the probable continuous number counter 223f, and the enemy character is made to appear the same number as the number indicated by the small hitting continuous number counter 223n. As you configure the rendition. As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances. Also, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp what sort of background (for example, the gaming state at the time of lottery) etc., the lottery result of the special symbol has become the “big hit of the special symbol”. In addition, not only when the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display is similarly performed in other cases. It may be configured to perform.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is “Super reach (when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes“ big hit of the special symbol ”) If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, It is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, an effect indicating the lottery result stored in each area may be performed by the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the variable display is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the lottery result (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is the old one Are sequentially extracted one by one, and effects are executed in units of the extracted lottery results. More specifically, a character indicating the player (your side) and a character on the other side are made to appear, and if the extracted lottery result is "immediately hit", the character on the other side is the character on the other side An effect of punching is performed, and on the other hand, if the extracted lottery result is "small hit", an effect is produced in which the character on the own side is punched by the character on the opposite side. Further, if the extracted lottery result is “off”, the character on the one side and the character on the other side are configured to perform an effect of holding back each other.
As a result, even if the player has difficulty in grasping the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after that, the special symbol will be selected after the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "a sudden hit of a special symbol" or "a small hit of a special symbol". In the case where the lottery result of is “the jackpot of the special symbol”, the player can grasp how the lottery result of the special symbol has become “the jackpot of the special symbol” in what circumstances. In addition, since the lottery results are shown in chronological order, the player instincts, by what circumstances (for example, the gaming state at the time of the lottery), the lottery result of the special symbol has become the "big hit of the special symbol". Easy to grasp. In addition, not only when the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display is similarly performed in other cases. It may be configured to perform. If the extracted lottery result is "off", the effect may be skipped. That is, the effect may be configured to be produced in the case where the lottery result is "immediately hit" and "small hit".

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach" when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit of the special symbol". If it is "90 seconds)" or "special reach (120 seconds)", the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n in the fluctuation display It is displayed on. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed as the third symbol display device It is displayed on the display screen of 81. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "the big hit of the special symbol", the variation pattern type of the variation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "super reach (90 seconds) Or “special reach (120 seconds)”, in addition to the value of the probability continuous number counter 223f and the value of the small hitting continuous number counter 223n in the variable display, from the nth area of the lottery result history storage area 223q Each of the lottery results (stop types) stored in each area up to the first area may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, not only when the fluctuation pattern type of the fluctuation display performed in the third symbol display device 81 is "Super reach (90 seconds)" or "Special reach (120 seconds)", the display is similarly performed in other cases. It may be configured to perform.

  In the above embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the special effect in progress flag 223e is set to off, but it may be set to off at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the jackpot effect is ended, the probability continuous number counter 223f is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  In the above embodiment, when the jackpot effect is finished, the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is cleared, but it may be cleared any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state", the value of the small hitting after fluctuation number counter 223h is in the range of 1 to 100, and the special effect When the middle flag 223e is on, the display mode of the change effect to be executed is determined to be "Junken effect E". On the other hand, even if the special effect flag 223e is off, the value of the after-small variation counter 223h is 1 to 100, with the gaming state flag 223c indicating the "special symbol low probability state". If it is within the range, the display mode of the change effect to be executed may be determined as "Junken effect E".

  In the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the small hitting continuous number counter 223n is cleared, but it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect is ended, the recognition impossible period flag 223o is set to OFF, but if it is within the period of the jackpot effect, it may be set to OFF at any time. good. For example, it may be set to off at the start of the jackpot effect.

  In the second or third embodiment, when the jackpot effect ends, the recognition impossible period fluctuation frequency counter 223p is cleared, but it may be cleared at any time within the period of the jackpot effect. For example, it may be cleared at the start of the jackpot effect.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, each of the lottery results (stop type) stored in each area from the nth area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is displayed as the third symbol display device Of the areas from the n-th area to the first area of the lottery result history storage area 223q, it is displayed on the display screen of 81 as a lottery result (stop type is “completely out”, “back and forth out of reach”) For the area in which “reach other than back and forth deviation” is stored, the lottery result (stop type) may not be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  Also, in the first place, each area of the lottery result history storage area 223q is configured so as not to be stored as a lottery result (stop type is "complete out," "back and forth out of reach", "reach other than out of back and forth") It may be configured such that the detachment is not displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. That is, you may be comprised so that it may be displayed on the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 about a rough hit and a small hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the "chance of chance" at the end of the change effect is the continuous advance notice effect, but during the change effect, an image different from normal is displayed or a sound different from normal is displayed. An effect such as emitting noise may be used as a continuous advance notice effect. If configured in this manner, the stop type of each of the variable effects for executing the continuous advance notice effect does not have to be changed to "chance", and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is it can. In addition, since the continuous advance notice effect can be performed also in the last variation effect for executing the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the continuous advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of giving the player a sense of anticipation to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Moreover, when performing continuous advance notice production over a plurality of change effects, the effect contents may be changed for each change effect, or the effect contents may be changed for only some of the change effects.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect, the main control device 110 transmits a change pattern command and a stop type command, and as a result, in the third symbol display device 81 , Fluctuation representation according to the fluctuation pattern command is started. Thereafter, when it is time to execute the variation effect execution time, the stop symbol of the stop type corresponding to the stop type command is displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, a command (for example, a confirmation command) instructing the stop display of the stop symbol is newly provided, and until the confirmation command is transmitted from main control device 110, the execution time of the scheduled fluctuation effect is scheduled Even if it finishes, you may comprise so that the fluctuation production may be continued.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main control unit 110 performs pre-reading for the start winning combination, but the voice lamp control device 113 may perform pre-reading for the starting winning combination. In that case, when the start winning combination is detected in main controller 110, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1, and pachinko at the time of winning The gaming state of the machine 10 (in addition, during the jackpot, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the end of the jackpot) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by a prefetch command. Then, in the voice lamp control device 113, the high probability big hit random number table 202a2 stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the low probability big hit random number table 202a1, etc. Each table such as a jackpot type table (not shown) is stored in the voice lamp control device ROM 222, respectively. Also, the prefetching process (see FIG. 25) executed by the main control unit 110 is stored in the ROM 222 so that it can be executed by the audio lamp control unit 113. If configured in this way, when the read ahead command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, the voice lamp control unit 113 extracts various counter values from the read ahead command, and a lottery for a big hit lottery You can look ahead to the results. As a result, since the main control device 110 does not have to look ahead to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be further alleviated, and transition should be made based on entering the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to concentrate on the lottery process for lottery the gaming state. However, since important random number values such as the random number value of the jackpot may be discovered unfairly, notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the lottery result (success or failure), the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are included in the prefetch command. Is preferred. For example, it can be prevented that the signal output from the main control device 110 is illegally stolen and the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are analyzed. Moreover, it can prevent that important random number values, such as a random number value which determines whether it is a big hit, from the signal output from the main control apparatus 110 is analyzed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the processing for determining whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect (the continuous advance judging process in FIG. 39) is executed in the voice lamp control device 113, but these processes are displayed in the display control device It may be performed at 114. In such a case, the program for executing the continuous advance notice determination process shown in FIG. 39 can be executed by the display control device 114, and the continuous advance decision table 222d and the character ROM 234 (for example, the second program area). Store in 234a1). Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with respective memories such as the above-described prefetched information storage area 223j, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the continuous notice lottery counter 223k, the continuous notice frequency counter 2231, and a notice after jackpot flag 223m. Then, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives the pre-read command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command as it is to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the pre-reading command, the display control device 114 executes a process of determining whether to start the continuous preview effect (continuous preview determination process of FIG. 39).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may integrate each apparatus 113,114 instead, and may provide them as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control unit 113, it is transmitted to the display control unit 114 in the audio lamp control unit 113. The command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is configured to be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, when the command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 and the command is received by the display control unit 114, the display control unit 114 determines the command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control unit 113. After that, the display control device 114 may transmit the command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 for transfer destination or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, it is determined that the image controller 237 accesses the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (that is, using) the normal video RAM 236. ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235, or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 by the MPU 231, It may be checked whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends the access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from the image controller 237 as needed. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the drive state of the image controller 237 or a notification from the image controller 237 whether the scan is in a blank period or not. If the scan state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each video RAM 235, 236 is not in use. Thus, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is not in use, so that the determination can be easily performed.

  Also, in this case, the MPU 231 transfers data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be started according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since a predetermined address is defined, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, drawing of the sprite is performed. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for the above can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading out image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process or a loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, transfer processing of image data can be executed using time when important processing in the display control apparatus 114 such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing is not performed. In addition, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed prior to the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage the video RAMs using the addresses held by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236, but is commonly used by the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly designate the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or regular video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but merely designates the address, and The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the regular video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the specification. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as an information indicating the storage destination of the data of the sprite, without using the storage RAM type, simply using the address set in the common address system. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connected to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be connected directly to 237. In addition, a bridge circuit is provided to convert the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 It is also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise of using a general mask ROM as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to be able to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is configured by a large capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit, for example, a hard disk It may be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 causes the image to be displayed without any problem at the time when it is desired to display by using the configuration described in the above embodiment. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the MPU 231 stores a part of the boot program to be executed first after releasing the system reset in the first program storage area 234d1. The first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium that can perform read operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first cancels the system reset in that area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the character ROM 234 and a first program storage area is provided thereon. It may store part of the boot program to be executed first.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program to be executed first in the area after releasing the system reset in the MPU 231 Is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can be read faster than the NAND flash memory 234a. The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program to be executed first after the system reset release in the MPU 231 may be stored in the memory. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234 d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like may be provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area may be provided thereon. A part of the boot program to be executed first after system reset release may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when it is detected in the ROM controller 234b that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When it is detected that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated "0000H" in the ROM controller 234b, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line You may output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, whether the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is already set in the buffer RAM 234c, Since the character ROM 234 is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the display main processing in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can.

  When ROM controller 234 b detects that the address designated by internal bus (bus line 240) designates a control program stored in first program storage area 234 d 1, first program storage area 234 d 1 is detected. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be directly read out from the memory and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can. In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. Thus, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by connecting to the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be provided directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. When the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video is not necessary even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  Although the above embodiment describes the case where the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more may be provided. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be made resident, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by the DRAM of one port type (one input / output port) is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. A type of RAM may be used. Thus, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed simultaneously. For example, while the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn, it is read from the character ROM 234 The process of writing the processed image data into the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The contents may be divided and the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least for residence in response to a received command received from the main control unit 110 or the audio lamp control unit 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably, it is resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is partially transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident is described, but all image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 You may In this case, since the image data stored in the nonresident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 If the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is largely different based on the command received from the image, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined timing. Good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept updated in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when the other resident images are updated. You may leave it. In addition, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out image data to be newly resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while not in use (ie, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). Image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 according to data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (ie, while image data corresponding to the transition image is not read) You may do it.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the content of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, after all image data to be resident is made resident in the resident video RAM 235, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when power failure is eliminated. Before the transfer of the main image data at power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is started in the display main process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control unit 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, this means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, and thus the image data transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is not performed. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be made non-execution by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is stored normally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for the power failure recovery. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, it is necessary to transfer the image data if the data of the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary stop or the like. Since time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Alternatively, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) with many data signal exchanges. Transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

  In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a has been described as one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. However, the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a buffer period (blank period) during scanning on the blank area which is a scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed A data capacity sufficient to complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 may be used as the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 generated in this blank period. .

  Although the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided is described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from the other buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while an area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another image data is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since processing can be performed, the time taken for the processing can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thereby, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after the power on of the power-on main image and the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image. Although the case of transferring to 235 b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on. Thus, using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 displays the image at power-on, while using the character ROM 234. The image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 during this time, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data corresponding to the image data, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. In addition, image data corresponding to the main image at power on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power on, and power is turned on using the image data corresponding to the main image stored in the normal video RAM 236. When image data is not read out from the resident video RAM 235 while transferring image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the hour main image, etc., Image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 through the buffer RAM 237a, the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power activation fluctuation. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235 b has been described, while image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. Directly transfer image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and power-on fluctuation image from character ROM 234 directly to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on fluctuation image area 235b of resident video RAM 235 without passing through buffer RAM 237a. It is also good. Also, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the power-on main image and power stored in the normal video RAM 236 While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuation image, the resident video RAM 235 If the image data is not read out from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Thus, transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without intervention of the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a back image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of the super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the contents of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, according to the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, the display control device 114 can change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command or the game state command. In addition, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10, and change the back image or the effect mode of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image after the change or the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the presentation mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 From the resident area, the back image can be displayed immediately using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

  In addition, the display control device 114 may change the rear surface image in accordance with the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the back image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 The controller 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main controller 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either the voice lamp controller 113 or the display controller 114. Then, when an error command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and sends an error command for further notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of the vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is on in the display setting process (see FIG. 50). The warning image setting process (see FIG. 51) may be performed when it is determined, to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 immediately. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 was described in the said embodiment, it replaces with the vibration sensor or with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 It is also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress that the flow of the ball is changed by the magnetic field such as a magnet and the ball is intentionally entered into the ball entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is An error command to be transmitted may be sent from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114 via the audio lamp control unit 113 or directly. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command that indicates an error may be transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, the image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is resident in the error message pictorial area 235 f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113 The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 to transmit the magnetic field error. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. The warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. Thereby, the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the audio lamp control device 113, or recognizes the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is not It can be suppressed.

  When the drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of one presentation is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time corresponding to the address in which the time for which the image for the frame is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) is represented as one unit, and the change in the sprite It may define color information specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452 d and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If color information to be displayed is specified, color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed. The drawing list may be created in place of the color information specified by the additional drawing content of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the drawing data necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 In correspondence with the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying is displayed as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and the new It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 displays the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, various sprites specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233 f Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. It may include transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data which is required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added for each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”, etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates the drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may configure it.

  Thus, the image controller 237 can transfer image data of a sprite used in drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, effects to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table May be This makes it possible to easily identify the drawing content of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to define drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table is defined not only for the additional drawing content but also including transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for drawing an image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. This makes it possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering, so from the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition The processing load required for the specification can be reduced as compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start", "high speed fluctuation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the display fluctuation pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the fluctuation production specified are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated. You may do so. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, in the display data table and the transfer data table, the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f using the common pointer 233f has been described. Alternatively, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing processing (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interruption signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Has been described and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 is a frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded each time the drawing list is received. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  In the above embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main display unit 110 is notified via the audio lamp control device 113 until the finalized display effect is finished. When neither the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the case of setting the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect to the display data table buffer 233 d Although this has been described, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233 d again. Also, in this case, until the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is Each time the process is ended, the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, the finalized display effect can be continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiment, a case was described where the demonstration effect was to change the back image and to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers from "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol including the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image after power-on from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and power on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b and displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on after the transfer is completed, transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control means 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power on after power on from the character ROM 234 to the power on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 at power on after power transfer is completed. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier after the power is turned on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be checked in the operation check in the player, the person in charge of the hall, or the factory at the time of manufacture. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation has started without any problems by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b. Thereby, when the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b and the display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 after that, the display fluctuation pattern command is received. Based on the above, it is possible to display a simple variation display on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b be performed immediately after displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the fluctuation display by the power-on fluctuation image.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table should be transferred to the contents of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing contents) or to that time, corresponding to the time that represents 20 milliseconds as one unit. Although the case of defining the information (transfer data information) of the image data has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the display content is defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, in place of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data It may be determined whether or not it has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of that predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when transferring image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data discrimination flag 233j. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the case where the MPU 231 performs the process of disabling the transfer process has been described. The process may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233 j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be stored. Also, the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in a work RAM provided in the image controller 237. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in this case, the MPU 231 sends an image to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. Alternatively, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where only the image data corresponding to “rear surface A” among the plurality of rear surface images is made to reside in the rear surface image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be made to reside in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, transfer processing of image data from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the back image of super reach expected to have a high or high frequency of occurrence resident in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 transmits the transfer instruction at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case of controlling the image controller 237 to transfer the image data instructed in step from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The display data is displayed at the top of the display data table. The MPU 231 describes information on the type of sprite required in the table, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the type of sprite to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer data to the video RAM 236.

  In the above embodiment, in the back surface C that is the back image of the "island stage", the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time is described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time Good. In addition, not only images that scroll with time or changes in color tone as back images, but instead of such back images, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time It may be moving or changing.

  Although the above embodiment has described the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuation effect is performed, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 and the third symbol display device 81 Is provided with another fourth symbol display device, and combined with the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, even if continuous notice effect is executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device Good. In this case, control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, an award winning feature may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 in accordance with various effects, and the bonus item may be combined with the fluctuation effect and actuated in a predetermined mode to perform continuous advance notice effect. In addition, the continuous announcement effect may be executed by causing the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 to output the sound for the continuous advance announcement effect by the control of the audio lamp control device 113, and the electric decoration portion of the pachinko machine 10 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the change effects.

  Thereby, every time when the fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the prize is operated in a predetermined mode Alternatively, the player can be made to have a feeling of jackpot expectation by outputting a voice from the voice output device 226 or lighting or blinking the lighting units 29 to 33. In addition, the player usually pays attention to the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed and continues playing the game, but the display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 Since the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the action of the special effects, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33, a different effect is produced to the player. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effects can be easily and easily continued by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, activation of characters, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33. An advance notice can be made.

  In addition, if the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice lamp control device 113. The main control unit 110 causes the main control unit 110 to perform a determination of acceptance or rejection at the start of the change, causes the voice lamp control unit 113 to perform continuous advance notice effects, and causes the display control unit 114 to perform change effects. In the case of performing the advance presentation, each control device can share each processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so it is possible to suppress the performance required for the MPU of each control device.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect in the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the character in the predetermined mode, the voice from the voice output device 226 Continuous advance notice effects may be performed by combining at least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and interlockingly controlling them. As a result, it is possible to execute a more diverse continuous notice effect. In addition, execution method of continuous announcement production (the indication with the 3rd symbol display 81, the indication with the 4th symbol display, the action of the special feature, the voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the electric decoration 29-33) Or, by changing the combination of them, the continuous notice effect mode selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (15R probability variation big hit of special symbol, 15R normal big hit of special symbol, out of special symbol) You may prepare two or more.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notice effects other than a fluctuation production was displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, when continuous notice effects are performed, it is necessarily limited to this. Instead of the above, continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called "chance", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, as a stop symbol displayed when the change effect is finished. In this case, in the stop type command processing (refer to FIG. 37) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and other stop symbol determination The flag may be set to off. In the command determination process, the continuous notice command process is executed after the stop identification command process, so the chance symbol is set as a stop pattern instead of the stop symbol set by the reception of the display stop identification command, so the fluctuation stop Sometimes you can see the chance eyes fixed. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as the stop symbol for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

  Further, in the audio lamp control device 113, the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined by the continuous advance notification determination process (S1612) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 38), and the continuous advance presentation effect mode is determined. At this stage, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the execution decision of the continuous advance notice effect and the continuous notice effect mode. Then, the display control device 114 sets a transmission instruction to transfer image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in response to the reception of this command. It is also good. As a result, transfer of image data of the continuous notice image type used in the continuous notice mode can be started from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the start of the change presentation where the continuous notice effect is performed Before the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type is used by the continuous notice effect, the image data can be surely stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, the display control device 114 may store the image data used for the continuous advance notice effect in the sub-area dedicated to the continuous advance notice effect image provided in the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the image data used in the continuous advance notice effect from being overwritten by another image data, so the image data corresponding to the desired continuous advance image type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 The probability can be increased. Thus, it is possible to suppress repeated transfer of image data used in continuous advance notice effects.

  In addition, the stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 may include a signal notifying that it is the last continuous notice effect. Thus, since the display control device 114 can recognize that the display of the continuous advance notice effect is the last, while the continuous advance notice effect is being performed, it is stored in the normal video RAM 236 used for the continuous advance notice effect. When control is performed so that image data is not overwritten, cancellation of the overwrite control can be easily performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the information about the execution of continuous notice effect and the continuous notice image type is included in the display change pattern command, the display data table not corresponding to the continuous notice image for each change pattern, and each continuous The display control device 114 prepares a display data table corresponding to each notice image type, and the display control device 114 displays a corresponding display data table according to the change pattern indicated by the display change pattern command and the continuous notice image type. It may be set to 233 d. That is, the display data table may include the drawing content corresponding to the fluctuation pattern and the drawing content of the continuous notice effect corresponding to the continuous notice image type. In this case, setting of the additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice type is not necessary. Therefore, since the data table to be set can be reduced, the increase in processing load can be suppressed. In this case, the transfer instruction of the image data corresponding to the continuous notice image type may be performed in accordance with the reception of the display variation pattern command. As a result, one transfer data table may be prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and therefore, an increase in data tables can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the change effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is a voice lamp control device based on the stop symbol (long reach, reach other than forward or backward, complete miss reach) determined by the main controller 110. Although the case where it was set by 113 was explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided by the sound lamp control device 113, the stop symbol of the last fluctuation effect that has been held is If it is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be replaced with the stop symbol of the reach aspect out of reach, instead of the stop symbol determined by the main control unit 110. As a result, the stop symbol of the last variation effect for which the continuous notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control unit 110, but is always an out-of-front reach, giving the player a high sense of expectation. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, when performing continuous advance notice effects along with all of the pending change effects, each change effect is performed in an effect mode based on the lottery result performed at the start of each change, but in this case It may be configured to change the effect mode of change effects other than the last change effect on hold, to out-of-change effects. The variation pattern is changed according to the setting condition of the continuous advance presentation effect and the number of times of the continuous advance presentation effect executed by the process of generating the display change pattern command in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1821 in FIG. 40). May be In addition, when the stop symbol after the change effect is a big hit, the effect mode of the change effect is displayed based on the change pattern determined by the main control unit 110 without updating the effect mode of the change effect. May be Here, even if continuous notice effects are continuously performed, the player's sense of expectation if the situation where the jackpot does not appear as a result continues even though the mode of the corresponding change effect is, for example, the super reach change effect. There is a risk that they will move backwards, but with the continuous advance notice effect being performed continuously, the fluctuation effect other than the change effect performed last is performed finally by being performed by the change effect continuously. It is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the fluctuation effect.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, when execution of continuous notice production was decided, although a case where continuous notice production was always performed in the 3rd symbol display device 81 was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this, for example, continuous notice When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in a situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed when performing variation effects. Alternatively, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced in size so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow-noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In the above-described embodiment, although the case where one first entrance 64 is arranged in the game board 13 where the lottery of the big hit is started when the ball enters the ball has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entry ports where entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started, information indicating which of the first ball entry is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, when the sound lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect when the ball holding ball number command is received, all the first ball entrances are performed at that time. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed over the fluctuation effect (hold ball) held by the mouth. In addition, in pachinko machines that are provided with a plurality of first ball entrances and preferentially execute the fluctuation effects reserved in one first ball entrance, the fluctuation effects are preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only when the ball enters the first ball entrance. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority, the continuous announcement effect for the fluctuation effect held at the first entrance with low priority It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where continuous advance notice effects are not easily finished when the fluctuation effect is continuously suspended at the first entrance with high priority.

  In the above embodiment, when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c in the main control device 110 is increased, the case of transmitting the holding ball number command from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, every time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is sent from the main control unit 110 It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc., the special symbol holding ball number counter Every time the value (N) of 203c is updated, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 may be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 it can.

  In the above embodiment, when the start of the continuous advance presentation effect is determined in the voice lamp control device 113 when the pre-reading command is received, the continuous advance presentation effect is executed for all the fluctuation effects pending at that time. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it may be determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each of further variation effects. As a result, since the continuous advance notice effect does not appear or does not appear for each of the fluctuation effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance effect, and perform the effect that does not make the player bored. Can. In this case, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated each time the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and a counter for determining whether to perform the continuous notice effect in each variation effect is determined. You may provide. Then, in the continuous advance notice determination process, when performing continuous advance notice effects (S 1716: Yes), the value of the counter for determining whether to execute the continuous advance notice effects in each variation effect is limited to a predetermined value. The continuous notice effect may be started. Further, in this case, the number (range) of the predetermined value of the counter for setting the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding fluctuation effect may be changed according to the condition. As this condition, for example, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b at the time of judging whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect, the number of executions of the remaining continuous advance notice effect, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect in which the judgment is made , A game state after the end of a series of continuous advance notice effects (a special symbol of 15R, a special symbol of 15R, a normal symbol, a special symbol of a special symbol), or a combination of two or more of these. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each of the change effects is changed according to the condition, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous notice effect in each change effect. .

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113, and the voice lamp control unit 113 instructs the display control unit 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing output of each sound and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, instead of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 such as an error occurrence command and notified to the display control device 114, a continuous notice flag or an error occurrence Various flags such as flags are generated, and based on the flags, display data table and transfer data table are set in display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, and various image data such as warning image are generated. Alternatively, it may set an instruction to transfer necessary image data.

  In the above embodiment, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the second entrance 67 are configured to be respectively suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times. It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a design along a predetermined path such as direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown. A display mode for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and an aspect of effect including dynamic display of the identification information according to a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And at least one of the first to fifth different lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery means. In the gaming machine provided with the first character, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where the game medium is difficult to enter is opened for a first period. Opening control means and, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results, a second opening in which the entrance is opened for a second period shorter than the first period System Means, entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and game media at the entrance Means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the player enters, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state when the second lottery result is the second lottery result Before If the second gaming state setting means set as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained Playing state maintaining means, a lottery result storing means for storing at least that effect when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means It is characterized by further comprising: mode switching means for switching the mode selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means when any of the first and second lottery results is obtained. A game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the mode of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means corresponds to the lottery result Control is performed by the effect control means so as to be selected by the mode selecting means and the effect of the selected mode is executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine A1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result. In the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first and second lottery results without the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming the third lottery result The selected mode can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, it is possible to allow the player to continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  The gaming machine A1 includes counting means for counting the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result storage means stores the number counted by the counting means When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first or second lottery result, the mode switching means responds to the number of times counted by the counting means. A game machine A2 characterized in that the mode selected in the mode selection means is switched.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the counted number of times is stored in the lottery result storage means. Then, in the mode switching means, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the mode selecting means is selected according to the number of times counted by the counting means The mode is switched. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. As a result, game media can easily enter the entrance, and a predetermined game value can be easily awarded. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change, and it is not easy for gaming media to enter the entrance. Therefore, the third lottery result is more advantageous for the player than the fourth lottery result. According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of times the player has reached the third lottery result which is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. Therefore, since the player's discomfort can be further reduced, the player can be more motivated to participate in the game.

  A display mode for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and an aspect of effect including dynamic display of the identification information according to a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And at least one of the first to fifth different lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery means. In the gaming machine provided with the first character, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where the game medium is difficult to enter is opened for a first period. Opening control means and, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results, a second opening in which the entrance is opened for a second period shorter than the first period System Means, entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and game media at the entrance Means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the player enters, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state when the second lottery result is the second lottery result Before If the second gaming state setting means set as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained Playing state maintaining means, a lottery result storing means for storing at least that effect when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means It is characterized by further comprising: mode switching means for switching the mode selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means when any of the first and second lottery results is obtained. A gaming machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the mode of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means corresponds to the lottery result. Control is performed by the effect control means so as to be selected by the mode selecting means and the effect of the selected mode is executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine B1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result. In the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first and second lottery results without the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming the third lottery result The selected mode can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, it is possible to allow the player to continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In any of gaming machine B1 and gaming machines A1 to A2, among the lottery performed in the lottery means, the number of lotterys made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result The lottery result storage unit stores the number of times counted by the counting unit, and the mode switching unit is configured to count the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery unit. When any of the second lottery results, the number of times counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and whether the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state The state is provided with a determination means for determining, when it is determined by the determination means that the number is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state The mode selected in the selection means is switched to a mode different from the mode selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means A game machine B2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B2, among the lottery performed in the lottery means, the number of lotterys made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result is counted by the counting means and the counted lottery The number of times is stored in the lottery result storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the number of times counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine When it is determined by the determination means whether the game is in the second gaming state, the aspect selected in the mode selection means by the mode switching means is selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, A mode different from the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means is switched. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, it is not easy to select the first or second lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means. Therefore, after the fourth lottery result is reached, the first or second lottery result is selected within the predetermined number of times without changing to the third lottery result and in the second gaming state. The probability of failure is quite low. According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the first or second lottery result is selected in a state where the probability of selection of the first or second lottery result is considerably low. The player can be made to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to have a sense of surprise that the first or second lottery result has been selected in a situation with a very low probability and satisfaction that he is lucky. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have more desire to participate in the game.

  A display mode for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and an aspect of effect including dynamic display of the identification information according to a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And at least one of the first to fifth different lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery means. In the gaming machine provided with the first character, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, the entrance where the game medium is difficult to enter is opened for a first period. Opening control means and, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results, a second opening in which the entrance is opened for a second period shorter than the first period System Means, entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, and game media at the entrance Means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when the player enters, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, First gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state having a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the first gaming state when the second lottery result is the second lottery result Before If the second gaming state setting means set as the gaming state of the gaming machine and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained Playing state maintaining means, a lottery result storing means for storing at least that effect when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means It is characterized by further comprising: mode switching means for switching the mode selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means when any of the first and second lottery results is obtained. A gaming machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition, the mode of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed on the display means corresponds to the lottery result. Control is performed by the effect control means so as to be selected by the mode selecting means and the effect of the selected mode is executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine C1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes any of the first and second lottery results. In the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either of the first and second lottery results without the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becoming the third lottery result The selected mode can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to participate in the game, it is possible to allow the player to continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  First counting means for counting the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result in any of the gaming machine C1, the gaming machines B1 to B2 and the gaming machines A1 to A2; And second counting means for counting the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result, and the lottery result storage means includes the number of times counted by the first counting means, and The number of times counted by the second counting means is stored, and the mode switching means, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, According to the number counted by the first counting means and the number counted by the second counting means, the game machine C2 is characterized in that the mode selected in the mode selecting means is switched.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the first counting means counts the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and the number of times the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result Is counted by the second counting means. Then, the number of times counted by the first counting means and the number of times counted by the second counting means are stored in the lottery result storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the number of times counted by the first counting means by the mode switching means, and counting by the second counting means The mode selected in the mode selecting means is switched according to the number of times the user has made the request. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. As a result, game media can easily enter the entrance, and a predetermined game value can be easily awarded. On the other hand, even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change, and it is not easy for gaming media to enter the entrance. Therefore, the third lottery result is more advantageous for the player than the fourth lottery result. According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the number of times the player has become the third lottery result which is advantageous for the player and the number of the player who is the fourth lottery result which is not advantageous for the player The player can be made to grasp. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. Therefore, since the player's discomfort can be further reduced, the player can be more motivated to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C2, the gaming machines B1 to B2, and the gaming machines A1 to A2, the lottery result storage means is configured to select the third lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, and When any of 4 lottery results is obtained, lottery result information indicating the lottery result is stored in association with the order of the lottery, and the mode switching means is a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means. When either is the first or second lottery result, according to each lottery result information stored in the lottery result storage means and the order associated with the lottery result information, A game machine C3 characterized in that the mode selected in the mode selection means is switched.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the third lottery result or the fourth lottery result, the lottery result information indicating the lottery result is the lottery It is associated with the order and stored in the lottery result storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, each lottery result information stored in the lottery result storage means by the mode switching means and the lottery result Depending on the order associated with the information, the aspect selected in the aspect selection means is switched. Therefore, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the player is made to grasp the order which resulted in the third lottery result which is advantageous for the player and the order which resulted in the fourth lottery result which is not advantageous for the player. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand more in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. Therefore, since the player's discomfort can be further reduced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine D1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed on a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

A gaming machine D3 characterized in that each gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Conventionally, a big hit lottery is performed along with the game ball winning to the starting opening, and a variable effect or a big hit effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the display screen, or the lottery result is notified by a sound or a lamp. Pachinko machines are known. The pachinko machine is provided with a low probability state in which the probability of becoming a big hit in a big hit lottery is low and a high probability state in which the probability of becoming a big win is higher than the low probability state as gaming states. One of the game states is set. In addition, as a lottery result of the jackpot lottery, for example, a probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot, and a deviation are provided, and when it becomes a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a probability change jackpot, the gaming state is set to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot effect, and if the lottery result is a normal jackpot, the gaming state is set to a low probability state after the jackpot effect is ended. Be done. In the pachinko machine, the gaming state changes according to the lottery result, but the lottery result is indicated by effects such as a fluctuation effect or a jackpot effect, so the player pays attention to effects such as a fluctuation effect or a specific effect. , You can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine.
In this type of pachinko machine, in addition to the above-described lottery results, for example, a hit such as a sudden hit and a small hit, and a fluctuation presentation and a hit presentation according to the hit (hereinafter referred to as "specific production") In addition, the interest of the game is improved by increasing the chance of winning and the pattern of the effect. In such a pachinko machine, when a big hit lottery is performed, if the lottery result is similar to the conventional one (that is, a probability change big hit, a normal big hit, or a departure), the fluctuation according to the lottery result as before An effect or a jackpot effect is performed, and a predetermined game value is awarded to the player according to the lottery result. However, if the lottery result is a hit or a small hit, regardless of the lottery result, the predetermined gaming value is not given to the player, and similar fluctuation effects and specific effects are obtained. To be done. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a hit, the gaming state is set to the high probability state after the end of the specific effect, and if the lottery result is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained.
As described above, in such a pachinko machine, similar fluctuation effects and specific effects are performed when the lottery result is a hit or a small hit, so the player pays attention to effects such as the change effects and the specific effects. Even if it is, it becomes difficult to distinguish the lottery results, and it becomes unclear whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine has changed. Then, once the gaming state becomes unknown, the player continues to play pachinko until the lottery result is indicated by a random change jackpot or a jackpot effect or the like when the lottery result becomes a jackpot or a regular jackpot after this. Can not be grasped (for example, patent document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-333089).
However, even if the player is able to grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine because the lottery result has become a big hit or a big hit normally, the gaming state is about the gaming state during which the gaming state is unknown, the player is I can not grasp. Therefore, even if the lottery result is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot and a predetermined gaming value is given, the player may feel uncomfortable because the process of winning is unknown. If the player is asked to question the player, the player will continue playing the game without solving the question, and thereafter, the player will continue to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's willingness to participate in the game may be reduced.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of continuously giving a player the desire to participate in a game. .
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is based on a display means for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means. And an effect control means for controlling the effect of the aspect selected by the mode selecting means to be executed. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results. The first opening control means for opening the entry difficult to enter the game medium for the first period, and the entry when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results Mouth It is difficult for the game medium to enter the entrance when the second opening control means opens for a second period shorter than the first period, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result The entrance maintaining means for maintaining the state, the game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to the player when game media enter the entrance, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means The gaming state of the gaming machine is a first gaming state with a high probability that the first to third lottery results will be selected in the lottery by the lottery means if any of the first and third lottery results. When the first gaming state setting means to be set as and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means Ru A second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state lower than the first gaming state as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth lottery results Storing at least the gaming state maintaining means for maintaining the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the third lottery result when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result When the lottery result of the lottery result by the lottery result storage means and the lottery means by the lottery means becomes either of the first and second lottery results, selection is made in the mode selection means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means And a mode switching means for switching the mode to be selected.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, among the lottery made in the lottery means, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is made after the fourth lottery result The counting means for counting the number of times of lottery is provided, and the lottery result storage means is for storing the number of times counted by the counting means, and the mode switching means is for selecting the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means When the first or second lottery result is reached, the number counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine is the second gaming state The apparatus further includes a determination unit that determines whether or not the number is one or more and a predetermined number or less by the determination unit, and the state of the gaming machine is determined to be the second gaming state. The mode selected in the mode selecting means is switched to another mode different from the mode selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means and the embodiment switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means is there.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the mode of the effect including the aspect of the dynamic display of the identification information displayed by the display means when the lottery is performed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the start condition The effect control means performs control so as to be selected by the mode selecting means according to the lottery result and to execute the effect of the selected mode. At least the first to fifth different lottery results are provided as the lottery results of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results, When the entry difficult to enter is opened for the first period by the first opening control means, and the drawing result of the drawing by the drawing means is any of the third and fourth drawing results, the entrance is the second opening control means The second period is shorter than the first period. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result, when the entrance is maintained by the entrance maintaining means because the game medium is difficult to enter, and the game medium enters the entrance, the player A predetermined game value is given by the game value giving means. In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, the first probability is high that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means. When the gaming state is set by the first gaming state setting means as the gaming state of the gaming machine, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the lottery from the first to the third in the lottery by the lottery means A second gaming state in which the probability of selection of the result is lower than the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine by the second gaming state setting means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fourth and fifth When it is any of the lottery results, the gaming state of the gaming machine is maintained by the gaming state maintaining means. Then, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, at least that is stored in the lottery result storage means, and the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first and second lottery results In any case, the mode switching means switches the mode to be selected in the mode selecting means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means. When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third or fourth lottery result, in any case, the entrance is opened for a second period, and it may be difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result. . Since the gaming state of the gaming machine is set according to the lottery result, when it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the lottery result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine thereafter, and the process of the lottery is unknown May be According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result, and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is either the first or second lottery result And the case where the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means does not become the third lottery result and thereafter, the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result. The mode selected in the mode selecting means can be switched by the mode switching means. Therefore, even if the player has made the player feel uncomfortable about the fact that the player has difficulty in recognizing the lottery result and the process of the subsequent lottery has become unclear, the player will play the lottery result which is difficult to recognize. Can make people understand. Therefore, since the player can be made to grasp the process of the lottery which has become unknown, it is possible to suppress the player from continuously having a sense of discomfort. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to participate in the game, and therefore, there is an effect that the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, among the lottery performed in the lottery means, the number of lotterys made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result is counted by the counting means, and the counted number of the lottery is the lottery result It is stored in the storage means. And, when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes either the first or second lottery result, the number of times counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the state of the gaming machine When it is determined by the determination means whether the game is in the second gaming state, the aspect selected in the mode selection means by the mode switching means is selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means, A mode different from the mode switched according to the contents of the lottery result storage means is switched. When the third lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, the first gaming state is set as the gaming state of the gaming machine, so the first or second lottery result is easily selected in the lottery by the lottery means Become. On the other hand, since the gaming state of the gaming machine does not change even if the fourth lottery result is selected in the lottery by the lottery means, it is not easy to select the first or second lottery result in the lottery by the lottery means. Therefore, after the fourth lottery result is reached, the first or second lottery result is selected within the predetermined number of times without changing to the third lottery result and in the second gaming state. The probability of failure is quite low. According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the lottery result which is difficult to recognize, the first or second lottery result is obtained with the probability of selection of the first or second lottery result being considerably low. The player can be made aware of the selection. Therefore, it is possible to make the player know in detail the process of the lottery which has become unknown. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to have a sense of surprise that the first or second lottery result has been selected in a situation with a very low probability and satisfaction that he is lucky. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more continuously motivated to participate in the game.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
65a specific winning combination (entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 main control unit 113 voice lamp control unit 114 display control unit 223h small hit after variation counter (lottery result storing hand position)
S415: No, S417: No, S1005 Entrance Maintaining Means S415: No, S417: No, S1207: No Playing State Maintaining Means S416, S1005, S1102, S1103 First Opening Control Means S418, S1005, S1202, S1203 Second Opening Control means S502 to S505 Lottery means S508, S513, S515 Mode selection means S516, S1001, S1402, S1412, S1414, S2301 to S2307 Effect control means S1002 Game value giving means S1112, S1113, S1207, S1208 First game state setting means S11 , S1114 Second game state setting means
S1802 counting means S1805, S1806 judgment means S1808 to S1810, S1820 Aspect switching means

Claims (2)

A display mode for displaying identification information, a lottery means for performing a lottery based on establishment of a start condition, and an aspect of effect including dynamic display of the identification information according to a lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means And at least one of the first to fifth different lottery results as the lottery result of the lottery means. In the gaming machine provided with
First opening control means for opening an entry difficult to enter the game medium for a first period when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and second lottery results;
Second opening control means for opening the entrance for a second period shorter than the first period when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the third and fourth lottery results;
Entrance maintaining means for maintaining the entrance in a state in which the gaming medium is difficult to enter when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the fifth lottery result;
Game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to a player when a game medium enters the entrance;
When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the first and third lottery results, there is a high probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means First gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state of 1 as the gaming state of the gaming machine;
When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is the second lottery result, the probability that the first to third lottery results are selected in the lottery by the lottery means is more than the first gaming state Second gaming state setting means for setting a low second gaming state as the gaming state of the gaming machine;
Gaming state maintaining means for maintaining the gaming state of the gaming machine when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is any of the fourth and fifth lottery results;
Lottery result storage means for storing at least that effect when the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the third lottery result;
When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes any of the first and second lottery results, the aspect to switch the mode selected in the mode selection means according to the contents of the lottery result storage means A game machine characterized by comprising switching means. Among the lottery performed in the lottery means, the lottery means is provided with a counting means for counting the number of lotterys made after the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the fourth lottery result,
The lottery result storage unit is
Storing the number of times counted by the counting means;
The mode switching means is
When the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means is either the first or second lottery result, the number of times counted by the counting means is one or more and a predetermined number or less, and the gaming machine A determination means for determining whether the second game state is the second game state,
If the number of times is one or more and a predetermined number or less by the determination means, and the state of the gaming machine is determined to be the second gaming state, an aspect selected by the mode selection means The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the mode selected according to the lottery result of the lottery by the lottery means and the mode switched to another aspect according to the contents of the lottery result storage means are described. Of gaming machines.